The British Columbia Field Sampling Manual




                     Part B
Air and Air Emissions Testing




               Her Majesty the Queen in

         Right of the Province of British Columbia

                           2020

                   All Rights Reserved
1 Introduction
Part B of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual (the ‘BCFSM’ or the ‘Manual’) provides guidance and instructions
for Air and Air Emissions Testing. Part B of the BCFSM is divided into two sub-parts each of which covers
a specific aspect of air testing. Part B1 deals with Ambient Air Quality Monitoring and was published in 2020
to provide consistency in the operation of ambient air monitoring stations and the data produced by those
stations. Part B2 deals with Stationary Air Emissions Testing. Part B2 was initially published in 1999,
underwent a comprehensive revision in 2001, and a minor revision in 2013.


1.1       Part B1
Part B1 provides guidance and instruction for operators of ambient air monitoring stations. The information
contained in Part B1 is consistent with the information provided by the National Air Pollution Surveillance
Program of Environment and Climate Change Canada. Ambient air monitoring stations that generate
ambient air quality data for submission to provincial agencies are required to be designed, operated and
maintained as specified in Part B1 of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual. Detailed information regarding
ambient air monitoring methods is provided in Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) located in the
Appendices section of this Part of the BCFSM. Additional specifications and requirements may be
prescribed in Permits issued by the Province of British Columbia.


1.2       Part B2
The information and requirements contained in this ‘Part’ of the BCFSM are intended to supplement and
update various stack sampling reference methods and clarify specific points as well as stating any
requirements which may be unique to the Province. Part B2 provides a complete package of information
including continuous emissions monitoring, calibration requirements and method specific reporting
requirements. Detailed information, schematics and templated forms are provided in the appendices
section of this Part of the BCFSM. Part B2 was reformatted in 2020 however the technical information and
details provided in this Part have not been altered since it’s most recent revision in 2013.
Link to Part B2 Table of Contents
                 Part B1
Ambient Air Quality Monitoring




             Her Majesty the Queen in

       Right of the Province of British Columbia

                         2020

                 All Rights Reserved
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring


Part B1 Table of Contents
1 Ambient Air Monitoring                                                             5
1.1     Introduction                                                                 5
1.2     Purpose and Scope                                                            5

2 Monitoring Station Siting and Design                                               6
2.1     General Considerations                                                       6
2.2     Station Siting                                                               7
2.3     Installation Considerations                                                  7
2.4     Electrical Power Supply                                                      7
2.5     Internal Shelter Climate Control                                             8
2.6     Sample Inlet Placement                                                       8
2.7     Manifold Design                                                              9
2.8     Particulate Matter Monitoring Considerations                                 9
2.9     Passive Sampling Considerations                                             10
2.10    Rooftop Installations                                                       10

3 Continuous Monitoring and Sampling Methods                                        12
3.1     Methods and Performance Specifications                                      12

4 Instrument Installation                                                           15
4.1     Pre-Deployment Testing                                                      15
4.2     Station Start-Up Records                                                    15

5 Routine Operations                                                                16
5.1     Operational and Quality Assurance Plans                                     16
5.2     Inspections and Maintenance                                                 16
5.3     Non-Conformance and Corrective Action                                       17

6 Gas Analyzer Calibrations and Verifications                                       18
6.1     General Descriptions                                                        18
6.2     Calibration Frequency                                                       18
6.3     Zero and Span Checks                                                        19
6.4     Multi-point Verification and Calibration                                    20
6.5     Parameter Specific Calibration Requirements                                 21
        6.5.1    Hydrogen Sulphide & Total Reduced Sulphur                          21
        6.5.2    Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX)                                           21
        6.5.3    Gas Phase Titration (GPT)                                          22
        6.5.4    Ozone (O3)                                                         22
        6.5.5    Sulphur dioxide (SO2)                                              22


                                           British Columbia Field Sampling Manual    i
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

        6.5.6    Ammonia (NH3)                                                      22
        6.5.7    BTEX                                                               23
        6.5.8    Methane/Non-Methane Hydrocarbons                                   23
        6.5.9    Calibration Gas Standards                                          23
6.6     Method Specific Calibration Requirements                                    23
        6.6.1    PM2.5 Continuous Monitors and Filter Based PM Samplers             23
6.7     Documentation                                                               24
6.8     Measurement Uncertainty                                                     25

7 Collection and Validation of Continuous Monitoring Data                           26
7.1     Data Collection and Management                                              26
7.2     Data Validation Process                                                     26
7.3     Data Flags & Logs                                                           28
7.4     Level 0 - Preliminary Validation                                            29
7.5     Level 1 - Primary Validation                                                29
7.6     Level 2 - Final Validation                                                  31
7.7     Level 3 - Independent Data Review                                           32
7.8     Post Validation                                                             32

8 Collection and Validation of Non-Continuous Monitoring Data                       33
8.1     Preparatory Considerations                                                  33
8.2     High-Volume Sampling for Trace Metals                                       34
        8.2.1    Background                                                         34
        8.2.2    Quality Control                                                    34
        8.2.3    Analysis of Blank Filters                                          35
        8.2.4    Sampling                                                           35

9 Training        37
10 Documentation and Record Keeping                                                 38
11 Audits         39
11.1    Audit Process                                                               40
11.2    Audit Results                                                               40
11.3    Audit Follow-Up                                                             40

12 References                                                                       41
13 Revision History                                                                 43




                                           British Columbia Field Sampling Manual    ii
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring



Part B1 Table of Contents (Cont'd)


Tables
           Table 2.6.1: Minimum Separation Distances Between Sample Inlets and Roadways                    9
           Table 2.6.2: Inlet Separation Distances                                                         9
           Table 2.10.1: Rooftop Installation Site Specific Health and Safety Considerations              11
           Table 3.1.1: Continuous Ambient Air Equipment                                                  12
           Table 3.1.2: Minimum Performance Specifications for Continuous Ambient Air Equipment           13
           Table 5.1.1: Routine Inspection/Maintenance Summary                                            16
           Table 6.2.1: Gas Analyzer Calibration Frequency and Triggers                                   19
           Table 6.4.1: Gas Analyzer Tolerance Levels and Acceptance Criteria                             20
           Table 6.4.2: Zero Air and Span Gas Supply and Regulator Requirements                           21
           Table 6.6.1: Tolerance Levels for PM2.5 Continuous Monitors and Filter Based PM Samplers       24
           Table 6.6.2: Acceptance Criteria for PM2.5 Continuous Monitors and Filter Based PM Samplers    24
           Table 6.7.1: Calibration Documentation                                                         25
           Table 7.2.1: Summary of Data Validation Requirements                                           27
           Table 7.4.1: Level 0 Verification Checklist                                                    29
           Table 7.5.1: Level 1 Validation Checklist                                                      30
           Table 7.6.1: Level 2 Validation Checklist                                                      32




Appendices

Appendix 1           Forms and Checklists                                                                44
Analyzer Calibration Checklist                                                                            45
Placeholder for Inspection and Maintenance Form                                                          47
Placeholder for Non-Conformance and Corrective Action Form                                                48

Appendix 2           Standard Operating Procedures                                                       49
Continuous Measurement of Ambient CO                                                                      50
Continuous Measurement of Ambient H2S and TRS                                                             54
Continuous Measurement of Ambient NOx                                                                     59
Continuous Measurement of Ambient O3                                                                      64
Continuous Measurement of Ambient PM using a Beta Attenuation Monitor                                     68
Continuous Measurement of Ambient PM using Integrated Nephelometry and Beta Attenuation                   74
Sample Collection of Dustfall (Settleable Particulate Matter) and Metals                                  79


                                           British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                          iii
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

Non-Continuous Measurement of Particulate Matter in Ambient Air – by High Volume Sampler           84
Non-Continuous Measurement of Particulate Matter in Ambient Air Using a Low Flow Rate Sampler      92
Continuous Measurement of Ambient SO2                                                              98
Passive/Diffusive Method of Air Sample Collection                                                 103
Continuous Measurement of Ambient NH3                                                             108
Non-Continuous Measurement of Ambient Formaldehyde                                                113
Non-Continuous Measurement of Ambient Methane and Non-Methane Hydrocarbons Using Gas Chromatography118
Semi-Continuous Measurement of Ambient BTEX                                                       123
Ambient Air Quality and Meteorological Data Validation                                            127




                                         British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                     iv
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring



1 Ambient Air Monitoring
1.1       Introduction
This Part (Part B1) of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual (the ‘BCFSM’ or the ‘Manual’) provides guidance and
instructions for operators of ambient air monitoring stations. Ambient air monitoring stations that generate
air quality data for submission to provincial agencies are required to be designed, operated and maintained
as specified in this Part of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual. Detailed information regarding ambient air
monitoring methods is provided in Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) located in the Appendices section
of this Part of the BCFSM. Additional specifications and requirements may be prescribed in Permits issued
by the Province of British Columbia.
The information presented in Part B1 of the BCFSM is derived in part from information published by the
National Air Pollution Surveillance Program (NAPS), the United States (US) Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) 2013 QA handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems Volume II Ambient Air Quality
Monitoring Program, and industry accepted best practices.


1.2       Purpose and Scope
The primary purpose of the guidance provided in this section of the British Columbia Field Sampling Manual
is to support operators of ambient air quality monitoring stations within British Columbia to produce reliable
and defensible data. The scope of this section includes all aspects of air quality data generation. Air quality
data collected by the Province is used to inform health advisories, air shed capacity decisions, permit
decisions and policy development. Due to these important data usages it is essential that the quality of the
data meets or exceeds the requirements stipulated within this Part of the BCFSM. The information
presented within this section has been developed to ensure that air quality data generated in all regions of
British Columbia is collected and reported consistently and is truly representative of the region in which it
is generated.
Data quality is affected by every aspect of air quality monitoring. Location and siting requirements ensure
the air being sampled is representative and consistent with the stations monitoring objectives. The
instrumentation deployed at a monitoring station will determine the accuracy and precision of
measurements and station maintenance will ensure the instrumentation is functioning at an acceptable
level of performance producing consistent and reliable data. Consistency in siting, installation, operation,
maintenance, reporting and data management procedures help to ensure that data generated across the
Province are sufficiently comparable, accurate, complete and representative. The purpose of this section
of the BCFSM is to provide the guidance necessary to achieve those essential elements.




                             British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                Page 5 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring



2 Monitoring Station Siting and Design
An instrument, or collection of instruments that are stationed at a single location to quantify the
concentration of airborne pollutants is considered a monitoring station.
Planning the design of a monitoring station involves several critical aspects such as location, siting, power
requirements and instrumentation. Monitoring stations can be installed in an existing permanent building, a
ground-level enclosure or a rooftop. Design considerations for all of these aspects are driven by the station’s
monitoring objectives. The development and understanding of a monitoring station’s objectives is crucial
and forms the first step in designing an ambient air quality monitoring station.


2.1       General Considerations
Ambient air quality monitoring stations must meet the following conditions:
    ›   Stations must meet the following Regulations and Codes:
            o    Provincial requirements of Worksafe B.C.;
            o    B.C. Safety Authority;
            o    Canadian Standards Association (CSA); and,
            o    Provincial electrical and applicable building codes.
If any of the information or conditions presented in this section contravenes or is interpreted to contravene
or contradict applicable legislation, the applicable legislation takes precedence.
    ›   Site location and access considerations:
            o    Sites should be accessible and secure from unauthorized access;
            o    Access to sites should not be impeded by snow or seasonal closures;
            o    Ideally, access to sites should be available 24 hours a day for all 7 days of the week; and,
            o    Sites and any external equipment (sample inlets, etc.) should be located where they can
                 be protected as best as possible from vandalism.
    ›   The shelter must protect the station’s instrumentation from:
            o    Precipitation and rodent impacts;
            o    Fluctuations in internal temperature, pressure or humidity that may be caused by
                 improperly sized air conditioning units, or intrusion of ambient air;
            o    Excessive dust and dirt; and,
            o    Environmental stress including temperature extremes, vibration, corrosive chemicals,
                 intense light, or radiation pertinent to a manufacturer’s specification.
    ›   All monitoring in B.C. must be conducted using Pacific Standard Time. Analyzers, samplers and
        data loggers must not be adjusted for Daylight Savings Time. Sites sited locally in the Mountain
        Time Zone must still report in Pacific Time to maintain the consistency of the provincial data set.




                             British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                Page 6 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring


2.2       Station Siting
General siting considerations should include the availability of communication’s systems and power as well
as the long term viability of the site. All new ambient air quality monitoring sites require approval. Sites
operated as a requirement of a permit, order or other regulatory requirement need to be approved by the
Ministry in consultation with the Air Quality Monitoring Program. Sites operated by the Ministry must be
reviewed and approved by the Air Quality Monitoring Program’s management team or designate(s).
Ministry siting approval will be granted based on an application of various criteria, including, but not limited
to:
    ›   NAPS, Environment Canada, and US EPA, siting criteria and quality assurance documents;
    ›   Manufacturer’s recommendations for siting / housing of equipment; and,
    ›   Interpretation of local emission sources, climate patterns and rationale for monitoring (complaint
        resolution, impact to residential areas, traffic studies, etc.).


2.3       Installation Considerations
Instruments must be installed in a secure manner or as per manufacturer’s direction. This includes
designing housings, benches, outdoor enclosures, etc. to assure the instrument will stay secure and
operate within the instrument manufacturer’s specifications for criteria such as vibration, humidity and light
intrusion. Gas cylinders must be properly secured within the station’s enclosure to meet applicable safety
regulations. Clear and unambiguous line tagging should be installed to help with station operation,
particularly for monitoring stations equipped to monitor multiple parameters.
Outdoor or rooftop enclosures must be located at least 3 metres from the edge of a roof or significant
elevation change to prevent non-representative sampling such as building influenced air currents. Rooftop
enclosures must be sited and installed in accordance with WorkSafe BC regulations for fall protection to
ensure worker safety.


2.4       Electrical Power Supply
Monitoring stations require a stable and reliable source of electrical power to help avoid unnecessary
interruptions in monitoring and ensure that the instrumentation deployed at the station produces consistent,
reliable data. A robust power source will reduce the potential for data gaps and prolong the life of the
instrumentation providing that data. For these reasons the following aspects must be considered and
addressed in the design of a monitoring station:
    ›   The station should be powered by constant voltage transformers or regulators;
    ›   Power distribution must comply with relevant electrical codes;
    ›   Heaters, air conditioners, pumps and other inductive loads should be isolated from circuits
        supplying power to sensitive instrumentation such as data loggers;
    ›   Line voltage supplies for each instrument should satisfy manufacturer’s specifications; and,
    ›   In areas where electrical supply interruptions are frequent or poor power conditions exist, the
        following options are available to help ensure data quality is not affected by transient power
        conditions:




                              British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                Page 7 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring


            o   Data loggers, station computers, routers, modems and ancillary data handling equipment
                should be protected by an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) of sufficient capacity and
                the ability to provide a controlled shut down of equipment during extended outage events.
            o   Monitoring stations in locations with known power issues can deploy UPS systems to keep
                gas analyzers, meteorological sensors and particulate monitor control units warm during
                short power interruptions and provide controlled shut downs during extended outages.
            o   It is not recommended that pumps be protected by UPS units when powered independently
                from the sampling instrument.


2.5       Internal Shelter Climate Control
Monitoring stations that house continuous monitoring equipment for particulate or gas analysis must be
equipped with remote continuous monitoring of the station’s internal temperature. The internal temperature
probe must be located in such a manner that it is representative of overall station conditions. Internal
temperature data must be recorded at equivalent time periods as that of the continuous monitors operating
within the station. All stations require a HVAC system capable of maintaining a year-round internal
temperature range of 20 °C to 30 °C that is stable to within ± 2°C over a one hour period unless guidance
provided by the instrument manufacturer indicates a greater tolerance. The ideal temperature range for
monitoring stations is 20 °C to 25 °C.
Monitoring equipment housed in small outdoor enclosures (e.g. roof top installations) must have:
    o   Proper electrical connections and capacity, including a grounding wire installed by a professional
        electrician; and,
    o   Sufficient heating and cooling capacity to maintain a stable internal temperature that meets the
        instrument manufacturer’s specifications. This excludes shelters installed to house models of
        monitors, such as low flow rate samplers, which are specifically designed to operate at ambient
        temperature to maintain the integrity of the sample.
In situations where single analyzer cabinets (external or outdoor installations) are used to house monitoring
equipment, those shelters must include electrical connections and capacity installed to code and include a
grounding wire installed by a professional electrician.


2.6       Sample Inlet Placement
Sample inlets are provided by instrument manufacturers or they are designed and fabricated specifically
for a monitoring station. The placement of the inlet is crucial to providing representative air samples and as
such should be based on several factors including height, proximity to traffic corridors, traffic volumes,
obstructions and distance between inlets.
The National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) program’s Monitoring and Quality Assurance/Quality
Control Guidelines specifies minimum separation distances between roadways and sample inlets based on
traffic volumes. The NAPS specifications are provided in the following table.




                             British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                               Page 8 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring


Table 2.6.1: Minimum Separation Distances Between Sample Inlets and Roadways
 Average Vehicles/Day              ≤ 10,000   ≤ 15,000     ≤ 20,000       ≤ 40,000       ≤ 70,000   ≤ 110,000
 Distance to nearest
                                     ≥ 10 m      20 m          30 m          50 m          100 m     ≥ 250 m
 traffic lane

Sample inlets for ground level monitoring stations deploying gas and particulate instrumentation must be
installed at a minimum height of two metres above ground surface to a maximum of 15 metres above ground
surface. To prevent non-representative sampling, inlets should not be placed near building ventilation ports,
HVAC equipment, exhausts or stacks, or exposed soil or gravel staging areas that are frequently traversed.
Inlets must be sufficiently tall in areas susceptible to snow accumulation. Inlets must also have adequate
separation between other inlets and obstacles in situations as described in the following table.

Table 2.6.2: Inlet Separation Distances
             Situational Trigger                Distance (m)             Distance to / Separation from

                                                2 X obstacle
           An obstacle to air flow                                               The obstacle
                                                   height

               PAH Samplers                          1                        Support structures

       PAH and Particulate Samplers                  2                        Support structures

            Flow rates ≤ 20 lpm                      1                              Other inlets

            Flow rates > 20 lpm                      2                              Other inlets

     Inlets of co-located instrumentation            4                Inlets of co-located instrumentation




2.7       Manifold Design
For monitoring stations that deploy multiple gas analyzers, a manifold and water trap are recommended
and preferred to individual sample lines. Manifolds are not recommended for monitoring stations that deploy
both continuous and integrated PM monitoring; in these situations, the instruments should be equipped with
individual inlets connected to tubing that is vertically oriented.
Where horizontally mounted manifolds are used, they should be oriented with the ports facing upwards and
water traps oriented vertically to reduce the risk of moisture entering an analyzer. Manifolds such as the
“ARB style” must be mounted vertically. Regardless of the manifold type the monitoring station’s sampling
inlet and manifold must meet the requirements of the most recent version of the National Air Pollution
Surveillance (NAPS) Program’s Monitoring and Quality Assurance/Quality Control Guidelines.


2.8       Particulate Matter Monitoring Considerations
Continuous PM monitors have specific siting requirements and inlet probe configurations that are outlined
in the manufacturer’s manuals. Similarly, particulate samplers such as low flow samplers and high-volume
samplers have specific siting considerations and clearance distances. Method specific considerations are
summarized in method-specific SOPs located in the Appendices section of this Manual.




                             British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                 Page 9 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring


2.9         Passive Sampling Considerations
Passive samplers have a distinct set of siting criteria. It is important to establish applicable siting criteria
and monitoring requirements prior to the installation of one or more passive samplers. Monitoring objectives
should be discussed with the laboratory supplying the passive sampler/s to ensure the method is suitable
and capable of achieving the objectives.
Passive sampler installations should conform to the following:
     ›    The sampler housing shall be mounted to an adequate supporting structure in accordance with the
          manufacturer’s specifications and in a configuration that does not produce a restriction to airflow.
     ›    The sampler shall be deployed in a manner that prevents the diffusion barrier from becoming wet,
          protects the diffusion barrier from the precipitation of suspended particulates, and protects the
          diffusion barrier from high wind speeds (i.e. use a housing/rain shield).
     ›    The sampler housing shall be placed so that the diffusion barrier of the sampler body is at a height
          of two meters (m) to four metres above ground surface.
     ›    Co-located samplers should be positioned within a 4 m horizontal distance of each other.
     ›    Passive samplers within a monitoring network should be positioned at the same sampling height.
     ›    Higher objects such as trees and buildings should not exceed 30 degrees from a horizontal plane
          as viewed from the sampler body. This is shown in Figure 2.9.1.




Figure 2.9.1 Passive Sampler Installation
Figure reference: Blair R. Irwin, ENV 2018



Detailed information regarding the siting and installation requirements for passive sampling instruments is
provided in the Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) for the Passive Sample Method of Air Sample
Collection (SOP 07) located in the Appendices of this Manual.


2.10 Rooftop Installations
When planning the design of a rooftop monitoring station, consideration should be given to applicable
regulatory requirements of the Occupational Health and Safety Regulation (OHSR). Working at height, safe
working zones, and roof access points must be considered and must comply with the applicable sections
of the OHSR. In addition to provincial regulatory requirements, there may be regional, municipal, and
agency requirements applicable to a site such as school or fire station roof tops. Preliminary planning must




                                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                           Page 10 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring


consider and assess the safety aspects listed in Table 2.10.1 and where applicable, develop commensurate
safety control measures.

Table 2.10.1: Rooftop Installation Site Specific Health and Safety Considerations
 Risk                                   Site Specific Considerations
                                        ›   Review the OHSR to identify regulatory requirements and facility
                                            specific requirements, that may apply to the site;
                                        ›   Confirm that the load-bearing capacity of the roof can
                                            accommodate the instrumentation package and work crew;
                                        ›   Determine if fall protection is required;
                                        ›   Determine if a fall protection plan is required;
 Working at Height
                                        ›   Determine if a control zone is required to establish a work area
                                            away from the elevated work surface;
                                        ›   Determine if it is necessary to work with a partner or in teams;
                                        ›   Identify rooftop hazards such as power lines; and,
                                        ›   Secure objects/tools to prevent items dropping or falling from the
                                            roof.
                                        ›   Ladder safety considerations such as three point contact, and;
 Access
                                        ›   Equipment transportation to monitoring location.
                                        ›   Consider year-round weather conditions in terms of access and
 Weather Conditions
                                            safety.




                          British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                  Page 11 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring




3 Continuous Monitoring and Sampling
  Methods
3.1        Methods and Performance Specifications
The information provided in this section of the Manual includes a summary of acceptable methods of
ambient air monitoring within the provincial jurisdiction of British Columbia. The minimum performance
specifications and operating ranges provided in this section are consistent with the Monitoring and Quality
Assurance/Quality Control Guidelines published by the National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) program.

Table 3.1.1 lists some of the commercially available analyzers, monitors, and samplers that are considered
suitable for ambient air monitoring within the Provincial jurisdiction of British Columbia. This list is not an
endorsement, nor does it exclude other commercially available instrumentation. In most instances, the
Ministry will require that instruments are listed as a Federal Reference Method or Federal Equivalent
Method (FEM) by the United States Environmental Protection Agency. However, some instruments
designated as FEMs may not be suitable based on detection method and the dominant pollution source,
such as some optical methods in the presence of woodsmoke.

All ambient air monitoring required by the Ministry or undertaken to generate data intended for decision
making by the Province of British Columbia must only be initiated after discussion with, and the agreement
of the Ministry regarding appropriate instrumentation. Similarly, this is required prior to the replacement of
instrumentation at existing monitoring sites. Once agreement is reached approval will be indicated in writing
by the Director. If operators purchase instrumentation without approval, it may be determined to be
unsuitable, and the data not accepted at the cost of the site owner/operator. Instrumentation must also be
compatible with existing data collection systems. Regardless of the equipment deployed all analyzers
should meet the minimum performance specifications listed in Table 3.1.2.

Table 3.1.1: Continuous Ambient Air Equipment
 Monitoring                                                            Commercially Available
                           Operating Principle
 Parameter(s)                                                        Analyzers/Monitors/Samplers

                                                            ›   Thermo Fisher Scientific Models 48i, 48Q.
                           Non-dispersive Infrared          ›   Ecotech Serinus 30 Carbon Monoxide
 CO                        Photometry with Gas Filter           analyzer.
                           Correlation (GFC)                ›   Teledyne API T300 analyzer.


                                                            ›   Thermo Fisher Scientific Models 450i, 450Q
 H2S/TRS                   Ultraviolet fluorescence             H2S analyzers with applicable converter.
                                                            ›   Teledyne API Models T101, T1021.

                                                            ›   Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42i.
 Oxides of Nitrogen                                         ›   Teledyne API T200.
                           Chemiluminescence
 (NO/NO2/NOX)                                               ›   Ecotech Serinus 40.

                                                            ›   Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 42iQ.
                           Selective Absorption of
 O3                                                         ›   Ecotech Serinus 10.
                           Ultraviolet (UV) Photometry
                                                            ›   Teledyne API T400.




                            British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                    Page 12 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring



 Monitoring                                                                 Commercially Available
                          Operating Principle
 Parameter(s)                                                             Analyzers/Monitors/Samplers

                          Beta Attenuation Monitor               ›   Met One BAM-1020 with Smart Heater System
 PM10 and PM2.5           (BAM)                                  ›   Thermo Fisher Scientific 5014i.
 Continuous Monitor
                                                                 ›   Thermo Scientific SHARP Model 5030 and
                          Nephelometry and BAM
                                                                     5030i.
                                                                 ›   Thermo Fisher Scientific Models 43i, 43iQ.
 SO2                      Ultraviolet fluorescence               ›   Teledyne API T200.
                                                                 ›   Ecotech EC9850T.

                                                                 ›   Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17i.
 NH3                      Chemiluminescence                      ›   Teledyne API T201.

                          Gas Chromatography (GC)
 BTEX                                                            ›   Syntech Spectras Analyzer GC 955.
                          with Detector

                                                                 ›   Thermo Fisher Scientific Direct Methane, Non-
 CH4/NMHC                 Gas Chromatography                         Methane Hydrocarbon Analyzer, Model 55i.
                                                                 ›   Synspec GC’s Alpha 115.

 Formaldehyde (CH2O)      Adsorbent Cartridge                    ›   Cartridge Sampler.

                          Low Flow Rate Filter Collection        ›   Thermo Fisher Scientific Partisol™ Various
 PM10 and PM2.5
                          and Gravimetric Mass                       Models.
 Low Flow Sampler         Determination                          ›   Tisch Environmental.

                          High Volume Filter Collection          ›   Ecotech HiVol 3000 High Volume Air Sampler.
 TSP and PM10
                          and Gravimetric Mass                   ›   Tisch Environmental High Volume Air Sampler
 High Flow Sampler        Determination                              (Various models).

 Various                  Passive Sampler                        ›   Available from laboratories

Additional information regarding the operating principles of instruments listed in Table 3.1.1 is provided
within method-specific SOPs located in the Appendices section of this Manual.
Analyzers should meet the performance specifications described within Table 3.1.2. These specifications
are largely adapted from the National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) program. The performance
specifications listed below are based on current technology and on manufacturer’s information. It is
recognized that technology continues to evolve in this area and therefore over time performance
specifications may change as technologies typically improve.

Table 3.1.2: Minimum Performance Specifications for Continuous Ambient Air Equipment
                                                      Lower                         Zero           Span       Rise/Fall
 Monitoring       Instrument     Operating                            Zero
                                                     Detection                      Drift          Drift        Time
 Parameter          Range       Range in BC                           Noise
                                                       Limit                       (24 hrs)    (24 hrs)         (max.)
                                0 - 5 or                             0.02 ppm       < 0.1      < 1%
 CO               0 - 10 ppm                         0.04 ppm                                                   60 sec
                                0 - 10 ppm                             RMS          ppm        full scale
                                                     Value not       Value not    Value not    Value not
 H2S/TRS          0 - 200 ppb   0 - 200 ppb                                                                        -
                                                     available       available    available    available




                           British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                           Page 13 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring



                                                  Lower                     Zero        Span         Rise/Fall
 Monitoring       Instrument      Operating                    Zero
                                                 Detection                  Drift       Drift          Time
 Parameter          Range        Range in BC                   Noise
                                                   Limit                  (24 hrs)    (24 hrs)         (max.)
 Oxides of
                                                              0.2 ppb                 < 1%
 Nitrogen         0 - 500 ppb   0 - 500 ppb      0.4 ppb                  < 0.5 ppb                    80 sec
                                                               RMS                    full scale
 (NO/NO2/NOX)
                                                              0.3 ppb                 < 0.1%
 O3               0-500 ppb     0 - 500 ppb      1 ppb                    < 1 ppb                      20 sec
                                                               RMS                    full scale
 PM10 and PM2.5                 0 – 200 µg/m3    2 µg/m3
                  0 – 1000
 Continuous                     to 0 – 1000      (24 hour       n/a          n/a      n/a                n/a
                  µg/m3
 Analyzer                       µg/m3            period)
                                0 – 200 ppb or               < 0.06 ppb               < 0.5%
 SO2              0 - 500 ppb                    0.1 ppb                  < 0.2 ppb                   140 sec
                                0 - 500 ppb                     RMS                   full scale




                             British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                Page 14 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring




4 Instrument Installation
4.1       Pre-Deployment Testing
Prior to installation and deployment, instruments should be tested within a controlled environment to ensure
they are operating properly. Pre-deployment testing will help prevent on-site equipment issues following
installation. Pre-deployment testing should follow the requirements specified in the manufacturer supplied
equipment manuals.


4.2       Station Start-Up Records
A Station Start-Up record must be completed during the installation of each monitoring station. Start-up
records should be maintained as part of the quality control process. A copy of the record should be
forwarded to the B.C. ENV prior to operation. Details of significant changes to a station such as station
relocation and changes to monitored pollutants should be recorded and kept on file with the original station
start-up record.
In general station start-up records must include the following information:
    ›   Station operator information;
    ›   Station Name;
    ›   Site Location with GPS Coordinates;
    ›   Date and time that data polling commenced;
    ›   Communication information (i.e. IP address, phone number)
    ›   A description of the surrounding environment; and,
    ›   Station equipment/instrumentation including phone number, IP address, etc. to enable data polling.
A station start-up form is provided in Appendix 1. Additional equipment-specific installation requirements
are provided in SOPs located in the Appendices section of this manual.




                            British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                             Page 15 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring




5 Routine Operations
5.1           Operational and Quality Assurance Plans
It is recommended that a Station Operational Plan and or a Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) be produced for
each monitoring station. A group or network of stations should have an Agency Quality Assurance Plan
(AQAP). Station operational and quality assurance plans provide auditors and new station operators with
information pertaining to the characteristics of the monitoring station and any special functions or operating
conditions of the station. A station operational plan and any checklists included within the plan will assist
station operators in identifying the requirements of routine operations and the frequency of scheduled
inspections and planned maintenance routines. The station operational plan can also act as a record of the
routine inspections, maintenance activities, calibrations and repairs carried out at the station. Information
specific to AQAPs can be found in the most current version of the NAPS Monitoring and Quality
Assurance/Quality Control Guidelines.


5.2           Inspections and Maintenance
The purpose of routine inspections is to check that monitoring equipment and associated environmental
enclosures are operating and or functioning as designed. The frequency of routine inspections should be
set to an interval that effectively mitigates the potential for data loss. The frequency of routine inspections
will be a function of monitoring method/s, site constraints, and availability of remote diagnostic data.
The routine operation of a monitoring station’s equipment is the responsibility of the monitoring station
operator. In general, a monitoring station’s routine operations include:
      ›      Scheduled and non-scheduled inspections;
      ›      Preventative and planned maintenance;
      ›      Scheduled calibrations; and,
      ›      Repairs and calibration.
Preventative maintenance undertaken during routine inspections can assist in reducing missing data; will
provide more confidence in the monitoring results produced by the station and assist in identifying potential
problems.
A general description of routine inspection and maintenance activities is provided in Table 5.1.1. Routine
inspection and maintenance activities are divided into two categories: short term and long term. Short term
checks can be undertaken weekly, every two-weeks, or monthly. Long term checks are conducted quarterly
or semi-annually. Remote diagnostic testing and data analysis can be incorporated within the short term
checks to assist in identifying potential problems. Quarterly/semi-annual inspections and maintenance
should be undertaken by field trained technicians.

Table 5.1.1: Routine Inspection/Maintenance Summary
           Short term - Weekly, Bi-Weekly, Monthly                      Long Term - Quarterly/Semi-Annual
 1.       Check shelter integrity and security.                1.   Review operational requirements as per
 2.       Check/test communications array.                          QAP/AQAP.
 3.       Check/test Battery Backup system; clean filters as   2.   Inventory of all equipment onsite, compare against
          necessary.                                                previous visit and update accordingly; this includes
                                                                    manufacturer’s information and SOPs.




                                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                    Page 16 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring



       Short term - Weekly, Bi-Weekly, Monthly                       Long Term - Quarterly/Semi-Annual
 4. Inspect manifold apparatus and sample lines to the     3.   Carry out short term checks.
     analyzers, clean if needed.                           4.   If applicable check zero air supply system for each
 5. Check all equipment fans and filters.                       analyzer and change/correct if necessary.
 6. Inspect equipment specific parameters (sample          5.   Perform multi-point verification if applicable.
     tape, inlet filter, water catch jars).                6.   Perform flow verification if applicable.
 7. Inspect and replace drying equipment as                7.   Check time stamps in the local database and in all
     necessary.                                                 equipment data loggers.
 8. Check to ensure adequate supply of consumables         8.   Complete routine operation checklist.
     (e.g., desiccant, filters, gloves, etc.).             9.   Function checks for abnormal performance (e.g.
 9. As applicable, check station temperature is within          excessive signal noise, unstable baseline, positive
     designed operating range.                                  and/or negative drift, spiking, long response time,
 10. Review any instrument alarms, instrument issues            incorrect flow/pressure readings, warning light
     and/or data issues identified since the last visit.        indicators, power or pump failure, etc.).
 11. Verify that any maintenance undertaken on the last
     visit is still effective.
 12. Check the fire extinguisher.
 13. Verify instrument SOPs, manufacturer information
     and Routine operation plan/checklist is up-to-date.
 14. Complete routine operation checklist.



Details of routine inspections and maintenance must be recorded and maintained within the monitoring
station. An Inspection and Maintenance template is provided in Appendix 1.
Additional operational requirements specific to monitoring methodologies are provided in Standard
Operating Procedures (SOP) located in the Appendices of this Manual.


5.3       Non-Conformance and Corrective Action
For the purposes of this Manual, a non-conformance is defined as “the failure of an output, product or
process to conform to the standards or specifications detailed in the equipment manufacturer’s
specifications or any part of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual”. If a problem or a non-conformance issue is
identified during routine inspections, the details of the problem or non-conformance must be recorded. For
each non-conformance issue or incident, a root-cause analysis must be conducted to identify the source of
the non-conformance. The information gleaned from the root-cause analysis must then be used to develop
a corrective action plan. Root-cause analyses and corrective action plans should be commensurate with
the non-conformance to avoid excessive and erroneous detail and resource expenditures. Details of both
the root-cause analysis and the implementation of the corrective action must be recorded and maintained
within the monitoring station (preferably within the Station Operational Plan or Quality Assurance Plan). An
electronic copy of the corrective action record must be sent to the B.C. ENV.
A Non-Conformance and Corrective Action template is provided in Appendix 1.




                             British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                    Page 17 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring




6 Gas Analyzer Calibrations and
  Verifications
6.1       General Descriptions
General descriptions of the various categories of calibration checks are described below. Specific
calibration instructions are provided in instrumentation manuals and SOPs located in the Appendices of
this Manual.
Zero check: A zero check tests an instrument’s response to pollutant-free air at concentrations below
detection limits. The zero check generally involves exposing the instrument to pollutant free air from either
a zero air supply or a zero air system (i.e. a scrubber). The zero check value is compared to the zero
reference value established at the time of the multi-point check or calibration. If the zero value is outside of
the tolerance level provided in Table 6.4.1, a zero adjustment must be performed.
Span check: A span check tests an instrument’s response to a known concentration of a pollutant. The
span gas, which is used as a surrogate for the pollutant, should be at a concentration that is higher than
the expected monitoring values, and near the analyzer’s calibration range. The span gas can be generated
using a permeation device, a gas cylinder or dilution calibrator. The span check point is compared to a
reference span value that is established at the time of a multi-point verification, calibration or when the span
source is replaced. If the span is found to be outside of the tolerance level provided in Table 6.4.1, an “as-
found” multi-point verification should be carried-out. For significant span value differences from reference
span values a root-cause analysis should be conducted, and corrective actions undertaken. Additional
information on span checks is provided in Section 6.3.
Two-point check: The two-point check tests an instrument’s as found response at the 0% point and the 80%
point of an instrument’s calibration range.
Multi-point linearity verification: The multi-point linearity check tests an instruments accuracy and linear
response to air pollutants at regular concentration intervals to verify data prior to instrument calibration. A
multi-point verification is required prior to instrument calibration. The verification must include pre-zero,
post-zero, 100%, 60% and 30% concentration intervals.
Calibration: Calibrations are conducted to adjust an instrument’s response to a known concentration of gas.
A calibration generally occurs when a multi-point check indicates that an instrument’s response is outside
of defined tolerance levels or acceptance criteria. Calibrations include both a zero and a highpoint (upper
calibration limit) adjustment. Calibrations should follow the instrument manufacturer’s instructions.


6.2       Calibration Frequency
The triggers for, and frequency of instrument checks and calibrations are summarized in Table 6.2.1. Note
that the frequency of calibrations may be increased at the request of B.C. ENV.




                            British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                 Page 18 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring



Table 6.2.1: Gas Analyzer Calibration Frequency and Triggers
     Zero and Span Check                          Multi-point Check                              Calibration

 ›        Weekly minimum,                                                                  ›   Multi-point
          Daily preferred       ›   After installation (or relocation); allow a 24 to 72       verification outside of
          (23 to 25 hours)          hour warm up period prior to;                              tolerance limits
                                ›   Bi-annually if zero and span checks are conducted
                                    daily;
                                ›   Quarterly if zero and span checks are conducted
                                    weekly;
                                ›   Before and after analyzer repairs/maintenance that
                                    may affect instrument performance;
                                ›   Prior to instrument calibration;
                                ›   Prior to instrument shut-down;
                                ›   When span drift exceeds 10%;
                                ›   For new analyzers, after the first 3 months of
                                    operation; and,
                                ›   When daily zero deviation is greater than ±2% of
                                    the range, and troubleshooting indicates that the
                                    analyzer is causing the deviation.




6.3           Zero and Span Checks
Continuous gas analyzers must perform weekly zero and span checks although daily checks (once per 24
hour period) are preferred. Preferable cycle durations are 23 hour or 25 hour to ensure that events specific
to certain hours are captured over time. Alternate zero and span check cycles are approved on a case by
case basis by B.C. ENV.
Generally quality control checks take place within a single hour (e.g. 11:00 to 12:00 PST rather than 11:30
to 12:30 PST), and need to allow for a sufficient period of time to purge the instrument with zero or span
gas, and stabilize, prior to taking a reading. At the end of the cycle the instrument also needs a sufficient
period of time to purge the instrument with sample gas before any data validation flags are removed. An
example of a typical cycle is provided below:
      ›     0 - 20 m: introduce zero air; the recorded value is the average of the last 3 m.
      ›     20 - 40 m: introduce span gas; the recorded value is the average of the last 3 m.
      ›     40 - 45 m: purge with ambient air.
      ›     45 m: return instrument to sample mode.
Operators need to monitor the effectiveness of their zero/span cycles and may need to make adjustments
based on instrument-specific responses.
Zero checks need to be recorded and logged, either electronically or within log books, each time a check
is performed. Routine reviews of quality control checks will help identify changes in equipment operation or
drift in calibration. An audit of an analyzer’s response using a certified calibration standard and a zero air
generator is the only way to confirm that routine zero and span checks are tracking the actual drift in an
analyzers response when compared to the previous calibrated response.
If a monitoring station’s zero-air-supply relies on equipment with consumables such as filters and scrubbers,
the station operator should regularly confirm that the zero air supply is operating as expected.



                               British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                   Page 19 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring



With the exception of carbon monoxide (CO), BC ENV does not enable dynamic-zeroing functions on gas
analyzers. In these cases, the zeroing frequency should be set to 6hours although a zeroing frequency of
24 hours is allowed.


6.4       Multi-point Verification and Calibration
Analyzer calibrations must include a zero adjustment and an upscale adjustment at the calibration range of
the analyzer. A checklist outlining the general process for calibrating continuous gas monitors is provided
in Appendix 1 of this Manual.

Table 6.4.1: Gas Analyzer Tolerance Levels and Acceptance Criteria

 Analyzer    QC Check                                    Tolerance Levels           Acceptance Criteria

             Zero Check                                  ± 0.1 ppm                  ≤ ± 2% of range

             Span Check                                  ± 10% of reference value   ≤ ± 10% of control value
    CO
             Multi-point Verification – Audit Protocol   ≤ ± 2% of inst. range      ≤ ± 10%

             Multi-point Verification – NAPS Guideline   ± 4% of traceable std.     ≤ ± 15%

             Zero Check                                  ± 1.0 ppb                  N/A

             Span Check                                  ± 10% of reference value   ≤ ± 10% of control value
    SO2
             Multi-point Verification – Audit Protocol   ≤ ± 2% of inst. range      ≤ ± 10%

             Multi-point Verification – NAPS Guideline   ± 4% of traceable std.     ≤ ± 15%

             Zero Check                                  ± 2.0 ppb                  ≤ ± 2%

             Span Check                                  ± 10% of reference value   ≤ ± 10% of control value

    NOx      Multi-point Verification – Audit Protocol   ≤ ± 2% of inst. range      ≤ ± 10%

             Multi-point Verification – NAPS Guideline   ± 4% of traceable std.     ≤ ± 15%

             Converter Efficiency                        96 – 104%                  ≤ ± 15%

             Zero Check                                  ± 2.0 ppb                  ≤ ± 1.5% of range

             Span Check                                  ± 10% of reference value   N/A
    O3
             Multi-point Verification – Audit Protocol   ≤ ± 1.5% of inst. range    ≤ ± 7%

             Multi-point Verification – NAPS Guideline   ± 4% of traceable std.     ≤ ± 15%

             Zero Check                                  ± 1.0 ppb                  ≤ ± 2% of range

             Span Check                                  ± 10% reference value      ≤ ± 10% of control value
 H2S/TRS
             Multi-point Verification – Audit Protocol   ≤ ± 2% of inst. range      ≤ ± 10%

             Multi-point Verification – NAPS Guideline   ± 4% of traceable std.     ≤ ± 15%




                             British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                              Page 20 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring



Requirements and specifications for zero and span gas air supplies and gas regulators are summarized in
Table 6.4.2 below.

Table 6.4.2: Zero Air and Span Gas Supply and Regulator Requirements
        Component & Aspect                   CO                  O3                 SO2                 NO2

                   Minimum Flow
                   Rate (L/min)
                                       To be free of contaminants that may cause a detectable response or that
                   Pressure
 Zero Air Supply                       can react with either NO, O3, or NO2, that is commercially available or can
                   (psig)
                                                         otherwise be generated by the operator.
                   Particulate
                   filter efficiency

                                       Brass or           Stainless steel
                   Material                                                  Stainless steel     Stainless steel
                                       stainless steel    or Teflon

                                       Clear Teflon®      Clear Teflon®      Clear Teflon®       Clear Teflon®
                   Line
                                       (FEP, PFA, PTFE)   (FEP, PFA, PTFE)   (FEP, PFA, PTFE)    (FEP, PFA, PTFE)
 Gas Regulator
                                       Two-stage                             Two-stage           Two-stage
                                       design with non-                      design with non-    design with non-
                   Model               reactive           Not specified      reactive            reactive
                                       diaphragm and                         diaphragm and       diaphragm and
                                       internal parts                        internal parts      internal parts

                                                                             SO2 in nitrogen     NO in nitrogen
                                                          Ozone
                   Mixture             CO in Nitrogen                        or Permeation       or Permeation
                                                          generator
                                                                             tubes               tubes
 Span Gas
                   Concentration
                                          0 – 3 ppm         0 – 200 ppb         0 – 200 ppb         0 – 300 ppb
                   range




6.5       Parameter Specific Calibration Requirements
The following sub-sections provide additional information regarding gas specific calibration requirements.


6.5.1 Hydrogen Sulphide & Total Reduced Sulphur
This sub-section of the Manual provides calibration information that is specific to analyzers of hydrogen
sulphide (H2S) and total reduced sulphur (TRS).
    ›    H2S/TRS analyzers are calibrated with a zero-air for a zero-offset reading; gas at 100% of the
         calibration range is used for span.
    ›    Calibration gas can be generated from certified gas, gas dilution systems, or permeation methods..


6.5.2 Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX)
For NOX analyzer calibrations, the NO calibration regulator must be purged to remove all oxygen (O2). The
presence of O2 results in the formation of NO2, which produces a biased (increased) value.




                              British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                    Page 21 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring



6.5.3 Gas Phase Titration (GPT)
After NO and NOX calibrations, a gas phase titration (GPT) of NO with ozone is employed to calibrate the
analyzer for NO2 and to determine converter efficiency. A brief outline of how to determine converter
efficiency is provided below.
    1. Generate a NO concentration at approximately 50% of full range for at least 10 minutes.
    2. Generate O3 at an approximate concentration of 50% of the NO concentration and wait until a
       stabilized reading has been achieved.
    3. The converter loss is then calculated as follows:
                                                           [(𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇 𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵 − 𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊 𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵) − (𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇 𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑿𝑿 − 𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊 𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑿𝑿 )]
      𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪𝑪 𝑬𝑬𝑬𝑬𝑬𝑬𝑬𝑬𝑬𝑬𝑬𝑬𝑬𝑬𝑬𝑬𝑬𝑬𝑬𝑬 = 𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏 ×
                                                                                   (𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇𝒇 𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵 − 𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊𝒊 𝑵𝑵𝑵𝑵)
        Replacement of the converter may be required if the calculated converter efficiency is outside of
        the 96 to 104% range.
    4. Generate at least one additional NO2 audit point at a lower concentration.
    5. Perform a zero and span check immediately following calibration.
    6. Determine if span gas cylinders/permeation wafers need to be replaced based on the results of
       zero and span checks.


6.5.4 Ozone (O3)
Ozone (O3) analyzers must be calibrated using a calibrator with a UV photometer.


6.5.5 Sulphur dioxide (SO2)
When conducting an SO2 analyzer calibration, it is critically important to purge the SO2 calibration regulator
to remove all traces of H2O, as even small amounts of H2O will lead to stability problems. If the cylinder is
suspected of containing moisture, the cylinder should be deemed as compromised and unusable.


6.5.6 Ammonia (NH3)
Ammonia analyzers require a 3-stage calibration, which is unique among gas analyzers. The first stage of
the calibration is typical of other continuous gas analyzer types and involves a serial dilution of a NO
standard to verify analyzer NO and NOX response.
In the second calibration stage, the analyzer’s NO2 response is verified by gas phase titration. This involves
titrating the NO standard used in the first stage with a known concentration of ozone. The introduced ozone
converts the equivalent amount of NO into NO2, which is converted back into NO by the analyzer’s converter
oven and read as NOX. To verify the linearity of the analyzer two levels of ozone are generated and
calibrated in the gas phase titration. As the NO and NOX channels were calibrated and verified in the first
stage, the analyzer’s response to the remaining NO, not converted by ozone, can be accepted as accurate.
Comparison of the introduced ozone concentration with the analyzer’s NOX and NO response therefore
allows for a determination of converter efficiency, and verification of the NO2 channel.
In the third and final stage, a known concentration of NH3 is used to verify the catalytic conversion process
of the analyzer. Similar to the second stage of calibration, four different levels of NH3 are generated to verify
the linearity of the analyzer.




                                    British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                                               Page 22 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring



6.5.7 BTEX
To calibrate the gas chromatograph (GC) a BTEX calibration mixture is needed as well as zero air. The
calibration is undertaken to determine the conversion factor that is used to calculate concentrations of BTEX
compounds from the GC outputs. The calibration is undertaken in two sequential stages:
    1. Measurement of calibration gas diluted to the desired concentrations; and,
    2. Determination of the conversion factor.


6.5.8 Methane/Non-Methane Hydrocarbons
Calibration is undertaken to establish the relationship between the detectors output signal and the
compound being measured. The detector’s output signal can be affected by a number of different
operational parameters, and as such requires calibration on a regular basis. If possible, a calibration gas
standard with a similar composition to that expected in the actual sample should be used.


6.5.9 Calibration Gas Standards
Analyzers must be calibrated using certified calibration mixtures. For conventional analyzers, the mixtures
should be certified to ± 2% accuracy by direct comparison to a Standard Reference Material (SRM) provided
by organizations such as the Netherland’s National Metrology Institute (VSL) and the U.S. National Institute
of Standards and Technology (NIST). For trace level analyzers, the mixtures should be certified to ± 2%
accuracy by comparison to a certified traceable reference standard.
All calibration standards must be verified against traceable standards every two years, or at the end of their
stated certification period and at any time when there is found to be a significant discrepancy between
station or operator equipment and audit standards.
In addition to gases, dilution calibrators and flow meters should undergo third party calibration annually or
at the end of their certification period.


6.6       Method Specific Calibration Requirements
6.6.1 PM2.5 Continuous Monitors and Filter Based PM Samplers
For continuous PM2.5 monitors and filter-based PM samplers, several parameters require calibration
including flow, temperature, ambient pressure, time and date. In general, the calibration procedure
comprises the following sequential steps:
        Step 1 – Leak checks;
        Step 2 – Verification (as-is calibration) of flow, temperature and pressure;
        Step 3 – Adjustments (calibration); and,
        Step 4 – Verification.
In Step 1 a leak check is undertaken to ensure there are no leaks in the sample train before conducting the
calibration. If leaks are detected during this step they must be addressed, and the flow re-verified.
The second step in the calibration process (Step 2 verification) is used to validate results obtained since
the instruments last calibration. This is done by verifying that flow, temperature and pressure are still within
acceptable tolerance levels. The verification step comprises checks against known standards. The flow



                            British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                 Page 23 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring



verification check should be performed using a flow meter which has been calibrated or certified annually
against a National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) traceable standard. Similarly, temperature
and pressure verifications should be performed using a temperature and pressure standard which is
calibrated or certified annually against a NIST traceable standard.
Tolerance levels (or ‘pass criteria’) for low flow rate and high volume samplers assessed are provided in
the following table.

Table 6.6.1: Tolerance Levels for PM2.5 Continuous Monitors and Filter Based PM Samplers
                                                                                        Continuous PM2.5 and
     Parameter          Low Flow Rate Sampler          High Volume Sampler
                                                                                           Integrated PM
                                                        Between 1.13 to 1.70
                            ± 4% of 16.7 lpm           m³/min with a correlation           ±4% of 16.7 lpm
 Flow                     (16.00 to 17.34 lpm)                                           (16.00 to 17.34 lpm)
                                                        coefficient of 0.990 or
                                                                better.
                                                            As per instrument
 Temperature                     ±2 °C                                                          ±2 °C
                                                              specifications
                                                            As per instrument
 Ambient pressure              ±10 mmHg                                                       ±10 mmHg
                                                              specifications
 Relative Humidity                N/A                             N/A                           ±10%

 Clock and date
                          Clock should be within ±2 minutes of standard time, and the date should be correct.
 verification check


                           As per instrument
 Leak check                                                       N/A                            N/A
                             specifications




Parameters that do not meet the pass criteria specified in Table 6.6.1 above must be adjusted in Step 3.
After adjustment a final verification (Step 4) is undertaken to confirm that the instrument’s parameters are
within the required criteria.
If the flow verification or leak check exceeds the acceptance criteria provided in Table 6.6.2, data obtained
during the period since the instruments last successful calibration must be invalidated.

Table 6.6.2: Acceptance Criteria for PM2.5 Continuous Monitors and Filter Based PM Samplers
 Parameter     Low Flow Rate Sampler        High Volume Sampler          Continuous PM2.5 and Integrated PM
 Flow                    ±7%                                                              ±7%
                                                      ±7%
 Leak check    As per instrument manual.   As per instrument manual.            As per instrument manual.




6.7       Documentation
The minimum documentation required for the checks and calibrations discussed in this section are
summarized in Table 6.7.1. Note that other documents such as permits may have additional documentation
requirements. Templates for these and other records required for ambient air monitoring are provided in
Appendix 1.




                            British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                     Page 24 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring



Table 6.7.1: Calibration Documentation
     Zero check and Span Gases           Multi-point check                        Calibration

 ›      Record in logbook         ›   Record in logbook                  ›   Record in logbook
 ›      Use routine maintenance   ›   Complete routine maintenance       ›   Complete gas calibration
        record                        record                                 activity record




6.8         Measurement Uncertainty
The determination of measurement uncertainty in continuous air monitoring data is a function of many
factors. During an instrument’s calibration, there are uncertainties associated with instrument precision,
calibration standards, and accuracy of the dilution process.
Instrument manufacturers specify instrument precision by various methods; typically, however, precision is
specified as a value or as a percentage of an instrument’s reading. Regardless of the method used to
specify precision, calibration standards and the accuracy of the dilution process play a much larger role in
determining an instrument’s measurement accuracy and precision. The accuracy of the calibration gas and
calibrator (dilution process) are certified against a respective standard.
Immediately following calibration, the linearity of the calibration will assist in estimating instrument
uncertainty. Linearity specifications are often provided by the manufacturer as a percentage value of the
calibration range. Pending any future, formal statistical calculation of uncertainty, concentrations of the
target pollutant following calibration should not exceed 5% of the calibrated range. The measured
uncertainty is expected to grow over time due to uncorrected drifts (span drifts) and or maintenance issues.
Another factor of measurement uncertainty stems from the variation of an instrument’s performance over
time. This uncertainty can be measured by undertaking a statistical analysis of the instruments zero and
span check data. The uncertainty caused by instrument performance over time, is necessarily, calculated
after the fact. The detailed statistical determination of an instrument’s performance is beyond the scope of
this manual however, method details are available in various documents such as ISO Standards, the US
EPA 2013 QA Handbook for Pollution Measurement Systems, and Chapter 5 of the Alberta Government’s
2014 Air Monitoring Directive.
Currently there is no requirement to determine or estimate measurement uncertainty for operators of
Ambient Air Monitoring stations operating within ENV’s jurisdiction.




                              British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                             Page 25 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring




7 Collection and Validation of Continuous
  Monitoring Data
7.1       Data Collection and Management
Data generated by Ambient Air Monitoring stations is collected and stored on Data Acquisition Systems
(DAS) or “dataloggers”. Data can be accessed from the data logger by manually connecting to the data
logger, or via commercially available hardware and software packages using devices such as a telephone
and modem, internet access, or satellite telemetry.
Data output options can be analog or digital. Digital data acquisition methods and instrumentation are
subject to less noise which allows for greater sensitivity than analog systems. In addition, digital systems
are capable of handling greater volumes of metadata. Based on these two advantages digital systems are
typically the preferred method of data collection and storage.
Data should be stored with a minimum of 1-hour and 1-minute averaging periods. The 1-hour averaging
period is required for reporting purposes; the 1-minute averaging period facilitates the validation process.
Data loggers averaging 60 minute time intervals or greater should be configured to capture a minimum of
75% of the data from the shorter time interval. As an example, during a 60 minute time interval at least 45
minutes of 1-minute data is required.
Data should be reported using Pacific Standard Time to the ending hour (i.e. 8:00 covers data from 7:01 to
8:00).


7.2       Data Validation Process
The data validation process involves actions and decisions which result in the transition of the as-collected
data to a final dataset with an established level of data validity. Data validation is a progressive four step
process which begins with preliminary verification activities at level 0 and concludes with an independent
data review at level 3. Data validation responsibilities for the monitoring station’s operator and field trained
technician are limited to Level 0.
The data validation process prescribed for operators of ambient air monitoring stations within ENV’s
jurisdiction is generally consistent with that undertaken in the NAPS program, although recommendations
specific to monitoring data collected within the ENV’s jurisdiction do exist.
An overview of the validation process is shown in Figure 7.2.1. The validation process including frequency,
and data review intervals is summarized in Table 7.2.2.




                            British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                 Page 26 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring



Figure 7.2.1: Overview of Data Validation Process




Manual quality control assessments and corrections must be completed before monitoring data can be
submitted as validated data. Data corrections for significant zero and span drifts that occur between zero
and span tests do not need to occur in real time. Data corrections can be applied during routine data
reviews, such as those following a full month of monitoring. If zero and span checks are controlled
automatically, the data can be corrected at near real-time; however, until the corrections are applied the
data must be identified as preliminary.

Table 7.2.1: Summary of Data Validation Requirements
  Process Level            Level 0                        Level 1                 Level 2            Level 3

 Data                                                     Level 0                  Level 1            Level 2
                          Raw data
 Description                                          Validated Data           Validated Data     Validated Data

 Frequency                1 to 7 days               Following multi-point
                         (1 to 3 days                    calibration           6 to 12 months       Annually
                          preferred)                 Weekly or monthly
 Period of Data
                          1 to 6 days                  1 to 6 months           6 to 12 months    1 or more years
 Reviewed


                                            Review of level 0               Review of level 1   Independent
                                            Validation                      Validation          review



                                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                              Page 27 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring



 Process Level         Level 0                    Level 1                     Level 2                  Level 3
 Summary of        Review            › Review of field records       › Review data             › Compare datasets
 Requirements      automated         › Review of operational and       summary                 › Analysis using
                   screening           instrument parameters           statistics/compare        other techniques
                  › Review zero                                        historical data           (e.g. modelling
                                     › Review of
                    and span                                         › Examine                   and statistical
                    results            verification/calibration
                                       results, reconcile data         relationships             tests)
                  › Review 1-hour                                      between monitoring      › Examine
                                     › Apply necessary
                    data for all                                       parameters                meteorological
                    parameters         adjustments to data and
                                       flags (e.g., over-range,      › Compare data              data
                  › Review             baseline, below zero            against nearby sites    › Refer potential
                    diagnostics        adjustments)                  › Reject outlier data       issues to primary
                    data and                                           identified as suspect     validators for
                                     › Investigate suspicious data
                    alarms/alerts                                                                appropriate action
                                       using sub-hourly data
                  › Review of time
                    stamps against
                    correct time




7.3       Data Flags & Logs
Data flags characterize individual data points as valid or invalid. These are activated during various levels
of data validation. In Level 0, flags are activated either automatically based on instrument status to indicate
daily zero/span checks and instrument failures, or manually by the station operator to conduct maintenance,
calibration, instrument verification, replacement, and other activities. Whenever possible, station operators
should make an electronic logbook entry to justify the automated and manually activated flags. Logbook
entries are also made to document observations during site visits or events that may have an impact on
instrument operations and data.
Dataloggers that are not capable of reporting flags must transmit invalid data as a null value or -9999.
Logbook entries that justify these flags should be documented and submitted on a regular basis to the data
polling centre (Central Polling System) as requirements of Level 0 validation.
Data flags are also activated during Level 1 and Level 2 validation as a result of data and instrument
anomalies, audit failures, calibration issues, verification check failures, and other issues related to data,
station, and instrument operations. Data flags can be modified during Level 1 and Level 2 validation. All
adjustments to data, including baseline adjustments and flag corrections implemented during these
validation activities are documented and stored in the Central Polling Station’s data validation log.
Validation logs should include, at minimum, the following information:
    ›   Name of the person who performed the validation action;
    ›   Date of validation action completed;
    ›   Monitoring Parameter(s) affected;
    ›   Description of any data adjustments and/or flag modifications;
    ›   Brief description of any actions performed to address monitoring system/data issues;
    ›   Identification of the validity of anomalous data or outliers; and,
    ›   Justification for changes made after validation has been completed.




                            British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                     Page 28 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring



Monitoring data that has been invalidated through the validation process should be reported as a blank
value. Note this is different from other jurisdictions such as NAPS which report invalid data as -9999.


7.4        Level 0 - Preliminary Validation
A Level 0 validation process usually involves both automatic and manual data screening and subsequent
flagging; however, in some instances the level 0 validation process may be entirely automated.
Recommended level 0 data validation activities are provided in the following table.

Table 7.4.1: Level 0 Verification Checklist
 Check #                    Activity                                             Comment
 Automatic Checks

     1       Identify periods of missing data.          Possibly due to power/instrument/communication failure.


     2       Identify data outside of instrument’s      Outside of instrument operating range, negative values, or
             monitoring range or expected range.        outside of an established historical expected range.

             Review rate of change to assess if
     3                                                  Can be compared to predefined rate of change thresholds.
             data changes too rapidly, or not at all.

 Manual Checks

             Review of 1-hour data for all
     4                                                  View in tables and graphs.
             parameters.

             Review of 1-hour data for
     5       completeness and instrument
             performance.

                                                        (Typically checks #1-3 above), instrument diagnostics and
     6       Review of automated screening flags.
                                                        alarms.

             Verification that zero and span are
     7
             within specifications.
             Verification of time stamps against
     8
             correct time.

Data that has been flagged for exclusion should be investigated. Investigations will assist in identifying the
root cause of flagged data and help develop corrective actions where applicable. Corrective actions should
be implemented as soon as possible to minimize data loss. Corrective actions must be recorded in the
validation log.


7.5        Level 1 - Primary Validation
Level 1 validation generally occurs between consecutive multi-point verifications, at an interval of 1 to 6
months, and after any instrument repairs or adjustments. Level 1 validation activities build on the data
screening and flagging conducted during the Level 0 validation process. Level 1 validation activities provide
a more thorough evaluation of available information and documentation. During Level 1 validation data
should be flagged, issues identified, and corrective actions undertaken. Recommended level 1 data
validation activities are provided in the following table.




                              British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                    Page 29 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring




Table 7.5.1: Level 1 Validation Checklist
 Check #                                                     Activity

 1          Review of field records that were not available at the time of the level 0 checks. Review to identify
            issues or incidents with the potential to affect data quality. This information may be recorded in station
            logs, instrument maintenance records, multi-point verification and calibration records.

 2          Review of operation and instrument parameters
            The review considers any instrument specific conditions that may invalidate data. These parameters
            may be specified by the manufacturer or in SOPs. Examples include leak checks and environmental
            temperature and pressure controls.

 3          Review of multi-point verification results
            Compare zero and span check results with the multi-point verification results for consistency. If the
            results are inconsistent or the data has been invalidated or flagged, adjust the data based on the
            multi-point verification.
            If the multi-point verification results are outside of ENV acceptance criteria provided in Table 6.4.1, the
            data should be invalidated to the most recent point in time where the data was verified as valid. If this
            action is not taken a sound justification must be developed and recorded. Where data has been
            invalidated, corrective actions should be developed and implemented. Corrective actions should
            specify a timeline to minimize data loss and identify the qualified person charged with implementing
            the corrective action.

 4          Review of over-range values
            There may be circumstances where an instrument monitors an unusually high reading. Where the
            high reading is triggered by a real event such as widespread woodstove use during a period of cold
            weather, it is termed as an over-range value. Over-range data points should be preserved in the
            dataset and flagged as reading(s) that are attributable to a direct event. Over-range flags that are kept
            should be noted in the validation log.

 5          Review of automatic zero adjustments
            If automatic zero adjustments are made automatically by an instrument the adjustments should be
            reviewed manually to verify the automated adjustment feature is functioning correctly.

 6          Baseline adjustments
            Changes to instrument response overtime, observable when the instrument is sampling zero air, is
            common. Instrument drift can be identified by reviewing zero checks using graphs and tables and
            confirmed during multi-point verification or by checking for a depletion of zero air consumables.
            Baseline drifts correction of data should be undertaken if tolerance levels provided in the following
            table are exceeded.
                                         Pollutant             Zero Point Tolerance
                                         CO                    ± 0.08 ppm
                                         O3                    ± 1.0 ppb
                                         NOX                   ± 1.0 ppb
                                         SO2                   ± 0.5 ppb
                                         H2S/TRS               ± 0.5 ppb
            Zero checks should be evaluated individually if they are used in data adjustment. The following points
            highlight additional considerations for corrections of drift:
            ›   Excessive correction to hourly data increases uncertainty in short-term monitored data, although
                long term (annual) averages may be reasonably accurate.
            ›   Frequent adjustment of the instrument zero results in higher data uncertainty and possible data
                invalidation.




                             British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                       Page 30 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring



 Check #                                                     Activity
             ›   A rapid or excessive change in zero signals an instrument malfunction and possible data
                 invalidation; not instrument drift which would be seen over days to weeks.
             ›   Corrections due to drifts in span results are not recommended by ENV and are not allowed by
                 NAPS.
             Baseline adjustments are made to the data by either: 1) adjusting the data by the verified drift amount
             and applying that adjustment to all data during the period between consecutive compliant zero
             checks; or 2) interpolating zero adjustments between consecutive zero checks to gradually adjust the
             baseline.

 7           Below zero adjustments
             Instruments are subject to zero noise, which is a measure of the deviations from zero while sampling
             zero air.
             Care should be taken to distinguish zero noise data from operational issues, since operational issue
             data should be invalidated. Zero noise corrections should be made on valid hourly data where
             readings less than zero should be adjusted to zero. The following table summarizes the zero
             adjustment criteria.
                       Averaging Interval     Parameter        Validation Criteria
                                                               All negative values determined valid shall
                       Sub Hourly             All parameters
                                                               remain negative
                                                               PM2.5 value ≥ -3 and < 0 adjusted to 0
                                              PM2.5 (ug/m3)
                                                               PM2.5 value < -3 are flagged as invalid
                       1-hour                                  Below zero values determined valid are
                                              All gases        adjusted to zero (values < -3 should be
                                                               further investigated prior to setting to zero)

             m

 8           Derived parameter relationships
             Some instruments do not directly measure a substance but instead provide a measurement is based
             on an established relationship. During validation, checks are made to ensure the relationship is
             preserved during the monitoring period.
             For example NO2 is typically not a direct measurement of NO2, rather it is calculated as the difference
             between NOx and NO in the sample. If adjustments are made to NO, NOX or NO2 it may be necessary
             to apply these adjustments to all parameters to preserve the relationship. Since NO and NOX are
             often not measured simultaneously a tolerance level of ±2 ppb difference is allowed for the summation
             of the three compounds.


7.6        Level 2 - Final Validation
Level 2 validation, which is performed every 6 to 12 months, reviews the past 6 to 12 months’ worth of
hourly data. The objectives of the Level 2 validation are to:
     ›   Verify zero inconsistencies between related data, measured at the station;
     ›   Verify zero inconsistencies between regional data (if applicable); and,
     ›   Provide contextualization of monitoring data to time and place.
All suspect data should be investigated. An investigation can include reviewing level 1 checks and
supporting documentation to ensure any flags and adjustments are applied correctly. Additionally,
investigations may result in the identification of missed data that should be flagged and invalidated due to
instrument malfunction or other issues.
Recommended level 2 data validation activities are provided in the following table.




                             British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                       Page 31 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring



Table 7.6.1: Level 2 Validation Checklist
 Check #                                                     Activity

 1          Data summaries and statistics
            Plot data summaries and statistical analysis to assist in identifying outliers.

 2          Meteorological data
            Review relevant meteorological data using wind rose and pollutant roses to assist in identifying
            anomalous data.

 3          Data time series plots
            Plot multiple station parameters together if available to identify relationships/trends are as expected,
            for example O3 and NO2 are often inversely correlated. This may include plotting diurnal trends. For
            example, in urban areas concentrations of NO2 would be expected to correlate to times of peak traffic.
            O3 typically exhibits a diurnal and seasonal trend.

 4          Independent Data
            Compare station data to data from nearby monitoring stations to assess the validity of suspect data.
            For example, large pollutant events that would have regional air quality effects would likely be evident
            in the data from a number of monitoring stations.



Data should be considered valid unless substantial evidence demonstrates that it is inconsistent with
dependant (related) and independent data or is not representative of the time or place monitored.
Justifications for inclusion or exclusion of outlier or anomalous data validity should be documented.


7.7        Level 3 - Independent Data Review
The level 3 independent data review is not meant to replicate or replace Level 1 or Level 2 reviews. The
level 3 review should be undertaken by an individual independent from the field operator and previous
validator. The reviewer should be a suitably qualified person whose knowledge of air pollutants and
meteorological and basic site conditions will help ensure that the data is subjected to a robust and
dependable level of review.
A level 3 review is generally performed annually on a full years-worth of data. The review focuses on the
identification and assessment of trends that would most likely not be apparent in the shorter (e.g. monthly)
data. In addition to trend analysis of data, the review should include comparisons to regional and other
relevant datasets. Suspect data should be flagged, and the previous reviewers and validators of that data
should be notified. Appropriate investigations and modification should be undertaken, and justifications
noted and logged.


7.8        Post Validation
Despite the best efforts of station operators, reviewers and independent validators, errors and omissions
may still exist in the validated data.
Charts, time series, and annual statistics (minimum and maximum) should be reviewed annually, as a
minimum. If errors and omissions are identified or suspected the data review periods may be re-evaluated.
If changes are required, the edited data should undergo re-submittal and re-validation.




                             British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                     Page 32 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring




8 Collection and Validation of Non-
  Continuous Monitoring Data
Air monitoring measurements by non-continuous or sampler collection methods often require subsequent
laboratory analysis to complete the measurement. This process includes methods such as passive
sampling, low flow rate sampling and high volume sampling. The data validation function for these sampling
methods is performed by the laboratory and is therefore not covered in detail in this document. This type of
monitoring does however involve important data validation aspects such as flow rate, leak rate, and
appropriate filter media that must be considered and addressed at the sample collection stage. In addition
to the information provided in the following two subsections, detailed information on sample collection is
provided in method-specific SOPs located in the Appendices section of this Manual.


8.1       Preparatory Considerations
Prior to the data collection stage, a laboratory will typically be involved in the preparation/preconditioning
of the sample media such as filters, cartridges or passive sampler cartridges. As a best practice, sample
media should be used within 30 days of conditioning by the laboratory. The appropriate sample media
should be selected in consideration of the monitoring objectives and the subsequent laboratory analysis
required. For example, if metals analysis of a filter is required then this may require a different sample
media to be used. Samples are transported to the sampling location, installed, left for the sampling period
and then retrieved and transported back to the laboratory for analysis.
During the data collection period, the following information should be recorded as a minimum:
    ›   Monitoring location/ID
    ›   Date/time of sample installation and retrieval
    ›   Sample ID
    ›   Sample media ID
    ›   Sample type (field blank, travel blank, duplicate/s)
    ›   Complete chain of custody and any other documentation required by the laboratory
    ›   Other operational parameters specific to a sample collection method (see method specific SOPs
        within the Appendices for more information)
    ›   Information on sample validity, for example:
            o   Sample media damage
            o   Note if sample tampering is suspected
            o   Sampler equipment errors/malfunctions
            o   Unusual weather conditions
            o   Potential interference during sampling (e.g. vegetation clearing activities occurred during
                the sampling period)
During the data collection period, appropriate laboratory blanks should be used. A minimum of one blank
sample media should be used for every media shipment. The blank should be returned to the laboratory




                            British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                               Page 33 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring



with the same batch of sample media it was received with. It is recommended that samplers confirm the
process for collecting blanks as well as the number of blanks required with the analysing laboratory.
Sample media should be retrieved and shipped to the laboratory as soon as practical following the sampling
period. Some sampling methods provide recommended retrieval times (e.g., within 5 days) and maximum
handling times depending on the required laboratory analysis.


8.2       High-Volume Sampling for Trace Metals
Detailed data collection information for high-volume samplers is provided in SOP-05d located in the
Appendices section of this Manual. This section of the Manual provides additional information on the use
of high-volume sampling to collect data to assess chronic hazards associated with the presence of trace
metals in particulate matter.


8.2.1 Background
Requirements of the High-Volume sampling method include:
    ›   The analysis of 5 blank filters prior to the use/implementation of new filter types.
    ›   A trip blank must be provided for every 5 samples collected.
    ›   Unless otherwise required by permit or site-specific monitoring objectives High Volume samplers
        should draw a sample over a full 7 day period per filter, and the 7 day sampling intervals should be
        contiguous (one interval following immediately after another) over the course of a full year.
    ›   The sampling site must meet Ministry standards for particulate sampling.
    ›   Analytical reports must include QA/QC data and information for all reported parameters.
These requirements maximize the amount of information obtained from the sampling equipment and
laboratory methodologies. Information produced by this method facilitates a calculation of chronic exposure
hazards with the greatest accuracy and reliability without significantly increasing the costs of sample
collection and analysis.
An assessment of the chronic impact of trace metals involves calculating the average metal concentration
found in a sequence of samples. The high-volume sampling method involves drawing particulate onto a
filter. Laboratory analysis of the sample will determine the combination of metals in the sample and metals
in the filter.
In calculating an averaged ambient metal concentration, the averaged metal content of the filters must be
subtracted from the averaged total (sample and filter) of the metal measured. The greatest source of
uncertainty in calculating ambient metals concentrations is generally due to the variability in the metal
composition of the filter.


8.2.2 Quality Control
Because metals are often present in concentrations which border on the threshold of detection:
    ›   A proper understanding of the uncertainties and statistical distribution of the amounts of metals in
        the analyzed sample (filter plus collected particulate) is required, as is;
    ›   A proper understanding of the uncertainties and statistical distribution of the amounts of metals in
        blank filters.
Under no circumstance should data be censored at a detection limit as this destroys the statistical profile.



                            British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                              Page 34 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring



Analytical reports provided from laboratories must include quality control information. Quality control
information is used to separate bias and precision from overall uncertainties so that averaged quantities
can be accorded an appropriate uncertainty. This also allows for the incorporation of information obtained
from a variety of analytic sources (laboratories) and methodologies, into a statistical analysis, adjusting for
bias and precision as required.
To mitigate the costs associated with quality control, samples can be processed in batches. However, to
build a base of quality control information, a given batch should not contain more than 5 samples.
As quality control reference samples, containing known concentrations of metals, which match those found
in a typical field sample become available, at least one reference sample must be included with every
sample batch analyzed.
Because of the volume of information, all data from the laboratory analysis must be available electronically
in a form that can be easily incorporated into Ministry databases. Laboratories that seek to provide analytical
services must receive approval from the Ministry for data delivery formats prior to submission.


8.2.3 Analysis of Blank Filters
A statistical base of information must be generated for every filter type used in the collection of ambient
metals samples. This can be accomplished whenever a new filter type is introduced by having the lab
provide an analysis of the metallic composition of 5 filters prior to circulation and use. At present, only the
Pallflex Teflon TX40HI20WW has been approved for metals analysis sampling. Other filter types must
receive approval from the Ministry before being used.
The contamination associated with the field analysis can be determined by analyzing trip blanks. A trip
blank is a blank filter that is delivered to the field site, placed on the high-volume sampler, removed
immediately without activating the sampler, and then repackaged and shipped to the lab for analysis. To
develop a base of information, trip blanks must accompany every 5 samples collected in the field. This will
allow tracking of contamination and variations between filter batches.
Should a significant trend be noted in the trip blanks it may be necessary to re-analyze a sequence of
blanks (not trip blanks). This step is taken to ensure that the filter composition has not shifted. If, after this
step, it is determined that the composition of the filter has not changed, the sampling methodology should
be re-examined to ensure that contamination is being minimized.


8.2.4 Sampling
The uncertainty introduced by the metal composition of a filter can be reduced if the amount of sample per
filter is increased. This can be accomplished by running the high-volume sampler for a period exceeding
24 hours per filter.
Sampling period durations are limited by the build-up of particulate matter on the filter. At a certain
concentration the particulate matter will block the air flow pathways through the filter which results in an
alteration of its screening properties. The suppliers of filters generally do not provide or specify maximum
load limits.
A rough estimate of acceptable loading can be obtained using maximum loading limits of historic/past
measurements in British Columbia. For TSP, the maximum load was 1.3 grams (ambient concentration of
787 ug/m3 collected over 24 hours). For PM10 the maximum load was 0.7 g (ambient concentration of 419
ug/m3 collected over 24 hours). No failure of equipment was noted for such loadings over the 24 hour
sampling period.




                             British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                 Page 35 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring



Actual loading limits will depend on the density and size of particulate collected. As a guide however, filters
should generally not become overloaded when operated for 7 days in an environment where the ambient
concentration rarely exceeds 100 ug/m3. The 7 day sampling duration is provided as an initial guideline to
coincide with a normal work week schedule. Additionally, the 7 day sampling duration is long enough that
the relative uncertainty associated with the metallic composition of the Teflon filters (Pallflex EMFAB
TX40H120WW) is less than levels set by current ambient objectives.
The duration of the sampling period can be extended beyond 7 days if it is demonstrated that this will not
overload the HiVol sampler. The number of days can be reduced if filters of greater metallic purity (less
trace metal composition, or more uniform metallic composition) are used. At present only the Pallflex Teflon
TX40HI20WW has been approved for metals analysis sampling, and as such the sampling period must not
be reduced without prior consultation with and approval from the Ministry.
For quality assurance, the flow rate of the high-volume sampler must be measured at the beginning and
end of the sampling interval, although an instrument model that continuously monitors and records the flow
rate throughout the sampling period is preferred. Flow rate information must be available for incorporation
into Ministry databases.
Sampling must be conducted over contiguous intervals (the next sample started as soon as the previous
sample is finished) so that statistical artifacts associated with high, or low concentration episodes can be
minimized.
Equipment downtime is tolerable as long as samples are collected over at least 85% of the time for each
calendar month.




                            British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                Page 36 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring




9 Training
Personnel who operate ambient air monitoring stations within the provincial jurisdiction of British Columbia
as well as persons conducting maintenance on those stations and the instrumentation deployed at the
stations must be appropriately trained to carry out those tasks. In addition to mentoring and on-the-job
training, formal training is available through several agencies such as the Air and Waste Management
Association (AWMA), vendors. Training should be ongoing through refresher courses and continual
improvement to remain current with technological developments and to better understand the specific
operational characteristics and requirements of each monitoring station. Training records must be
maintained and available for review.
In addition to training required for monitoring station operation and maintenance, personnel must have
formal training as required to conduct activities included in the British Columbia Occupational Health and
Safety Regulation (OHSR).
Training in the following areas should be taken where warranted:
    ›   First Aid;
    ›   Workplace Hazardous Material Information System (WHMIS);
    ›   Transportation of Dangerous Goods;
    ›   Working at Height and Ladder Safety; and,
    ›   Safe Driving Techniques.




                           British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                              Page 37 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring




10 Documentation and Record Keeping
Ambient air monitoring stations must maintain records that are relevant to the operation of the station, the
maintenance and deployment of instrumentation and issues and incidents with the potential to affect data
validity. Accurate and organized record keeping will help identify substantial issues before they arise,
identify potential trends and demonstrate the proficiency of a station’s operation.
In particular ambient air monitoring stations must maintain the following records:
    ›   Station Start-Up Record;
    ›   Inspection and Maintenance Records;
    ›   Verification and Calibration Records;
    ›   Non-Conformance and Corrective Action Records;
    ›   Level 0 Data Verification Log; and,
    ›   Audit Evaluations.




                             British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                            Page 38 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring




11 Audits
The objective of an audit is to ensure that the data generated by ambient air monitoring stations is produced
at an acceptable level of quality and in a consistent manner across all regions of the province. This ensures
that monitoring results from each station are comparable to one another and reliable for their intended
monitoring objectives. ENV’s detailed audit processes are described in the Standard Auditing Procedure
for Continuous Emission Monitors and Ambient Air Monitoring Instruments (B.C. ENV 2009).
The B.C. Ministry of Environment and Climate Change Strategy conducts audits on all ambient air
monitoring stations within their jurisdiction. Generally, an audit consists of:
    ›    An audit notice;
    ›    The audit process which includes:
              o    Instrument performance verification;
              o    Calibrator verification;
              o    Housing inspection; and,
              o    Site accessibility.
    ›    Post-audit corrective actions if required.
A flow chart of the audit process is provided in Figure 11.1 below.


Figure 11.1: Auditing Procedure




                                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                        Page 39 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring




11.1 Audit Process
Ambient air monitoring station operators can expect to receive an audit notice from ENV one to two weeks
prior to an audit event. The notice will provide an overview of the audit’s intent and activities. The station
operator will work with the ENV auditor in the completion of the audit. General audit criteria include the
verification of instrument performance, checking of support equipment and review of the station logbook.
Audits are completed in accordance with the procedures outlined in the Standard Auditing Procedure for
Continuous Emission Monitors and Ambient Air Monitoring Instruments (the Standard Auditing Procedure).


11.2 Audit Results
At the end of the audit process the station will be assigned a pass or fail in accordance with the criteria
listed in the Standard Auditing Procedure. Stations that pass their audit will continue to be audited bi-
annually. If a stations instrument does not achieve its audit criteria the auditor will typically debrief the station
operator explaining the rationale for their finding. The station operator must then investigate the failure,
identify the root cause of the failure and develop and implement corrective actions to mitigate the potential
of a reoccurrence. The station operator must ensure that the corrective actions are implemented in order
to restore the ambient air monitoring station to an acceptable state. An instrument that fails an audit may
be scheduled for additional audits on a quarterly basis until the station has passed two consecutive audits.


11.3 Audit Follow-Up
Within one month of an audit’s completion the ENV auditor will provide the station operator with the audit
certificates and an email summarizing the audit results. The summary and certificates will provide the
following information:
    ›    Audit date and site name;
    ›    Audit team members;
    ›    Equipment used to conduct the audit;
    ›    Audit findings;
    ›    A link to the Standard Auditing Procedure; and,
    ›    The results of any additional investigations that were completed following an audit failure.
The audit event must be recorded in the station’s log along with any follow up maintenance or work that
has been undertaken as a result of the audit.




                              British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                   Page 40 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring




12 References
ASTM D2487-17, Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil
   Classification System), ASTM International, West Conshohocken, PA, 2017.
ASTM D2488-17, Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedures),
   ASTM International, West Conshohocken, PA, 2017.
EPA, 1990. Field Measurements: Dependable Data When You Need It, Office of Underground Storage Tanks,
   Washington, DC. EPA/530/UST-90-003.
CCME, 2008. Scoping Assessment of Soil Vapour Monitoring Protocols for Evaluating Subsurface Vapour
  Intrusion into Indoor Air, prepared by Geosyntec Consultants, dated July 8, 2008, 24 pp.
CCME, 2016. Guidance Manual for Environmental Site Characterization in Support of Environmental and
  Human Health Risk Assessment (Section 5).
County of San Diego, Department of Environmental Health, 2004. Site Assessment and Mitigation Manual,
   http://www.sandiegocounty.gov/content/sdc/deh/lwqd/sam_manual.html
Nielsen, D.M. (ed). 2006. Practical Handbook of Environmental Site Characterization and Ground-Water
    Monitoring. 2nd Edition. CRC Press, Taylot & Francis Group, 1,318 pp.
USEPA, 2005. Technical Guidelines for Accurately Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)
   Concentrations in Soil and Solid Matrices, USEPA Region 9, 10 pp.
Rae Systems, 2014. Technical Note TN-118, Using Rae Systems PIDs for Measuring Soil Headspace and In
   Soil Vapour Extractions. http://www.raesystems.com/customer-care/resource-center/tech-notes.
ASTM D1452 / D1452M-16, Standard Practice for Soil Exploration and Sampling by Auger Borings, ASTM
   International, West Conshohocken, PA, 2016.
ASTM D1586-11, Standard Test Method for Standard Penetration Test (SPT) and Split-Barrel Sampling of
   Soils, ASTM International, West Conshohocken, PA, 2011.
ASTM D2487-11, Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil
   Classification System), ASTM International, West Conshohocken, PA, 2011.
ASTM D2488-09a, Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedure),
   ASTM International, West Conshohocken, PA, 2009.
ASTM D4083-89(2016), Standard Practice for Description of Frozen Soils (Visual-Manual Procedure), ASTM
   International, West Conshohocken, PA, 2016.
ASTM D4547-15, Standard Guide for Sampling Waste and Soils for Volatile Organic Compounds, ASTM
   International, West Conshohocken, PA, 2015.
ASTM D4700-15, Standard Guide for Soil Sampling from the Vadose Zone, ASTM International, West
   Conshohocken, PA, 2015.
ASTM D5434-12, Standard Guide for Field Logging of Subsurface Explorations of Soil and Rock, ASTM
   International, West Conshohocken, PA, 2012.
ASTM D6169 / D6169M-13, Standard Guide for Selection of Soil and Rock Sampling Devices Used With Drill
   Rigs for Environmental Investigations, ASTM International, West Conshohocken, PA, 2013.
ASTM D6282 / D6282M-14, Standard Guide for Direct Push Soil Sampling for Environmental Site
   Characterizations, ASTM International, West Conshohocken, PA, 2014.
ASTM D6286-12, Standard Guide for Selection of Drilling Methods for Environmental Site Characterization,
   ASTM International, West Conshohocken, PA, 2012.




                          British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                           Page 41 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring



Environment and Climate Change Canada. 2017. National Air Pollution Surveillance Program (NAPS)
       Monitoring and Quality Assurance/Quality Control Guidelines.

Alberta Government. 2014. Air Monitoring Directive: Chapter 5. ISBN No. 978-1-4601-1502-2.
        http://aep.alberta.ca/air/legislation/air-monitoring-directive/documents/AirMonitoring5-
        QualitySystem-Jun24-2014.pdf

Alberta Government. 2016. Air Monitoring Directive: Chapter 3. ISBN No. 978-1-4601-3185-5.
        http://aep.alberta.ca/air/legislation/air-monitoring-directive/documents/AMD-Chapter3-SiteSelection-
        Dec16-2016A.pdf

BC ENV. 2009. Operational Policy Manual Environment Protection Division. Section 6.01.02 Standard
      Auditing Procedure for Continuous Emission Monitors and Ambient Air Monitoring Instruments.

US EPA. 2013. Quality Assurance Handbook for Pollution Measurement Systems Volume II: Ambient Air
      Quality Monitoring Program. EPA-45/B-13-003.
      https://www3.epa.gov/ttnamti1/files/ambient/pm25/qa/QA-Handbook-Vol-II.pdfSiegrist, R.L. and
      P.D. Jenssen, 1990. Evaluation of sampling method effects on volatile organic compounds
      measurmeents in contaminated soils. Environmental Science and Technology, no. 24, p. 1387-
      1392.




                            British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                 Page 42 of 202
Part B1 – Ambient Air Quality Monitoring




13 Revision History
May 01, 2020        This ‘Part’ (Part B1 – Ambient Air Monitoring) initial publication.
November 1996:      Initial publication of the British Columbia Field Sampling Manual.




                       British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                             Page 43 of 202
    Appendix 1
Forms and Checklists




British Columbia Field Sampling Manual   Page 44 of 202
Step
No.                       Analyzer Calibration Checklist
 1     □              Turn the calibrator on and allow it to warm up to operating temperature.

 2     □                  Record data acquisition system channel and flag into calibration.

           Connect a two-stage pressure regulator to a certified calibration standard cylinder and purge
 3     □
                                                   regulator.

       a     □                                          Turn the pump on

       b     □                        Open the regulator valve and purge for 60 seconds

                     While keeping the pump on, close the regulator valve and slowly open the cylinder
       c     □
                                       valve to fill the regulator with calibration gas

       d     □               Close cylinder valve and open regulator valve to evacuate regulator

       e     □                                Repeat the previous two steps twice

       f     □                                      Close the regulator valve

                    Connect an 1/8 inch stainless steel line from the purged regulator to the gas inlet of
       g     □
                                                       the calibrator

                    Slowly open the cylinder valve and verify that the regulator out pressure is within the
       h     □
                                                 calibrator’s specifications

       i     □                                    Slowly open regulator valve

             Connect a vent line to vent excess air from the calibrator to the atmosphere. This can be
           achieved by connecting a transfer line to one of the calibrator manifold ports using a reducer
 4     □
           or for calibrators without a manifold connect, by using a stainless steel Tee to the calibrator.
               The length to diameter ratio must be at least 10:1 to prevent ambient air entrainment.

 5     □                                   Plug any unused manifold ports.

           For all points measure the flow by connecting a flow meter to the calibration gas outlet on the
 6     □      calibrator. Record the flow value. Flow values are calculated as the average of ten flow
                                 measurements from a certified primary flow meter.

           Perform an as found zero by setting the calibrator to produce zero air. Monitor analyzer zero
 7     □
                             readings, verify reading stability for at least 10 minutes.

           Perform an as found upper point by setting the calibrator to generate a concentration at 80%
 8     □    of the instrument’s range. Monitor the analyzer’s readings to verify reading stability for at
                  least 10 minutes then set the instrument to read the generated concentration.

             Install an inline particulate filter to the analyzers inlet and connect a transfer line from the
 9     □       calibration port/Tee to the filter inlet OR replace the calibrator inter filter (whichever is
                                                         applicable).

            Set the calibrator to produce zero air. Monitor the analyzers zero reading to verify reading
           stability for at least 10 minutes then set the reading to zero. For all points measure the flow
10     □     by connecting a flow meter to the calibration gas outlet on the calibrator. Record the flow
           value. Flow values are calculated as the average of ten flow measurements from a certified
                                                  primary flow meter.




                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                          Page 45 of 202
Step
No.                      Analyzer Calibration Checklist
            Set the calibrator to generate a concentration at 80% of the instrument’s range. Monitor the
            analyzers readings, verify reading stability for at least 10 minutes then set the instrument to
11     □
           read the generated concentration. Check that the reading is stable and within ±1% of the set
                                                concentration value.

12     □    Set calibrator to produce zero gas again to verify zero reading. If necessary re-adjust zero.

           Using the calibrator introduce gas at concentrations of 80%, followed by 60%, 40% and 20%
13     □    of the instruments range. Verify stability for at least 10 minutes at each point. Alternative
                                  ranges can be used with approval from the ENV.

14     □                          Reconfigure the analyzer for normal operation.

           Perform a zero and span check and record these values as part of the calibration report. The
15     □      zero and span check values will be used as the control values until the next calibration.
                            Reset the data logger flagging to normal operation mode.

16     □                     Reset the datalogger’s flagging to normal operation mode

               Document all calibration results, and calibration procedures in sufficient detail in the
17     □
                               equipment’s log book and in the calibration report.

            Plot the calibration curves from the instrument against the calibrators zero and four upscale
18     □     points (80%, 60%, 40% and 20%) and calculate the slope and intercept. The calibration
                              curves can be used to correct subsequent monitoring data.

19     □                               Mark up the data acquisition channel.

20     □             Attach a visible label to the instrument identifying the date of calibration.




                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                        Page 46 of 202
          Placeholder for

Inspection & Maintenance Form




British Columbia Field Sampling Manual   Page 47 of 202
               Placeholder for

Non-Conformance & Corrective Action Form




     British Columbia Field Sampling Manual   Page 48 of 202
         Appendix 2
Standard Operating Procedures




    British Columbia Field Sampling Manual   Page 49 of 202
           Monitoring Parameter:                        Standard Operating Procedure for the
       Carbon Monoxide (CO)                            Continuous Measurement of Ambient CO

         Revision No: Original                                  Reference No: SOP-01
      Revision Date: 05 May, 2020                 Parent Document: Part B1 – B.C. Field Sampling Manual

1. Introduction and Scope
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) provides operating guidelines and instruction for the continuous
ambient monitoring of Carbon Monoxide (CO) within the provincial jurisdiction of British Columbia (BC).

This SOP forms part of the British Columbia Field Sampling Manual (BCFSM). Part B - Air and Air Emissions Testing
of the BCFSM provides additional information on Air Quality Monitoring that must be used in conjunction with the
information provided in this SOP. Installation and maintenance of a CO analyzer within the provincial jurisdiction
of BC must be carried out with consideration to Part B of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual, the analyzer
manufacturer’s manual, and this document.
2. Document Control
This Standard Operating Procedure is a controlled document. Document control provides a measure of assurance
that the specifications and guidance it provides are based on current information that has been scrutinized by a
qualified reviewer/s. Controlled documents are reviewed within a five year life cycle. Please ensure that the
revision date listed in the header of this document does not exceed five years.

This SOP and the B.C. Field Sampling Manual are available at: www2.gov.bc.ca.
3. Principle of the Measurement Method
Nondispersive Infrared Photometry with Gas Filter Correlation (GFC)

The principle detection and quantification method deployed for ambient concentrations of Carbon Monoxide (CO)
involves selective infrared (IR) absorption by CO in a sample of ambient air. To compensate for interfering
compounds that may be present within gas samples the analyzer passes IR light through a gas filter wheel to the
sample cell, and finally to the detector. The gas filter wheel has two rotating chambers; One of the chambers is
filled with a high concentration of CO, the second chamber contains nitrogen. The chamber filled with CO provides
a reference beam that cannot be further altered by the CO in the sample cell and as such, functions as a reference
absorption point. The chamber filled with nitrogen has no impact on the IR radiation since nitrogen gas does not
absorb IR, and therefore this chamber provides a measurement beam that can be absorbed by CO in the sample
cell. The amount of IR absorption by the CO in the sample cell is proportional to its concentration within the
sample. The concentration of CO within the ambient air sample is determined by the ratio of intensities between
the rays that pass through the two chambers using the Beer-Lambert law.

A more detailed discussion on the CO measurement principle is typically provided within the manufacturer’s
operation manual.
4. Interferences
H2O and CO2
As discussed in Section 3 Principles of the Measurement Method, CO analyzers use selective absorption in the IR
spectra. Species such as CO2 and H2O are known to absorb a portion of the same IR spectra as that used in the
measurement of CO. Although some reports claim that the absorption of IR radiation by CO2 and H2O does not
change the ratio of intensities between the reference beam and the measurement beam, and hence does not
interfere with the CO measurement, a permeation dryer must be used to minimize any potential interference from
H20.




                              British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                           Page 50 of 206
Particulate Matter
The presence of particulate matter in air samples is known to interfere with CO measurement. Interference by
particulate matter can be minimized by using a particle filter at the sample inlet (for analyzers that do not have an
internal filter).
5. Precision and Accuracy
Air contaminant concentration measurements are affected by an instrument’s precision and accuracy.

The precision of a measurement is generally considered to be the ‘repeatability of the measurement’. This can be
confirmed through zero and span checks, and calibrations.

The accuracy of the sensor is generally considered to be a measure of the ‘deviation from true’. The accuracy of a
sensor can be checked by performing calibrations against a certified carbon monoxide calibration standard mixture
(See sections 11 and 12). Accuracy can also be confirmed through periodic span checks and multipoint
verifications/calibrations.
6. Recommended Equipment and Apparatus
The following models are commercially available CO analyzers suitable for use within the provincial jurisdiction of
B.C.:

       Latest model of the Thermo Fisher Scientific Environmental Instruments (TEI) trace-level model 48
        instrument (e.g., 48i-TLE).
       Ecotech Serinus 30 Carbon Monoxide analyzer.
       Latest model of the Teledyne trace-level model 300 instrument (e.g., T300U).

This list does not necessarily exclude other commercially available CO analyzers, and analyzers recognized by the
United States (US) Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) Federal Reference and Equivalent Methods. Indeed
as technology advances, new analyzers will enter the market which may be suitable for use within the provincial
jurisdiction of B.C. It is recommended, however, that you consult with the B.C. Ministry of Environment and
Climate Change Strategy (ENV) if you intend to deploy CO analyzers not listed above. Regardless of the equipment
deployed all analyzers should meet the specifications described within this document.
7. Measurement Range and Sensitivity
Typical commercially available CO analyzers operating in B.C. are configured to an operating range of no more
than a 0 ppm to 10 ppm (generally 0 ppm to 5 ppm), with a 0 ppm to 3 ppm calibration range. The detection limit
is determined by instrument type but is generally specified at 0.04 ppm.
8. Site Requirements
Monitoring site specifications should be developed to ensure that the data generated from the site satisfies the
requirements of the stations intended or established monitoring objectives. It is recommended that monitoring
site requirements be established in consultation with ENV to ensure that siting requirements are commensurate
with monitoring objectives.

As a preliminary guideline site selection should consider and address: monitoring objectives, representativeness
of the region, interference from the surrounding area, and zone type of the monitoring location (residential,
commercial, industrial).

Refer to Section 2 of Part B1 of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual for further information on site selection.
    Installation Requirements
    Follow analyzer specific installation requirements provided in the analyzer manufacturer’s manual.
    The installation should also conform to the following:




                              British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                             Page 51 of 206
       The monitoring station’s sampling inlet and manifold shall meet the requirements of the most recent
        version of the National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Program’s Monitoring and Quality
        Assurance/Quality Control Guidelines Section 8.2 and Section 8.3.
       All connection tubing, connectors and fittings from the manifold to the analyzer inlet must be made of
        Teflon or a material of equivalent chemical inertness.
       A Teflon particulate filter meeting the instrument manufacturer’s pore-size specifications unless the
        analyzer is equipped with a similar internal filter. The filter holder must be constructed of an inert material
        (e.g. Teflon, stainless steel).
       To reduce the risk of moisture entering the analyzer it is recommended that horizontally mounted
        manifolds be oriented with the ports facing upwards (with the exception of manifolds such as the “ARB
        style” which must be mounted vertically); ensure any water traps are oriented vertically.
       The analyzer must be placed in a weather resistant enclosure that is vented, heated and cooled to maintain
        a stable temperature preferably in the range of 20°C to 30°C but must ultimately be capable of maintaining
        the operating temperature range specified by the manufacturer. Enclosure temperatures should not
        deviate by more than 2 °C over a one hour period.
       A data acquisition system (DAS) should be connected to the analyzer to record or download the
        measurement data from the analyzer. If an analog data logger is used, it must be set to match the voltage
        range of the analyzer, typically at 1 V or 10 V full scale. It must be ensured that the analog output matches
        the digital output displayed on the analyzer. The DAS must also record and monitor any alarm conditions
        of the analyzer.
       The analyzer must be placed in a temperature controlled, temperature stable enclosure. The enclosure’s
        temperature must be maintained between 20 °C to 30 °C.
       A permeation dryer should be placed in the sampling line upstream of the analyzer.
10. Operational Requirements
The following activities should be performed by the operator of a continuous automated CO analyzer.
                                                                                                                 Record
          Action                            Time/Frequency                              Description
                                                                                                                 Keeping
                                                                                As per manufacturers
                                                                                 operation manual.
                                                                                Operating range should be     Record in
  Analyzer Range Set Up      After installation
                                                                                 0 ppm to 5 ppm;                 logbook
                                                                                 Calibration range 0 ppm -
                                                                                 3 ppm.
                             After installation (or relocation) following a
                               24 hour to 72 hour warm up period;
                             After analyzer repairs/maintenance that
                              may have affected the performance of the
                              instrument;
                             When zero check exceeds ± 0.1 ppm;
                             When span drift is ≥ ± 10% of reference
  Multipoint Verification     value;                                            As per Section 11 of this     Record in
                             For new analyzers, after the first 3 months        SOP                             logbook
                              of operation;
                             Bi-annually if span checks are conducted
                              daily – or when any threshold above is
                              reached (whichever happens first);
                             Quarterly if span checks are conducted less
                              than daily – or when any threshold above is
                              reached (whichever happens first).




                               British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                    Page 52 of 206
                           Daily. Auto-zeroing is permitted for trace-
      Zero and Span         level CO analyzers. Frequency is at the        As per manufacturers
       Verification         discretion of the regulating agency (e.g.       operation manual
                            every 4 – 12 hours).                                                         Record in
    Verify Operational                                                     As per manufacturers           logbook
                           Each station visit.
       Parameters                                                           operation manual
                                                                           As per manufacturers
    Inlet Filter Change    Inspect monthly, change as required.
                                                                            operation manual
                           As recommended by manufacturer or as           As per manufacturers         Record in
  Analyzer Maintenance
                            required.                                       operation manual               logbook
                                                                           Where necessary replace
 Sample Path Inspection    Monthly. May be conducted at a lesser           with new lines, tighten      Record in
   (Probe to Analyzer)      frequency with approval from ENV.               loose connections, clean       logbook
                                                                            manifold as required

11. Zero and Span Checks
Zero and span checks are required to verify the analyzers performance between calibrations. These checks should
be performed in accordance with Section 6 of Part B1 of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual.
12. Calibration
Calibration should be performed in accordance with Section 6 of Part B1 of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual and
the manufacturer’s manual.
13. References

National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Program. Monitoring and Quality Assurance/Quality Control
Guidelines.

Alberta Environment (AENV) 2011. Standard Operating Procedure for Measurement of CO in Ambient Air by Gas
Filter Correlation (GFC). AENV Air Monitoring and Audit Centre.

Ecotech Environmental Monitoring Solutions 2013. Serinus 30 Carbon Monoxide Analyzer User Manual.

Environment Canada (EC) 2010. Continuous Measurement of Carbon Monoxide (CO) in Ambient Air by
Nondispersive Infrared Photometry with Gas Filter Correlation (GFC). EC National Air Pollution Surveillance
(NAPS) Operations Unit.

EC 2004. NAPS Network Quality Assurance and Quality Control Guidelines. EC Environmental Protection Service
Environmental Technology Advancement Directorate Analysis and Air Quality Division. Report No. AAQD 2004-1.

Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation 2012. Operation Manual Model T300/T300M Carbon Monoxide
Analyzer.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 2007. Model 48i Trace Level-Enhanced Instruction Manual Gas Filter Correlation CO
Analyzer.

United States (US) Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 2013. QA handbook for Air Pollution Measurement
Systems Volume II Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program. US EPA Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
Air Quality Assessment Division.

Revision History: 0.0 (New document)
Approval




                             British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                Page 53 of 206
         Monitoring Parameter:
   Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S) and                       Standard Operating Procedure for the
   Total Reduced Sulphur (TRS)                 Continuous Measurement of Ambient H2S and TRS

       Revision No: Original                                Reference No: SOP-02
    Revision Date: 05 May, 2020               Parent Document: Part B1 – B.C. Field Sampling Manual

1. Introduction and Scope
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) provides operating guidelines and instructions for the continuous
ambient monitoring of Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S) and Total Reduced Sulphur within the provincial jurisdiction
of British Columbia (BC).

This SOP forms part of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual (BCFSM). Part B - Air and Air Emissions Testing, of the
BCFSM provides additional information on Air Quality Monitoring that must be used in conjunction with the
information provided in this SOP. Installation and maintenance of an H2S/TRS analyzer within the provincial
jurisdiction of B.C. must be carried out with consideration to Part B of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual, the
analyzer manufacturer’s manual, and this document.

Note: Due to similarities in the monitoring methods for H2S and TRS, the operating guidelines and instructions
for both parameters are presented in this document as a single SOP.
2. Document Control
This Standard Operating Procedure is a controlled document. Document control provides a measure of
assurance that the specifications and guidance it provides are based on current information that has been
scrutinized by a qualified reviewer/s. Controlled documents are reviewed within a five year life cycle. Please
ensure that the revision date listed in the header of this document does not exceed five years.

This SOP and the B.C. Field Sampling Manual are available at: www2.gov.bc.ca.
3. Principle of the Measurement Method
Ultraviolet fluorescence

The principle detection and quantification method deployed for ambient concentrations of H2S and TRS
involves ultraviolet (UV) fluorescence and a photomultiplier tube.

For reference, compounds found in Total Reduced Sulphur (TRS) are comprised of a variety of sulphur
containing compounds such as Carbonyl Sulphide (COS), Carbon Disulphide (CS2) and Methyl Mercaptan
(CH3SH). Similar to H2S, TRS molecules become oxidized to SO2 in the presence of Oxygen and heat. With two
notable exceptions the method deployed for ambient concentrations of H2S and TRS is identical to that
deployed for Sulphur Dioxide (SO2). Although both analyzers use ultraviolet fluorescence (UV) and operate on
the same principle, analyzers used to monitor H2S and TRS deploy scrubbers and a conversion chamber.

The scrubbers are used to remove SO2 and hydrocarbons from the ambient air sample stream. The sample is
then passed through a converter oven which, in the presence of oxygen (O2), converts H2S and/or TRS
compounds into SO2. To convert H2S to SO2, the ambient sample is oxidized in a chamber heated to at least
320 °C. By comparison, the conversion of TRS takes place at a chamber temperature of at least 800 °C;
effectively converting all reduced sulphur compounds to SO2.

The concentration of SO2 in the sample is quantified through ultraviolet (UV) fluorescence. SO2 molecules
absorb UV rays at a wavelength of 214 nm. The absorption of UV rays causes the SO2 molecules to transition
to an excited state. As the excited state SO2 molecules return to their normal state they release energy by



                           British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                           Page 54 of 206
emitting UV light at a wavelength of 330 nm. The analyzer measures the amount of UV light present at a
wavelength of 330 nm using a photo multiplier tube. The measurement of 330 nm UV rays is then used to
quantify the concentration of SO2.

A more detailed discussion on the H2S/TRS measurement principle is typically provided within the
manufacturer’s operation manual. Additional information describing SO2 quantification is provided in SOP-06
located in Appendix 1 of the BCFSM.
4. Interferences

UV Light
H2S/TRS analyzers measure ultraviolet light emitted by SO2 molecules to quantify hydrogen sulfide or total
reduced sulphur and for this reason compounds that emit ultraviolet light at similar wavelengths may
potentially introduce interference. Compounds such as hydrocarbons and nitric oxide (NO) may introduce
interference. To minimize the interference from hydrocarbons, the analyzer should be equipped with a
hydrocarbon scrubber. If typical ambient NO levels are significant when compared to SO2 levels, particularly
for trace level analyzers, it is recommended that the analyzer be tested for it’s degree of sensitivity to NO
using span gas in the range of 600 ppb to 800 ppb NO.

Particulate Matter
The presence of particulate matter in air samples can interfere with the SO2 measurement. The potential for
this interference can be minimized by using a particle filter of 5 µm pore size made of inert material such as
Teflon, at the sample inlet (for analyzers that do not have an internal filter).

Scrubbers
The performance of the SO2 scrubber should be checked routinely, since residual SO2 not removed by the
scrubber can interfere with the measurement of both H2S and TRS.
5. Precision and Accuracy
Air contaminant concentration measurements are affected by an instrument’s precision and accuracy.

The precision of a measurement is generally considered to be the ‘repeatability of the measurement’. This
can be confirmed through zero and span checks, and calibrations.

The accuracy of the sensor is generally considered to be a measure of the ‘deviation from true’. The accuracy
of the sensor can be checked by performing a calibration against a certified H2S/TRS calibration standard
mixture (see sections 10 and 11). Accuracy can also be confirmed through span checks and calibrations.
6. Recommended Equipment and Apparatus
The following are commercially available H2S/TRS analyzers suitable for use within the B.C. ENV’s jurisdiction:

       Thermo Environmental Instruments (TEI) Models 45A, 45C, 450i H2S analyzers with converter model
        numbers 340 for H2S and CDN 101 for TRS; operating in single channel mode.
       Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation Models 101E (H2S), 102E (TRS), 101/101A (H2S)
        102/102A (TRS)

This list does not necessarily exclude the use of other commercially available H2S/TRS analyzers, and analyzers
recognized by United States (US) Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) Federal Reference and Equivalent
Methods. In deed as technology advances, new analyzers will enter the market which may be suitable for use
within the provincial jurisdiction of B.C. It is highly recommended, however, that you consult with the B.C.
Ministry of Environment and Climate Change Strategy (ENV) if you intend to deploy a H2S/TRS analyzers not
listed above.



                          British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                             Page 55 of 206
Regardless of the equipment deployed all analyzers should meet the specifications described within this
document.

7. Measurement Range and Sensitivity
Typical commercially available H2S/TRS analyzers operating in B.C. are configured to a 0 ppb - 200 ppb
operating range. Detection limits are determined by instrument type but are generally specified at 0.5 ppb.
8. Site Requirements
Monitoring site specifications should be developed to ensure that the data generated from the site satisfies
the requirements of intended or established monitoring objectives. It is recommended that monitoring site
requirements be established in consultation with the B.C. ENV to ensure that siting requirements are
commensurate with monitoring objectives.

As a preliminary guideline site selection should consider and address: monitoring objectives,
representativeness of the region, interference from the surrounding area, and zone type of the monitoring
location (residential, commercial, industrial).

Refer to Section 2 of Part B1 of the Field Sampling Manual for further information on site selection method.
9. Installation Requirements
Follow analyzer specific installation requirements provided in the manufacturer’s manual. The installation
should also conform to the following:
    The monitoring station’s sampling inlet and manifold shall meet the requirements of the most recent
     version of the National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Program’s Monitoring and Quality
     Assurance/Quality Control Guidelines Section 8.2 and Section 8.3.
    All connection tubing, connectors and fittings from the manifold to the analyzer inlet must be made of
     Teflon or a material of equivalent chemical inertness.
    A Teflon particulate filter capable of removing at least 99% of 1 µm diameter and larger particles must
     be placed in the sampling line upstream of the analyzer, unless the analyzer is equipped with a similar
     internal filter. The filter holder should be constructed of an inert material (e.g. Teflon, stainless steel).
    A data acquisition system (data logger) should be connected to the analyzer to record or download the
     measurement data from the analyzer. If an analog data logger is used, it must be set to match the
     voltage range of the analyzer, typically at 1 V or 10 V full scale. It must be ensured that the analog
     output matches the digital output displayed on the analyzer. The data logger must also record and
     monitor any alarm conditions of the analyzer.
    The analyzer must be placed in a temperature controlled, temperature stable enclosure. The
     enclosure’s temperature must be maintained at a range of 20 °C to 30 °C.
    Remove any sources of solvents and volatile hydrocarbons from the vicinity of the station.




                           British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                              Page 56 of 206
10. Operational Requirements
The following activities should be performed by the operator of a continuous automated H2S/TRS analyzer.


          Action                     Time/Frequency                          Description             Record Keeping

                                                                    As per manufacturers
                                                                     operation manual.                Record in
  Analyzer Range Set Up      After installation
                                                                     Monitoring range should be        logbook
                                                                     0 ppb to 200 ppb
                             After installation (or relocation)
                              following a 24 h warm up
                              period;
                             After analyzer
                              repairs/maintenance that may
                              affect performance of the
                              instrument;
                             When zero check exceeds ± 1.0
                              ppb;
                             When span drift ≥, ± 10% of
                              reference value;                                                        Record in
  Multipoint Verification                                           As per Section 11 of this SOP
                             For new analyzers, after the                                             logbook
                              first 3 months of operation;
                             Bi-annually if span checks are
                              conducted daily – or when any
                              threshold above is reached
                              (whichever happens first);
                             Quarterly if span checks are
                              conducted less than daily – or
                              when any threshold above is
                              reached (whichever happens
                              first).
      Zero and Span          Daily preferred, weekly               As per manufacturers
       Verification           minimum                                operation manual
    Verify Operational                                              As per manufacturers             Record in
                             Each monitor station visit
       Parameters                                                    operation manual                  logbook
                             Inspect monthly, change as            As per manufacturers
    Inlet Filter Change
                              required                               operation manual
                             As recommended by                     As per manufacturers             Record in
  Analyzer Maintenance
                              manufacturer or as required            operation manual                  logbook
                                                                    Where necessary replace
  Sample Path Inspection                                             with new lines, tighten loose    Record in
                             Monthly
    (Probe to Analyzer)                                              connections, clean manifold       logbook
                                                                     if required

11. Zero and Span Checks
Zero and span checks are required to verify the analyzers performance between calibrations. These checks
should be performed in accordance with Section 6 of Part B1 of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual and the
manufacturer’s manual.
12. Calibration
Calibration should be performed in accordance with Section 6 of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual and the
manufacturer’s manual.
13. References




                            British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                    Page 57 of 206
Environment Canada 2004. NAPS Network Quality Assurance and Quality Control Guidelines. EC
Environmental Protection Service Environmental Technology Advancement Directorate Analysis and Air
Quality Division. Report No. AAQD 2004-1.

Alberta Environment 2011. Standard Operating Procedure for Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S) and Total Reduced
Sulphur (TRS) Detectors. AENV Air Monitoring and Audit Centre.

Teledyne 2016. User Manual – Model T101 UV Fluorescence H2S Analyzer.

Teledyne 2012. User Manual – Model T102 Total Reduced Sulfur Analyzer with Model 501 TRS Thermal
Converter.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 2015. Model 450i Instruction Manual Pulsed Fluorescence SO2-H2S-CS Analyzer.

United States (US) Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 2013. QA handbook for Air Pollution Measurement
Systems Volume II Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program. US EPA Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards Air Quality Assessment Division.

Revision History: 0.0 (New document)

Approval




                         British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                          Page 58 of 206
         Monitoring Parameter:                      Standard Operating Procedure for the
    Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)                      Continuous Measurement of Ambient NOx

      Revision No: Original                                Reference No: SOP-03
   Revision Date: 05 May, 2020               Parent Document: Part B1 – B.C. Field Sampling Manual

1. Introduction and Scope
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) provides operating guidelines and instructions for the continuous
ambient monitoring of Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) including Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2), within the provincial
jurisdiction of British Columbia (B.C.).

This SOP forms part of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual (BCFSM). Part B - Air and Air Emissions Testing, of the
BCFSM provides additional information on Air Quality Monitoring that must be used in conjunction with the
information provided in this SOP. Installation and maintenance of NOx analyzers within the provincial
jurisdiction of B.C. should be carried out with consideration to Part B of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual, the
analyzer manufacturer’s manual, and this document.
2. Document Control
This Standard Operating Procedure is a controlled document. Document control provides a measure of
assurance that the specifications and guidance it provides are based on current information that has been
scrutinized by a qualified reviewer/s. Controlled documents are reviewed within a five year life cycle. Please
ensure that the revision date listed in the header of this document does not exceed five years.
This SOP and the B.C. Field Sampling Manual are available at: www2.gov.bc.ca.
3. Principle of the Measurement Method
Chemiluminescence

The principle detection and quantification method deployed for ambient concentrations of NO2 is
chemiluminescence. Chemiluminescence uses a photomultiplier tube to measure the light emitted by the
chemical reaction of nitric oxide (NO) and ozone (O3).

                                      𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 + 𝑂𝑂3 → 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁2 + 𝑂𝑂2 + ℎ𝑣𝑣

The concentration of NO2 in an air sample is determined by two measurement processes. The first process
measures the amount of NO in ambient air. The second process measures the amount of NOX in ambient air.
The NO2 concentration is then calculated as the difference between these two measurements.

In the first process, NO concentration is determined by passing an ambient air sample through an Ozone (O3)
rich reaction chamber. Ozone is continuously generated within the analyzer at a concentration that far
exceeds that of ambient NO levels. When exposed to O3, NO is readily oxidized to NO2 in a 1:1 relationship.
As excited NO2 molecules decay to a lower energy state they release infrared light at an intensity that is
linearly proportional to the amount of NO present. The light emitted during this chemical reaction is
measured using a photomultiplier tube. The infrared light measurement is used to determine the
concentration of NO.

In the second process, the concentration of NOX is determined by passing the ambient air sample through a
molybdenum catalysis oven that is heated to approximately 325°C which converts NOx to NO. A valve then
directs the sample to the reaction chamber used in the first process, where total NOx is measured as NO.




                           British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                            Page 59 of 206
Atmospheric concentrations of NOx species, other than NO2 and NO, are typically so low that they are
considered negligible and as such the concentration of NO2 is determined as the difference between
concentrations of NO and NOX.

                         𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁2 = 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑋𝑋 (𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁2 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁) − 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁

A more detailed discussion on the NO2 measurement principle is typically provided within the manufacturer’s
operation manual.
4. Interferences

Nitrogen Based Compounds
The presence of nitrogen based compounds in ambient air may interfere with NOx measurement. These
compounds are known to erroneously increase analyzer response as they can undergo chemical reaction
within the catalysis oven or reaction chamber resulting in an inaccurate analyzer response. Some of the
compounds known to interfere with NO2 measurement include, H2O, ammonia (NH3) and oxides of sulphur
(SOx). If high concentrations of NH3 are present then steps must be taken to remove this contaminant from
the sample stream.

H2O and CO2
Water and high levels of carbon dioxide (>0.5%) have the potential to interfere with the measurement of
Oxides of Nitrogen. Analyzers situated in areas of high humidity may require a gas dryer to reduce moisture.
The gas dryer should be positioned in the sample line upstream of the analyzer.

Particulate Matter
Particulate matter in ambient air is known to reduce analyzer response by absorbing and scattering light.
Interference by particulate matter can be minimized by installing a particle filter at the sample inlet (for
analyzers that do not have an internal filter). The particle filter must have a pore size of 5 µm in diameter
and be made of an inert material such as Teflon.
5. Precision and Accuracy
Air contaminant concentration measurements are affected by an instrument’s precision and accuracy. The
precision of a measurement is generally considered to be the ‘repeatability of the measurement’. This can
be confirmed through zero and span checks, and calibrations.

The accuracy of the sensor is generally considered to be a measure of the ‘deviation from true’. The accuracy
of the sensor can be checked by performing analyzer calibrations against a certified standard gas mixture
(see sections 10 and 11). This is typically an NO standard converted to NO2 on site within an ozone generator-
equiped calibrator. Accuracy can also be evaluated through periodic span checks.
6. Recommended Equipment and Apparatus
The following are common commercially available NO2 analyzers suitable for use within the jurisdiction of
B.C.:

       Thermo Environmental Instruments (TEI) Models 42, 42C, & 42i NOX
       Teledyne API T200
       Serinus 40

This list does not necessarily exclude the use of other commercially available NOx analyzers, and analyzers
recognized by United States (US) Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) Federal Reference and Equivalent
Methods. Indeed as technology advances, new analyzers will enter the market which may be suitable for use
within the provincial jurisdiction of B.C. It is highly recommended however that you consult with the B.C.



                          British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                         Page 60 of 206
Ministry of Environment and Climate Change Strategy (ENV) if you intend to deploy NO2 analyzers not listed
above. Regardless of the equipment deployed all analyzers should meet the specifications described within
this document.
7. Measurement Range and Sensitivity
Typical commercially available NOx and NO2 analyzers operating in B.C. are configured to a 0 ppb - 500 ppb
operating range, with a 0 to 300 ppb calibration range. Detection limits are determined by instrument type,
but are generally around 0.4 ppb.
8. Site Requirements
Monitoring site specifications should be developed to ensure that the data generated from the site satisfies
the requirements of intended or established monitoring objectives. It is recommended that monitoring site
requirements be established in consultation with ENV to ensure that siting requirements are commensurate
with monitoring objectives.

As a preliminary guideline site selection should consider and address: monitoring objectives,
representativeness of the region, interference from the surrounding area, and zone type (residential,
commercial, industrial) of the monitoring location.

Refer to Section 2 of Part B1 of the Field Sampling Manual for further information on site selection.
9. Installation Requirements
Follow analyzer specific installation requirements provided in the analyzer manufacturer’s manual.
Installation should also conform to the following:
        The monitoring station’s sampling inlet and manifold shall meet the requirements of the most recent
         version of the National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Program’s Monitoring and Quality
         Assurance/Quality Control Guidelines Section 8.2 and Section 8.3.
        The ¼ inch diameter connection tubing from the manifold to the analyzer inlet must be made of
         Teflon or equivalent material for chemical inertness.
        A Teflon particulate filter meeting the instrument manufacturer’s pore-size specifications unless the
         analyzer is equipped with a similar internal filter. The filter holder should be constructed of an inert
         material (e.g. Teflon, stainless steel).
        To reduce the risk of moisture entering the analyzer it is recommended that horizontally mounted
         manifolds be oriented with the ports facing upwards (with the exception of manifolds such as the
         “ARB style” which must be mounted vertically); ensure any water traps are oriented vertically.
        A data acquisition system (data logger) should be connected to the analyzer to record or download
         the measurement data from the analyzer. If an analog data logger is used, it must be set to match
         the voltage range of the analyzer, typically at 1 V or 10 V full scale. It must be ensured that the analog
         output matches the digital output displayed on the analyzer. The data logger must also record and
         monitor any alarm conditions of the analyzer.
        The analyzer must be placed in a temperature controlled, temperature stable enclosure. The
         enclosure’s temperature must be maintained between 20 °C and 30 °C.
        Remove any sources of solvents and volatile hydrocarbons from the vicinity of the station.
        A permeation dryer should be placed in the sampling line upstream of the analyzer.
10. Operational Requirements

The following activities should be performed by the operator of a continuous automated NOx analyzer.
          Action                         Time/Frequency                     Description         Record Keeping
                                                                        Monitoring range
  Analyzer Range Set Up  After installation                             should be 0 ppb to   Record in logbook
                                                                         500 ppb.




                           British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                Page 61 of 206
                           After installation (or relocation)
                            following a 24 h to 72 h warm up
                            period;
                           After analyzer repairs/maintenance
                            that may have affected the
                            performance of the instrument;
                           When zero check exceeds ± 2.0 ppb;
                           When span drift is ≥, ± 10% of
                            reference value;                        As per Section 6 of
Multipoint Verification    For new analyzers, after the first 3     Part B1 of the         Record in logbook
                            months of operation;                     BCFSM.
                           Bi-annually if span checks are
                            conducted daily – or when any
                            threshold above is reached
                            (whichever happens first);
                           Quarterly if span checks are
                            conducted less than daily – or when
                            any threshold above is reached
                            (whichever happens first).
                                                                    As per
    Zero and Span
                           Daily preferred, weekly minimum          manufacturers
     Verification
                                                                     operation manual
                                                                    As per
  Verify Operational
                           Each monitor station visit               manufacturers
     Parameters
                                                                     operation manual
                                                                    As per
                                                                     manufacturers          Record in logbook
                                                                     operation manual.
                                                                     A filter change can
  Inlet Filter Change      Inspect monthly, change as required      affect flow and
                                                                     pressure so a
                                                                     verification or full
                                                                     calibration is
                                                                     required.
                                                                    As per
                           As recommended by manufacturer or
Analyzer Maintenance                                                 manufacturers          Record in logbook
                            as required
                                                                     operation manual
                                                                    Where necessary
                                                                     replace with new
                                                                     lines, tighten loose
                                                                     connections, clean
                                                                     manifold if required.
                                                                     Flow and pressure
Sample Path Inspection                                               may significantly
                           Monthly                                                         Record in logbook
  (Probe to Analyzer)                                                affect the analyzer
                                                                     response for NO2
                                                                     analyzers. Any
                                                                     alteration to the
                                                                     sample pathway
                                                                     should be
                                                                     accompanied by




                          British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                              Page 62 of 206
                                                                    verification or full
                                                                    calibration.


11. Zero and Span Checks
Zero and span checks are required to verify analyzer performance between calibrations. These checks should
be performed in accordance with Section 6 of Part B1 of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual.
12. Calibration
Calibration should be performed in accordance with Section 6 of Part B1 of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual
and the manufacturer’s manual. Certain specifics of the NOx/NO2 analyzer calibration are as follows:

Calibrations of NO-NOx-NO2 analyzers are unique when compared to other analyzer types. As both NOx and
NO are measured, a 2-stage calibration is required. The first stage is typical of other analyzer types and
involves serial dilution of an NO standard to calibrate and verify analyzer NO/NOx response. Following this,
NOx-NO2 response is calibrated/verified by Gas Phase Titration (GPT) for two points. This involves titrating
the NO standard used in the first stage with a known concentration of ozone. The introduced ozone converts
the equivalent amount of NO into NO2, which is converted back into NO by the analyzer’s converter oven
and read as NOx. As the NO channel was calibrated and verified in the first stage, the analyzer’s response to
the remaining NO, not converted by ozone, can be accepted as accurate. Comparison of the introduced
ozone concentration with the analyzer’s NOx and NO response therefore allows for a determination of
converter efficiency, and calibration of the NOx-NO2 channel.

Acceptance criteria for gas phase titration is ≥ 95% converter efficiency at each point.
13. References
Alberta Environment (AENV) 2011. Standard Operating Procedure for Measurement of Oxides of Nitrogen in
by Chemiluminescence. AENV Air Monitoring and Audit Centre.

AENV 2011. Standard Operating Procedure for Dilution Calibrations. AENV Air Monitoring and Audit Centre.

Environment Canada (EC) 2010. Continuous Measurement of Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) in Ambient Air by
Chemiluminescence. ECCC National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Operations Unit.

EC 2004. NAPS Network Quality Assurance and Quality Control Guidelines. EC Environmental Protection
Service Environmental Technology Advancement Directorate Analysis and Air Quality Division. Report No.
AAQD 2004-1.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 2015. Model 42i Instruction Manual Chemiluminescence NO-NO2-NOX Analyzer.

United States (US) Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 2013. QA handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems Volume II Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program. US EPA Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards Air Quality Assessment Division.

Revision History: 0.0 (New document)

Approval




                          British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                            Page 63 of 206
       Monitoring Parameter:                      Standard Operating Procedure for the
          Ozone (O3)                             Continuous Measurement of Ambient O3

     Revision No: Original                                Reference No: SOP-04
  Revision Date: 05 May, 2020               Parent Document: Part B1 – B.C. Field Sampling Manual

1. Introduction and Scope
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) provides operating guidelines and instructions for the continuous
ambient monitoring of Ozone (O3) within the jurisdiction of British Columbia (B.C.).

This SOP forms part of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual (BCFSM). Part B - Air and Air Emissions Testing, of the
BCFSM provides additional information on Air Quality Monitoring that must be used in conjunction with the
information provided in this SOP. Installation and maintenance of an O3 analyzer within the provincial
jurisdiction of B.C. must be carried out with consideration to Part B of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual, the
analyzer manufacturer’s manual, and this document.
2. Document Control
This Standard Operating Procedure is a controlled document. Document control provides a measure of
assurance that the specifications and guidance it provides are based on current information that has been
scrutinized by a qualified reviewer/s. Controlled documents are reviewed within a five year life cycle. Please
ensure that the revision date listed in the header of this document does not exceed five years.

This SOP and the B.C. Field Sampling Manual are available at: www2.gov.bc.ca.
3. Principle of the Method
Selective Absorption of Ultraviolet (UV) Photometry

The principle detection and quantification method deployed for ambient concentrations of Ozone (O3) is
selective UV absorption (at a wavelength of 254 nm) by O3. The concentration of O3 is determined using two
steps of UV photometry, and the application of the Beer-Lambert Law.

In the first step ozone is removed from the sample stream as it passes through an O3 scrubber. The intensity
of the UV rays in the ozone free environment is measured by the analyzer’s stabilized photo detector to
provide a reference value. In the second step, the sample air bypasses the O3 scrubber. Ozone present in
the sample air absorbs UV in the 254 nm range and this reduction in UV rays is represented in the UV
measurement provided by the photo detector. The Beer-Lambert Law shows that UV light absorption is
proportional to the ray’s travel path, and the concentration of O3. Using this relationship the concentration
of ozone in the air sample can be determined.

A more detailed discussion on the O3 measurement principle is typically provided within the manufacturer’s
operation manual.
4. Interferences

NO2, SO2, and VOCs
Nitrogen dioxide (NO2), sulphur dioxide (SO2), and volatile organic compounds (VOCs) are known to
influence O3 measurement, however, in a typical urban environment the interference effect is reported to
be negligible.

H2O, NO, Hg, and PAHs



                           British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                            Page 64 of 206
Other compounds that affect the measurement of O3 are water (H2O), Nitric Oxide (NO), and Polycyclic
Aromatic Hydrocarbons (PAHs). Mercury vapour is a strong absorber of UV radiation at the 254 nm range
and therefore O3 cannot be measured using this method in the presence of mercury vapour. Similarly, PAHs
are a strong absorber of UV radiation at the 254 nm range, and at high concentrations, PAHs may interfere
with the measurement of O3.

Particulate Matter
The presence of particulate matter in an air sample is known to interfere with the measurement of Ozone.
Particulate matter if present will absorb and scatter UV radiation. This can be minimized by installing a
particle filter at the sample inlet (for analyzers that do not have an internal filter).
5. Precision and Accuracy
Air contaminant concentration measurements are affected by an instrument’s precision and accuracy.

The precision of a measurement is generally considered to be the ‘repeatability of the measurement’. This
can be confirmed through zero and span checks, and multipoint verifications.

The accuracy of the sensor is generally considered a measure of the ‘deviation from true’. The accuracy of
the sensor can be checked by performing a verification check against a certified reference standard
photometer (see section 10 and 11). Accuracy can also be confirmed through span checks and calibrations.
6. Recommended Equipment and Apparatus
The following are commercially available O3 analyzers suitable for use within the provincial jurisdiction of
B.C.:

       Thermo Environmental Instruments (TEI) Models 49, 49C, 49i
       Serinus 10
       Teledyne API T400

This list does not necessarily exclude other commercially available O3 analyzers, and analyzers recognized
by the United States (US) Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) Federal Reference and Equivalent
Methods. In deed as technology advances, new analyzers will enter the market which may be suitable for
use within the provincial jurisdiction of B.C. It is highly recommended however that you consult with the
B.C. Ministry of Environment and Climate Change Strategy (ENV) if you intend to deploy O3 analyzers not
listed above. Regardless of the equipment deployed all analyzers should meet the specifications described
within this document.
7. Measurement Range and Sensitivity
Typical commercially available O3 analyzers can operate at a user selectable range of 0 ppb to 1000 ppb; for
B.C. ENV monitoring purposes analyzers should be set to a range of 0 ppb to 500 ppb. Detection limits are
determined by instrument type but are generally around 1 ppb.

Multipoint verifications and calibration should be conducted across a range of 2 ppb to 200 ppb.
8. Site Requirements
Monitoring site specifications should be developed to ensure that the data generated from the site
satisfies the requirements of intended or established monitoring objectives. It is recommended
that monitoring site requirements be established in consultation with the B.C. ENV to ensure that
siting requirements are commensurate with monitoring objectives.




                          British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                            Page 65 of 206
As a preliminary guideline site selection should consider and address: monitoring objectives,
representativeness of the region, interference from the surrounding area, and monitoring location
zone type (residential, commercial, industrial).

Refer to Section 2 of Part B1 of the Field Sampling Manual for further information on site selection.
9. Installation Requirements
Follow analyzer specific installation requirements provided in the analyzer manufacturer’s manual. The
installation should also conform to the following:
        The monitoring station’s sampling inlet and manifold shall meet the requirements of the most
         recent version of the National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Program’s Monitoring and Quality
         Assurance/Quality Control Guidelines Section 8.2 and Section 8.3.
        The ¼ inch diameter connection tubing from the manifold to the analyzer inlet must be made of
         Teflon or equivalent material for chemical inertness.
        All connectors and fittings in the sampling systems must be Teflon or stainless steel (connections
         should be Teflon-to-Teflon or steel-to-steel – no mixing of fittings at any connection point).
        A Teflon particulate filter meeting the instrument manufacturer’s pore-size specifications unless the
         analyzer is equipped with a similar internal filter. The filter holder must be constructed of an inert
         material (e.g. Teflon, stainless steel).
        A data acquisition system (DAS) should be connected to the analyzer to record or download the
         measurement data from the analyzer. If an analog data logger is used, it must be set to match the
         voltage range of the analyzer, typically at 1 V or 10 V full scale. It must be ensured that the analog
         output matches the digital output displayed on the analyzer. The data logger must also record and
         monitor any alarm conditions of the analyzer.
        The analyzer must be placed in a temperature controlled, temperature stable enclosure. The
         enclosures temperature must be maintained between 20 °C to 30 °C.
        Remove any sources of solvents and volatile hydrocarbons from the vicinity of the station.
10. Operational Requirements
The following activities should be performed by the operator of a continuous automated O3 analyzer.

          Action                         Time/Frequency                          Description            Record
                                                                            As per manufacturers
                                                                                                        K   i
                                                                             operation manual.
                                                                                                     Record in
  Analyzer Range Set Up      After installation                             Monitoring range
                                                                                                      logbook
                                                                             should be 0 ppb to
                                                                             1000 ppb
                             After installation (or relocation) after a
                              24 h to 72 h warm up period;
                             After analyzer repairs/maintenance
                              that may affect performance of the
                              instrument;
                             When zero check exceeds ± 2.0 ppb;
                             When span drift is ≥, ± 10% of
                              reference value;                         As per Section 11 of         Record in
  Multipoint Verification
                             For new analyzers, after the first 3      this SOP                      logbook
                              months of operation
                             Bi-annually if span checks are
                              conducted daily – or when any
                              threshold above is reached (whichever
                              happens first);
                             Quarterly if span checks are conducted
                              less than daily – or when any threshold



                            British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                  Page 66 of 206
                           above is reached (whichever happens
                           first).
 Zero and Span                                                   As per manufacturers
                          Daily preferred, weekly minimum
  Verification                                                     operation manual
 Verify Operational                                              As per manufacturers       Record in
                          Each station visit
  Parameters                                                       operation manual            logbook
                                                                  As per manufacturers
 Inlet Filter Change     Inspect monthly, change as required
                                                                   operation manual
                          As recommended by manufacturer or      As per manufacturers       Record in
 Analyzer Maintenance
                           as required                             operation manual            logbook
                                                                  Where necessary
 Sample Path                                                      replace with new lines,
                                                                                              Record in
  Inspection (Manifold    Monthly                                 tighten loose
                                                                                               logbook
  to Analyzer)                                                     connections, clean
                                                                   manifold if required

11. Zero and Span Checks
Zero and span checks are required to verify the analyzers performance between calibrations. These checks
should be performed in accordance with Section 6 of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual and the manufacturer’s
manual.
12. Multi-Point Verification and Calibration
Calibration should be performed in accordance with Section 6 of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual and the
manufacturer’s manual.
13. References

National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Program. Monitoring and Quality Assurance/Quality Control
Guidelines.

Alberta Environment (AENV) 2011. Standard Operating Procedure for Measurement of Ozone in Ambient Air
by Ultraviolet (UV) Photometry. AENV Air Monitoring and Audit Centre.

Environment Canada (EC) 2010. Continuous Measurement of Ozone in Ambient Air by Ultraviolet (UV)
Photometry. EC National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Operations Unit.

EC 2004. NAPS Network Quality Assurance and Quality Control Guidelines. EC Environmental Protection
Service Environmental Technology Advancement Directorate Analysis and Air Quality Division. Report No.
AAQD 2004-1.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 2011. Model 49i Instruction Manual UV Photometric O3 Analyzer.

United States (US) Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 2013. QA handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems Volume II Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program. US EPA Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards Air Quality Assessment Division.

Revision History: 0.0 (New document)

Approval




                         British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                              Page 67 of 206
                                                    Standard Operating Procedure for the
      Monitoring Parameter:
  Particulate Matter (PM)                         Continuous Measurement of Ambient PM
                                                      using a Beta Attenuation Monitor
    Revision No: Original                                  Reference No: SOP-05a
 Revision Date: 05 May, 2020                 Parent Document: Part B1 – B.C. Field Sampling Manual

1. Introduction and Scope
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) provides operating guidelines and instructions for the continuous
ambient monitoring of Particulate Matter (PM) within the provincial jurisdiction of British Columbia (B.C.).

These guidelines and instructions have been written specifically for particulate matter that is 10 µm or less
in aerodynamic diameter (PM10) and particulate matter that is 2.5 µm or less in aerodynamic diameter
(PM2.5). This SOP describes particulate matter measurements using Beta Attenuation Monitors (BAM).
Operating guidelines and instructions for particulate matter measurements using other analytical methods
are provided in SOPs 5b through 5e.

This SOP forms part of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual (BCFSM). Part B - Air and Air Emissions Testing, of the
BCFSM provides additional information on Air Quality Monitoring that must be used in conjunction with the
information provided in this SOP. Installation and maintenance of a BAM PM analyzer within the provincial
jurisdiction of B.C. should be carried out with consideration to Part B of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual, the
analyzer manufacturer’s manual, and this document.
2. Document Control
This Standard Operating Procedure is a controlled document. Document control provides a measure of
assurance that the specifications and guidance it provides are based on current information that has been
scrutinized by a qualified reviewer/s. Controlled documents are reviewed within a five year life cycle. Please
ensure that the revision date listed in the header of this document does not exceed five years.

This SOP and the B.C. Field Sampling Manual are available at: www2.gov.bc.ca.
3. Principle of the Measurement Method
Beta Attenuation Monitor

The principle detection and quantification method deployed by Beta Attenuation Monitors (BAM) is beta
radiation attenuation. Monitors are set to a particulate size fraction of interest, typically 10 µm (PM10) or
2.5 µm (PM2.5), by attaching a size-selective inlet to the analyzer. Regardless of inlet size ambient air is drawn
through the analyzer at a rate of 16.7 litres per minute (l min-1).

Met One BAM-1020 analyzers use a stepwise monitoring cycle: a radioactive source within the analyzer
emits beta radiation that passes through a glass fibre sample tape. The beta radiation is emitted at a
constant rate and measured by a scintillation detector. At the beginning of each sample cycle, the beta rays
pass through an unexposed glass fibre filter tape to determine background attenuation levels. During the
sampling period, air is drawn into the analyzer, where the glass fibre tape is exposed to particulate matter
that may be present in the air sample. Particulate matter present on the glass fibre tape attenuates the beta
rays. Beta ray attenuation is proportional to the mass of particulate matter which is inversely reported by
the scintillation counter. The mass of particulate matter measured is combined with the flow rate calculated
during the sampling period, to produce an ambient mass concentration.




                              British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                             Page 68 of 206
Instrumentation such as the Thermo 5014i do not deploy a stepwise monitoring cycle however the principle
is the same.

A more detailed description of the PM measurement principle is typically provided within the
manufacturer’s operation manual.
4. Interferences
Particulate matter measurements by BAM instruments can be interfered with by the presence of moisture, extremely cold
temperatures, inlet and sample tube loss, and by system leaks.

Moisture
Conditions in which the relative humidity (RH) exceeds 45% may result in an accumulation of water vapour
on the filter tape. This results in a mismeasurement of PM as the water vapour attenuates beta rays. This
interference is minimized by using an internal RH probe to measure sample stream humidity and an inlet
heater to control the relative humidity (RH Threshold 35% and 45%). RH set-points must be set as per USEPA
FEM requirements which are usually stipulated in the instrument manual.

For instruments not referenced refer to instrument manuals, and consult with the Ministry to confirm
required thresholds.

Temperature
Instruments have an absolute low-temperature limit which must be considered prior to acquisition and
installation. This can be variable depending on the ambient sensor selected (e.g., BAM-1020 has an optional
lower temperature sensor). Ensure the instrument selected can operate within the full range of the site’s
weather conditions.

Inlet and Sample Tube Loss
The particle size-selective inlet has a stable cut-point as long as it is routinely serviced to minimize inlet
surface particle accumulation. Poor maintenance of the inlet may result in a shift of the particle size cut-off,
or undesired particle re-entrainment. Excessive particulate build up on the inner walls of the sample tubing
can affect PM concentration measurements. Scheduled preventive maintenance routines will significantly
mitigate the potential for this type of interference.

Flow tolerance
The size selective inlets are designed to operate at an airflow rate of 16.67 l min-1 and require this flow rate
to prevent particulate matter that exceeds the inlet cut size from entering the sample stream. Airflow must
be maintained within ± 4% of 16.67 l min-1 to ensure only the desired particulate (e.g. PM2.5) is being
measured.

System Leaks
Air leaks in the sampling system can result in reduced PM measurement. The PM analyzer must pass a leak
check to produce valid data. Leak check verifications must reference thresholds set by the instrument
manufacturer.

For instruments not referenced refer to instrument manuals, and consult the Ministry to confirm required
thresholds.
5. Precision and Accuracy
Air contaminant concentration measurements are affected by an instrument’s precision and accuracy.




                            British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                 Page 69 of 206
The precision of a measurement is generally considered to be the ‘repeatability of the measurement’.
Thermo Scientific reports the precision of the 5014i instrument to be ± 2.0 µg/m3 for measurements less
than 80 µg/m3, and 4 µg/m3 to 5 µg/m3 for measurements greater than 80 µg/m3. Met One Instruments
report the accuracy and precision of their BAM instruments to be consistent with U.S. EPA requirements for
Class III PM2.5 and PM10 measurement.

The accuracy of the sensor is generally considered to be a measure of the ‘deviation from true’. Typical
accuracy’s are reported by manufacturers in the range of ±5 % to ± 10%.
6. Recommended Equipment and Apparatus
The following instruments are commercially available and used within the Ministry’s network:

       Met One BAM-1020 with Smart Heater System
       Thermo Scientific 5014i

This list does not exclude other commercially available PM analyzers, and analyzers recognized by United
States (US) Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) Federal Reference and Equivalent Methods. Indeed as
technology advances, new analyzers will enter the market which may be suitable for use within the
provincial jurisdiction of B.C. It is recommended however that you consult with the B.C. Ministry of
Environment and Climate Change Strategy (ENV) if you intend to deploy analyzers not listed above.
Regardless of the equipment deployed all analyzers should meet the specifications described within this
document.
7. Measurement Range and Sensitivity
Instruments typically have a measurement range of 0 mg/m³ to 10 mg/m³. Some manufactures report
detection limits that are less than less than 4 µg/m³ over a one hour period or less than 1 µg/m³ over a 24
hour period. PM2.5 analyzers/monitors deployed within the provincial jurisdiction of B.C. must have the
sample range set at 0 – 1000 ug/m3 to capture extreme particulate events (e.g., wildfire smoke).
8. Site Requirements
Monitoring site specifications should be developed to ensure that the data generated from the site satisfies
the requirements of intended or established monitoring objectives. It is recommended that monitoring site
requirements be established in consultation with ENV to ensure that siting requirements are commensurate
with monitoring objectives.

As a preliminary guideline site selection should consider and address: monitoring objectives,
representativeness of the region, interference from the surrounding area, zone type (residential,
commercial, industrial) of the monitoring location and probe siting requirements that are outlined in Section
8.

Refer to Section 2 of Part B1 of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual for further information on site selection
method.




                          British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                             Page 70 of 206
9. Installation Requirements
Follow analyzer specific installation requirements discussed in the analyzer manufacturer’s manual. The
installation should also conform to the following:
        The monitoring station’s sampling inlet and manifold shall meet the requirements of the most
         recent version of the National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Program’s Monitoring and Quality
         Assurance/Quality Control Guidelines Section 8.2 and Section 8.3.
        A data acquisition system (DAS) should be connected to the analyzer to record or download the
         measurement data from the analyzer. The DAS must also record and monitor any alarm conditions
         of the analyzer.
        The analyzer must be placed in a weather resistant enclosure that is vented, heated and cooled to
         maintain a stable temperature preferably in the range of 20°C to 30°C but must ultimately be
         capable of maintaining a temperature range of 4 °C to 50 °C (5014i Instrument spec); 0 °C to 50 °C
         (BAM1020). An enclosure’s temperature should be as consistent as possible, and typically should
         not deviate by more than 2 °C over a one hour period.
        At locations where a straight intake from the sample inlet point to the analyzer is not possible,
         locating the analyzer in an outdoor enclosure should be considered. The outdoor enclosure should
         be temperature controlled.
        The appropriate size fraction separator should be installed onto the inlet tube for PM10 or PM2.5.
        A temperature controller and a temperature sensor system must be installed on the inlet.
        Adequate clearance within the shelter must be provided to accommodate a sample heater.
        The portion of the inlet tube within a shelter or building should be adequately insulated to avoid
         condensation build up within the sampling tube.
        The inlet probe configuration should confirm to the following criteria:

                    Inlet Probe Requirement                                      Condition
                    Inlet height above ground                                   2 m to 15 m
                 Distance from support structure                                   >2m
                                                            > 20 m or twice the height of trees above the inlet
                       Distance from trees
                                                                      elevation, whichever is greater
               Distance from any air flow obstacles            twice the height of obstacles above the inlet
                          (i.e., buildings)                           elevation, whichever is greater
                                                            Unrestricted in at least 3 of the 4 wind quadrants
                       Airflow restrictions
                                                                                (N, S, E, W)
                                                              Local source influences must be considered in
                     Local source influences
                                                                     locating the site for ambient PM
10. Operational Requirements
The following activities should be performed by the operator of a PM analyzer:
           Action                 Time/Frequency                     Description                       Record Keeping
                                                       • RH set point no higher than 35%

                                                         (BAM-1020)
   Analyzer Operational
                                                       • RH control set to ON                      •   Record in
     Parameter Set Up         • At installation
                                                       • Sample range set to 0 – 1000 ug/m             logbook
                                                                                               3

                                                       • Sample offset set to -0.005 mg/m
                                                                                             3

                                                       • Flowrate 16.7 l min-1

     Verify Operational                                 Check operation of instrument, record      •   Record in
                              • Weekly
         Parameters                                             operating parameters                   logbook
                               Monthly                • As per manufacturers operation

                               Before calibration       manual.                                   •   Record in
         Leak Check
                               Before and after       • BAM 1020 = less than 1.5 l min
                                                                                          -1
                                                                                                       logbook
                                 nozzle cleaning       • 5041i = less than    0.42 l min -1




                            British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                      Page 71 of 206
                                After each filter tape
                                 change out
         Calibration
  (ambient temperature,
     pressure sensors,                                                                            •   Record in
                             •   Bi-annually              •   As per Section 12 of this SOP
      internal RH and                                                                                 logbook
   temperature sensors,
      flow controller)
                                                          • As per manufacturers operation
                             •   Inspect monthly,           manual.
                                                                                                  •   Record in
  Sample Filter Change           change as required       • Sites with heavy PM concentrations
                                                                                                      logbook
                                 (typically 60 days)        may need more frequent filter
                                                            change.
                             •   After each filter tape   • As per manufacturers operation        •   Record in
  Self-test – (BAM 1020)
                                 change                     manual                                    logbook
                                                          • Compare DAS concentration value

                                                            with the concentration displayed on   •   Record in
  Logged Concentration       •   Weekly
                                                            the analyzer. The values should be        logbook
                                                            within 1 µg/m³
 Clean nozzle and nozzle                                  • As per manufacturers operation        •   Record in
                             •   Monthly
    area - (BAM 1020)                                       manual                                    logbook
                                                          • As per manufacturers operation

                                                            manual.                               •   Record in
       Flow Check            •   Quarterly
                                                          • Flow should be 16.67                      logbook
                                                          • l min-1 ± 5%.

  Re-zero Background -                                                                            •   Record in
                             •   Annually                 •   As per instrument manual
      (BAM 1020)                                                                                      logbook
                                                          • As per manufacturers operation
 Clean PM2.5 inlet cyclone
                                                            manual.                               •   Record in
 & PM10 inlet, Inspect O-    •   Bi-annually
                                                          • Sites with heavy PM concentrations        logbook
          Rings
                                                            may need more frequent cleaning.
  Clean air inlet system                                  • As per manufacturers operation        •   Record in
                             •   Annually
  Replace Inlet O-Rings                                     manual                                    logbook
                             • Service: as required
                             • Overhaul by pump
       Sample Pump             type:
                                                          •   As per manufacturers operation      •   Record in
 service/overhaul - (BAM     • Medo pump 9 to 12
                                                              manual                                  logbook
          1020)                months
                             • Gast pump 24

                               months
 Replace Muffler - (BAM                                   •   As per manufacturers operation      •   Record in
                             •   As required
         1020)                                                manual                                  logbook

                                                          •   Where necessary replace with new
 Sample Path Inspection                                                                           •   Record in
                             •   Monthly                      lines, tighten loose connections,
   (Probe to Analyzer)                                                                                logbook
                                                              clean manifold if required


11. Zero and Span Checks
This section is not applicable to this measurement method.
12. Calibration
Verification and calibration should be performed in accordance with the manufacturer’s manual.



                             British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                   Page 72 of 206
PM analyzer verifications generally require:

         Pre-verification leak check (as per manufacturer’s instructions)
         Verification of ambient temperature and pressure sensors
         Verification of internal RH and temperature sensors (if required by manufacturer)
         Verification of volumetric flow

                     Verifications must demonstrate compliance with the following acceptable tolerance levels:
                                  Leak                Flow           Temperature            Pressure                RH
        Instrument
                               Tolerance            Tolerance         Tolerance            Tolerance             Tolerance
        BAM 1020        < 1.5 l in-1                   4%               ± 2° C            ± 10 mmHg                10 %
        5014i             <0.42 l in-1 (±2.5%)         4%               ± 2° C            ± 10 mmHg                10 %

                                                       13. References

National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Program. Monitoring and Quality Assurance/Quality Control
Guidelines.

Alberta Environment (AENV) 2011. Standard Operating Procedure for Environmentally Protected Beta
Attenuation Monitor (E-BAM). AENV Air Monitoring and Audit Centre.

AENV 2011. Standard Operating Procedure for Dilution Calibrations. AENV Air Monitoring and Audit Centre.

Environment Canada (EC) 2010. Operating Procedures for BAM Samplers for PM2.5 Monitoring in the NAPS
Network. EC National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Operations Unit.

Met One 2016 BAM 1020 Particulate Monitor Operation Manual, BAM 1020-9800. Revision Q.

EC 2004. NAPS Network Quality Assurance and Quality Control Guidelines. EC Environmental Protection
Service Environmental Technology Advancement Directorate Analysis and Air Quality Division. Report No.
AAQD 2004-1.

Thermo Scientific 2009. Model 5014i Beta Instruction Manual Continuous Ambient Particulate Monitor.

United States (US) Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 2013. QA handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems Volume II Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program. US EPA Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards Air Quality Assessment Division.

Revision History: 0.0 (New document)

Approval




                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                           Page 73 of 206
                                                       Standard Operating Procedure for the
         Monitoring Parameter:
     Particulate Matter (PM)                         Continuous Measurement of Ambient PM
                                               Using Integrated Nephelometry and Beta Attenuation

       Revision No: Original                                  Reference No: SOP-05b
    Revision Date: 05 May, 2020                  Parent Document: Part B1 – B.C. Field Sampling Manual

1. Introduction and Scope
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) provides guidelines and instructions for the continuous ambient
monitoring of particulate matter within the provincial jurisdiction of British Columbia (B.C.).

These guidelines and instructions have been written specifically for particulate matter that is 10 µm or less in
aerodynamic diameter (PM10) and particulate matter that is 2.5 µm or less in aerodynamic diameter (PM2.5). This
SOP describes particulate matter measurements using nephelometry and beta attenuation measurement
techniques. Operating guidelines and instructions for particulate matter measurements using other analytical
methods are provided in SOPs 5a, and 5c through 5e.

This SOP forms part of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual (BCFSM). Part B - Air and Air Emissions Testing, of the
BCFSM provides additional information on Air Quality Monitoring that must be used in conjunction with the
information provided in this SOP. Installation and maintenance of a PM analyzer within the provincial jurisdiction
of B.C. should be carried out with consideration to Part B of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual, the analyzer
manufacturer’s manual, and this document.
2. Document Control
This Standard Operating Procedure is a controlled document. Document control provides a measure of assurance
that the specifications and guidance it provides are based on current information that has been scrutinized by a
qualified reviewer/s. Controlled documents are reviewed within a five year life cycle. Please ensure that the
revision date listed in the header of this document does not exceed five years.

This SOP and the B.C. Field Sampling Manual are available at: www2.gov.bc.ca.
3. Principle of the Measurement Method
Nephelometry and Beta Attenuation Monitor

The principle detection and quantification method deployed in monitoring ambient mass concentrations of
particulate matter involves nephelometry and beta attenuation. Monitors are set to a size fraction of interest,
typically PM10 or PM2.5, by attaching a size-selective inlet which allows ambient air to be drawn through the
analyzer at a rate of 16.7 litres per minute (l min-1). The sample initially passes through an 880 nm light beam
within the nephelometer. The nephelometry response is proportional to the concentration of particulate matter
present in the sample. The sample then passes through the beta attenuator where particulate matter, if present
in the sample air, is deposited onto a glass fibre filter tape. A radioactive source within the analyzer emits beta
rays that pass through the glass fibre tape to a scintillation counter. The presence of particulate matter will
attenuate the beta rays which are detected and measured by the scintillation counter. The level of attenuation
caused by the particulate matter is proportional to the ambient concentration of particulate matter. The beta
attenuation chamber measures alpha emissions from the accumulated particles and excludes negative mass
artifacts associated with the presence of daughter nuclides from radon gas decay. A more detailed description
of the particulate matter measurement principle is typically provided within the manufacturer’s operation
manual.
4. Interferences


                                 British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                           Page 74 of 206
Particulate matter measurements can be interfered with by dust accumulation on the optical sensor, debris in
the BAM sample chamber, moisture buildup, temperature, inlet and sample tube loss, and system leaks.

Dust Accumulation on Optical Sensor
Dust accumulation on the optical sensor may interfere with the measurement of PM. This can occur after heavy
dust storm events or incrementally over time. To mitigate potential interference by dust the nephelometric
chamber should be cleaned once per year.

Moisture
Conditions in which the relative humidity (RH) is high can result in an accumulation of water vapour on the filter
tape. This results in a mismeasurement of PM as the water vapour attenuates beta rays. This interference can be
minimized by using a dynamic heating system (DHS) to maintain the relative humidity of the air passing through
the filter tape. Typically RH will be controlled to 35% to prevent vapour condensation on the filter tape.

Inlet and Sample Tube Loss
The particle size-selective inlets have a stable cut-point as long as they are routinely serviced to minimize inlet
surface particle accumulation. Poor maintenance of the inlet may result in a shift of the particle size cut-off, or
undesired particle re-entrainment. Excessive particulate build up on the inner walls of the sample tubing can
affect PM concentration measurements. Scheduled preventive maintenance routines will significantly mitigate
the potential for this type of interference.

Flow tolerance
Size selective inlets are designed to operate with an airflow rate of 16.67 l min-1. This flow rate is required to
prevent particulate matter that exceeds the inlet cut size from entering the sample stream. Airflow must be
maintained within ± 4% of 16.67 l min-1 to ensure that only the desired particulate fraction (i.e. PM2.5) is being
measured.

System Leaks
Air leaks in the sampling system can result in reduced PM measurement. The PM analyzer must pass a leak check
to produce valid data. The leakage rate must be less than 0.8 l min-1. Consult the manufacturer’s operation
manual for leak check instructions specific to the analyzer.
5. Precision and Accuracy
Air contaminant concentration measurements are affected by an instrument’s precision and accuracy. The
precision of a measurement is generally considered to be the ‘repeatability of the measurement’.

The accuracy of the sensor is generally considered to be a measure of the ‘deviation from true’. The SHARP 5030
and 5030i Thermo Scientific manufacturer reports the hourly precision to be ± 2 µg/m3 for measurements less
than 80 µg/m3 and ± 5 µg/m3 for measurements greater than 80 µg/m3. The reported accuracy of the 5030 model
is ± 5% compared to a 24 hour Federal Reference Method. The accuracy of the 5030i model is reported as ± 5%
using NIST-traceable mass foil set.
6. Recommended Equipment and Apparatus
The following are commercially available combined Nephelometry and Beta Attenuation
analyzers considered to be suitable for use within the provincial jurisdiction of B.C.:

       Thermo Fisher Scientific Model SHARP-5030
       Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 5030i

This list does not necessarily exclude other commercially available PM analyzers, and analyzers recognized by
United States (US) Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) Federal Reference and Equivalent Methods. In deed

                               British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                             Page 75 of 206
as technology advances, new analyzers will enter the market which may be suitable for use within the provincial
jurisdiction of B.C. It is highly recommended however that you consult with the B.C. Ministry of Environment and
Climate Change Strategy (ENV) if you intend to deploy instruments not listed above. Regardless of the
instrumentation deployed, all analyzers should meet the specifications described within this document.
7. Measurement Range and Sensitivity
Thermo Fisher Scientific report that the SHARP Models 5030 and 5030i can operate at a user selectable range of
0 mg/m³ to 10 mg/m³. The detection limit is less than 0.5 µg/m³ for a one hour time resolution.
8. Site Requirements
Monitoring site specifications should be developed to ensure that the data generated from the site satisfies the
requirements of intended or established monitoring objectives. It is recommended that monitoring site
requirements be established in consultation with ENV to ensure that siting requirements are commensurate with
monitoring objectives.

As a preliminary guideline site selection should consider and address: monitoring objectives, representativeness
of the region, interference from the surrounding area, and zone type (residential, commercial, industrial) of
monitoring location.

Refer to Section 2 of Part B1 of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual for further information on site selection.
9. Installation Requirements
Follow analyzer specific installation requirements discussed in the analyzer manufacturer’s manual. The
installation should also conform to the following:
        The monitoring station’s sampling inlet and manifold shall meet the requirements of the most recent
         version of the National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Program’s Monitoring and Quality
         Assurance/Quality Control Guidelines Section 8.2 and Section 8.3.
        A data acquisition system (DAS) should be connected to the analyzer to record or download the
         measurement data from the analyzer. The DAS must also record and monitor any alarm conditions of the
         analyzer. The monitor should be set to monitor in hybrid mode.
        The analyzer must be placed in a weather resistant enclosure that is vented, heated and cooled to
         maintain a stable temperature preferably in the range of 20°C to 30°C but must ultimately be capable of
         maintaining a temperature range of 4 °C to 50 °C (5030i Instrument spec). The enclosures temperature
         should not deviate by more than 2 °C over a one hour period.
        At locations where a straight intake from the sample inlet point to the analyzer is not possible, locating
         the analyzer in an outdoor enclosure should be considered. The outdoor enclosure should be
         temperature controlled. The appropriate size selective-inlet must be installed onto the inlet tube.
        A temperature controller and temperature sensor system must be installed on the inlet.
        The instrument’s front panel should be oriented to the north to avoid direct sunlight.
        The portion of the inlet tube within a shelter or building should be adequately insulated to avoid
         condensation build up within the sampling tube.
        The inlet probe configuration should conform to the following criteria.

                     Probe Requirement                                      Condition
                    Height above ground                                    2 m to 15 m
               Distance from support structure                              > 2 metres
                                                       > 20 m or twice the height of trees above the inlet
                     Distance from trees
                                                                 elevation, whichever is greater
             Distance from any air flow obstacles        > twice the height of obstacles above the inlet
                        (i.e., buildings)                        elevation, whichever is greater
                     Airflow restrictions              Unrestricted in at least 3 of the 4 wind quadrants



                               British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                 Page 76 of 206
                                                                 Local source influences must be considered in
                        Local source influences
                                                                        locating the site for ambient PM


10. Operational Requirements
The following activities should be performed by the operator of a SHARP-5030 and 5030i PM analyzer.

             Action                     Time/Frequency                           Description                 Record Keeping
                                                                 • RH nominal value 35%

                                                                 • Filter change mass = 1500 µg

     Analyzer Operational                                        • Filter change hours = 24                  •   Record in
                                         At installation
      Parameter Set Up                                           • Filter cycle = 8 hours                        logbook
                                                                 • Temp control system set to ON

                                                                 • Air flow = 1000 l hr
                                                                                        -1

         Calibration
• Temperature, RH and
  barometric sensor
                                                                 •   As per Section 12 of this SOP. Leak     •   Record in
  calibration                       Annually or after repairs
                                                                     check prior to calibration                  logbook
• Flow rate

• Mass foil calibration

• Nephelometer zero

                                                                                                             •   Record in
       Verify Operational                                        •   Check operation of instrument, record
                                    Weekly                                                                      logbook
          Parameters                                                 operating parameters
                                                                 • As per manufacturers operation
                                    Inspect monthly, change                                                 •   Record in
                                                                   manual. Sites with heavy PM
     Sample Filter Change            as required (typically 6                                                    logbook
                                                                   concentrations may need more
                                     months)
                                                                   frequent filter change.
                                    After each filter tape      • As per manufacturers operation            •   Record in
            Self-test
                                     change                        manual                                        logbook
                                                                 • Compare DAS concentration value

                                                                   with the concentration displayed on       •   Record in
     Logged Concentration           Weekly
                                                                   the analyzer. The values should be            logbook
                                                                   within 1 µg/m³
                                  Monthly
                                  Before calibration
                                                                 •   As per manufacturers operation          •   Record in
                                  Before and after nozzle
          Leak Check                                                 manual. A display of less than 0.8 l        logbook
                                   cleaning
                                                                     min-1 passes the leak check.
                                  After each filter tape
                                   change out
                                                                                                             • Record in
      Nephelometer Zero          •   Monthly                     •   As per instrument manual
                                                                                                               logbook
                                                                 •   As per manufacturers operation          • Record in
          Flow Check             •   Quarterly
                                                                     manual                                    logbook
    Clean PM2.5 inlet cyclone
                                                                 •   As per manufacturers operation          •   Record in
     & PM10 inlet Inspect O-     •   Every 3 months
                                                                     manual                                      logbook
              Rings
      Clean air inlet system                                     • As per manufacturers operation            • Record in
                                 •   Annually
      Replace Inlet O-Rings                                        manual                                      logbook
     Inspect/change pump                                         • As per manufacturers operation            • Record in
                                 •   Annually
              vanes                                                manual                                      logbook
                                                                 • As per manufacturers operation            • Record in
        Replace Muffler          •   As required
                                                                   manual                                      logbook



                                     British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                      Page 77 of 206
                                                          •   As per manufacturers operation              •   Record in
  Clean the Nephelometer    •   Annually
                                                              manual                                          logbook
                                                          •   Where necessary replace with new
  Sample Path Inspection                                                                                  •   Record in
                            •   Monthly                       lines, tighten loose connections, clean
    (Probe to Analyzer)                                                                                       logbook
                                                              manifold if required

11. Zero and Span Checks
This section is not applicable to this measurement method.
12. Calibration
Verification and calibration should be performed in accordance with the manufacturer’s manual.

PM analyzer verification generally require:

       Pre-verification leak check (as per manufacturer’s instructions)
       Verification of ambient temperature and pressure sensors
       Verification of internal RH and temperature sensors (if required by manufacturer)
       Verification of volumetric flow
       Mass foil verification using a series of null and span foils
       Nephelometer zero verification

           Verifications must demonstrate compliance with the following acceptable tolerance levels:
                               Leak             Flow           Temperature           Pressure              RH
        Instrument
                          Tolerance           Tolerance         Tolerance           Tolerance           Tolerance
        5030         <0.42 l in-1 (±2.5%)        4%               ± 2° C           ± 10 mmHg              10 %
        5030i         <0.42 l in-1 (±2.5%)       4%               ± 2° C           ± 10 mmHg              10 %

13. References

National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Program. Monitoring and Quality Assurance/Quality Control
Guidelines.

Environment Canada (EC) 2010. Operating Procedures for BAM Samplers for PM2.5 Monitoring in the NAPS
Network. EC National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Operations Unit.

Environment Canada (EC) 2014. Thermo SHARP5030 Monitor Operating Instructions, Environment Canada, NAPS
Operations.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 2013. Model 5030 Instruction Manual Synchronized Hybrid Ambient Real-time
Particulate Monitor.

Wood Buffalo Environmental Association (WBEA) 2013. Standard Operating Procedure, Procedures for operating
continuous Thermo Scientific SHARP 5030 PM10 and PM2.5 Analyzers.

Revision History: 0.0 (New document)

Approval




                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                        Page 78 of 206
                                                        Standard Operating Procedure for the
          Monitoring Parameter:
        Dustfall and Metals                                  Sample Collection of Dustfall
                                                      (Settleable Particulate Matter) and Metals
       Revision No: Original                                    Reference No: SOP-05c
    Revision Date: 05 May, 2020                   Parent Document: Part B1 – B.C. Field Sampling Manual

1. Introduction and Scope
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) provides operating guidelines and instructions for the measurement of
dustfall (settleable particulate matter), within the provincial jurisdiction of British Columbia (B.C.).

This SOP describes dustfall sample collection using a dustfall container. Subsequent analysis of the sample by an
analytical laboratory is required to complete the measurement of dustfall. The laboratory analysis procedure is
not covered in detail within this SOP.

This SOP forms part of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual (BCFSM). Part B - Air and Air Emissions Testing, of the BCFSM
provides additional information on Air Quality Monitoring that must be used in conjunction with the information
provided in this SOP. Dustfall sampling within the provincial jurisdiction of B.C. must be carried out with
consideration to Part B of the BCFSM, and this document.

Dustfall sampling is considered to be a relatively coarse method of measurement and is used primarily for
monitoring nuisance dust. This method provides a measure of airborne substances that settle onto a surface over
a period of time, rather than providing the concentration of dustfall in ambient air at a given point in time. Where
monitoring objectives include the protection of human heath, monitoring of particulate matter in ambient air
(PM10 and/or PM2.5) would be more appropriate than monitoring dustfall.
2. Document Control
This Standard Operating Procedure is a controlled document. Document control provides a measure of assurance
that the specifications and guidance it provides are based on current information that has been scrutinized by a
qualified reviewer/s. Controlled documents are reviewed within a five year life cycle. Please ensure that the
revision date listed in the header of this document does not exceed five years.

This SOP and the B.C. Field Sampling Manual are available at: www2.gov.bc.ca.
3. Principle of the Sampling Method
Dustfall Containment

A weather resistant open top container of known dimensions is prepared by a laboratory. The containers are
cleaned and sealed by the laboratory with a measured quantity of reagent water, which acts to prevent
resuspension of any material that settles into the container. At the sampling location, the container is set up on a
stand and opened so that particulate matter can settle into the container. The container is left for a period of 30
days. At the end of the sampling period the container is sealed and returned to the laboratory for analysis. The
laboratory analysis determines the total dustfall as the mass of the water soluble and insoluble material collected
within the container. Dustfall results are reported in units of mass per area per time. Common units are milligrams
per square decimeter per day (mg/dm2/day).

Additional analysis can be undertaken to determine the fixed (non-organic) and volatile (organic/combustible)
portions of the dustfall, and metals content.
4. Interferences


                                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                          Page 79 of 206
Potential interferences include precipitation (rain and snow), freezing temperatures, hot temperatures, algae
growth, wildlife, and contamination by material which did not settle into the container, other debris (e.g., leaves,
etc.).

Freezing
If the liquid within the container freezes, settled particulates are no longer captured by the liquid collection
medium and can potentially be re-suspended, invalidating the dustfall measurement. To mitigate the potential of
this type of interference the laboratory should be consulted to add an anti-freeze reagent (typically isopropyl
alcohol) to the container during the preparation stage.

Precipitation
Rain and snow can collect in the container during the sampling period. The dustfall sample is invalidated if the
precipitation during the sample period causes the container to overflow. To prevent this potential interference
the liquid level within the sample container should be routinely checked during periods of high precipitation. If
the level of the liquid rises to within 2.5 centimetres (cm) of the top of the container a new container should be
deployed. In this circumstance both containers are used to determine the dustfall during the 30 day sampling
period. Selecting a larger sized sampling container can also help prevent liquid overflow.

High precipitation levels can also cause dilution of the antifreeze mixture used in the container, which in turn can
cause the liquid within the container to freeze and possibly damage the container. To prevent this from occurring,
the laboratory can increase the ratio of antifreeze to reagent water during the container preparation.

Hot Temperatures
Consistently hot temperatures and or strong winds occurring over the sampling period may cause partial or full
evaporation of the reagent water. Complete evaporation of the liquid (reagent water) renders the dustfall sample
invalid. During periods when high temperatures are forecast, the reagent water within the sample container should
be checked mid-way through the sampling period. If the level of the liquid falls to within 5 centimetres of the
container’s bottom, the container should be topped up with deionized water to reduce the risk of desiccation.
Alternately, selecting a larger sized sampling container with a larger initial charge of reagent water will help prevent
desiccation. It is important to note that deionized water is the only acceptable top-up liquid as other liquids may
contain dissolved or suspended solids that would invalidate the sampling.

Algae growth
The dustfall measurement relies on the weight of the container’s contents, therefore algae growth within the
container can be an interferent. To avoid this, the laboratory can add an algaecide in the reagent water for sample
events occurring during periods where temperatures are unlikely to drop below freezing. Copper sulphate may
sometimes be used as an anti-algae reagent however due to the copper content in the algaecide; this reagent
should not be used if the dustfall sample will undergo metals content analysis.

Wildlife
Wildlife interactions with the sampling equipment can cause interference with the dustfall measurement in a
number of ways. Birds flying overhead or landing on the sample container can interfere with the collection of
dustfall and inadvertently deposit materials into the sample container. Larger animals can damage the equipment,
tilt the stand or knock the stand over.

Contamination
The dustfall measurement relies on the weight of the container’s contents; therefore, any material that gets into
the container that did not settle into the container can be an interferent. This can include material such as leaves
and insects.



                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                               Page 80 of 206
5. Precision and Accuracy
The precision of a measurement is generally considered to be the ‘repeatability of the measurement’.

Dustfall measurements are affected by factors during the sample collection period (such as measurement height
and meteorological conditions) as well as the laboratory’s analysis method.

American Standard Test Method (ASTM), 2017 report that the use of a wind shield and setting the sample
container at a collection height of 2 meters (m) (or higher) provides better precision.

The accuracy of the measurement is generally considered to be a measure of the ‘deviation from true’.
Determination of precision and bias should be completed by the analytical laboratory as per their quality
assurance/quality control (QA/QC) procedures. In the field duplicate sample containers should be used for every
ten sample containers. For programs with less than 10 samples, at least one duplicate sample should be used.
6. Recommended Apparatus
For dustfall sampling, a container and stand are required. The following container sizes are commonly used in B.C.:

                                    Small Size                         Large Size
 Capacity (litres)                  2                                  4
 Height (cm)                        24.2                               ~25
 Diameter (cm)                      12.0                               ~15
 Opening (cm)                       9.0                                10

The sample container should be constructed of stainless steel or weatherproof plastic with a tight fitting lid. It is
important to use containers that were recently shipped from the laboratory as opposed to containers that have
been stored for a few months prior to deployment. This quality control step is important for the following reasons:

        The laboratory keeps a blank sample of the contents of the container,
        The type and composition of reagents in the containers vary seasonally. Reagent compositions are based
         on weather conditions, and;
        Reagents may change based on monitoring objectives (e.g. metals analysis).

The stand can be fabricated from wood or metal. It should hold the container firm and level at a height of at least
2 metres (to container top) above ground level (ASTM, 2017). Use of a wind shield around the container opening
is recommended as a best practice. A cross section and plan view of a wind shield for dustfall sampling are provided
within reference ASTM, 2017.
7. Measurement Range and Sensitivity
Analysis range and sensitivity depend on the method employed by the laboratory. The lower range of total dustfall
measurement reported by a commercial laboratory is typically 0.1 mg/dm2/day.
8. Site Requirements
Monitoring site specifications should be developed to ensure that the data obtained from the site meets the
intended or established monitoring objectives. It is recommended that monitoring site requirements be
established in consultation with the B.C. ENV to ensure that siting requirements are commensurate with
monitoring objectives. As a preliminary guideline site selection should consider and address: monitoring
objectives, representativeness of the region, interference from the surrounding area, and zone type (residential,
commercial, industrial) of the location. Refer to Section 2 of Part B1 of the BCFSM for further information on site
selection.




                               British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                              Page 81 of 206
9. Installation Requirements
The dustfall station installation should conform to the following:
      The monitoring location should be an open area, with no structures higher than 1 m within a 20 m radius
       of the dustfall container.
      The container should be placed 2 m above the ground surface (2 m from ground to container opening).
      Locate the container at a distance ≥ 10 stack heights from an operating stack (unless the monitoring
       objectives are to specifically monitor stack impacts).
      Higher objects such as trees and buildings should not exceed 30 degrees from the horizontal as viewed
       from the monitoring location. This is shown in the following figure.




    Figure reference: B.R. Irwin, ENV



10. Sampling Requirements
The following activities should be performed by the operator of a dustfall sampling program:

      Action              Time/Frequency                          Description                                 Record Keeping
                                             • Use an algaecide addition in warm months.

    Container         •    Prior to          • Use an antifreeze addition when near freezing or
                                                                                                        •   Record in logbook
   Preparation             installation        freezing conditions are expected during the
                                               sampling period.
                                                                                                        •   Record in logbook
                                                                                                        •   Complete Chain of
                                             •   Record the date, time, location, measurement
    Container                                                                                               Custody (COC)
                      •    At installation       height, container opening diameter, sample
   Deployment                                                                                               information required
                                                 identification and batch number.
                                                                                                            by the analytical
                                                                                                            laboratory.
                                                        Check liquid levels within container:

                                             •   To avoid overflows, change container if the liquid
                                                 level rises to within 2.5 cm of the container’s top.   •   Record in logbook
  Maintenance         •    As required           Note on the COC if it is suspected that the            •   Complete COC
 During Sampling           during the            container may have overflowed.                             information required
      Period               sampling period                                                                  by the analytical
                                             •   If the level of the liquid falls to within 5               laboratory.
                                                 centimetres of the container’s bottom, the
                                                 container should be topped up with deionized
                                                 water to reduce the risk of desiccation.
                      •    At the end of                                                                •   Record in logbook
                                             •   Check for signs of animal interference, and
                           the sampling                                                                 •   Complete COC
    Container                                    vandalism/tampering. Check the integrity of the
                           period (30 days                                                                  information required
    Retrieval                                    sample container. Report any findings.
                           ±2 days after                                                                    by the analytical
                           deployment)                                                                      laboratory.


                                      British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                     Page 82 of 206
                                     •   Seal the sample: record the date, time, sample
                                         identification and batch number.

                                     •   Send the sealed sample container to the
                                         laboratory for analysis. Minimize the storage
                                         period and refrigerate the sample container if
                                         submission to the laboratory is delayed.

11. Zero and Span Checks
This section is not applicable to this measurement method.
12. Calibration
This section is not applicable to this measurement method.
13. References
Alberta Government. 2016. Air Monitoring Directive Chapter 4: Monitoring Requirements and Equipment
Technical Specifications Version Dec 16, 2016.

American Standard Test Method (ASTM) 2017. Standard Test method for Collection and measurement of Dustfall
(Settleable Particulate Matter). Designation: D1739 – 98 (Reapproved 2017).

Leung, T.B., Manna, B.B. 1984. Site Selection Guidelines and Criteria for Ambient Air Monitors. Air Quality
Engineering Unit, Waste Management Branch.

Ontario Ministry of Environment. Last Accessed June 2017. Operations Manual for Air Quality Monitoring in
Ontario. Available at https://www.ontario.ca/document/operations-manual-air-quality-monitoring-ontario-
0#section-2.

Revision History: 0.0 (New document)

Approval




                              British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                      Page 83 of 206
                                                     Standard Operating Procedure for the
        Monitoring Parameter:
    Particulate Matter (PM)                   Non-Continuous Measurement of Particulate Matter
                                                   in Ambient Air – by High Volume Sampler
      Revision No: Original                                  Reference No: SOP-05d
   Revision Date: 05 May, 2020                 Parent Document: Part B1 – B.C. Field Sampling Manual

1. Introduction and Scope
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) provides operating guidelines and instructions for the discrete non-
continuous ambient monitoring of total suspended particulates (TSP) and particulate matter of 10 µm or less in
aerodynamic diameter (PM10), within the provincial jurisdiction of British Columbia (B.C.).

This SOP describes particulate matter measurements using a high-volume sampler. Operating guidelines and
instructions for particulate matter measurements using other analytical methods are provided in SOPs-5a through
5c and SOP-5e. Subsequent analysis of the sample filter by an analytical laboratory is required to complete the
measurement of PM using this method. The laboratory analysis procedure is not covered in detail within this SOP.

This SOP forms part of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual (BCFSM). Part B - Air and Air Emissions Testing, of the BCFSM
provides additional information on Air Quality Monitoring that must be used in conjunction with the information
provided in this SOP. Installation and maintenance of a high volume sampler within the provincial jurisdiction of
B.C. should be carried out with consideration to Part B of the BCFSM, the manufacturer’s manual, and this
document.
2. Document Control
This Standard Operating Procedure is a controlled document. Document control provides a measure of assurance
that the specifications and guidance it provides are based on current information that has been scrutinized by a
qualified reviewer/s. Controlled documents are reviewed within a five year life cycle. Please ensure that the
revision date listed in the header of this document does not exceed five years.

This SOP and the B.C. Field Sampling Manual are available at: www2.gov.bc.ca.
3. Principle of the Sampling Method
High Volume Filter Collection and Gravimetric Mass Determination

The high-volumer sampler can be fitted with a TSP or PM10 inlet head to provide selective sampling of the
particulate size fraction of interest. The sampler draws ambient air through the inlet head and filter which traps
any particulate matter that may be present in the air stream. The sample filter is pre-conditioned, inspected and
pre-weighed before sampling. The sampler draws air through the filter at a controlled flow rate of between 1.13
m3/min-1 and 1.70 m3/min-1. After sampling the filter is re-conditioned and re-weighed. The difference in filter
weight before and after sampling provides the mass of the particulate matter in the sampled air.

During the sampling period the elapsed sampling time is recorded. The flow rate and elapsed time are used to
calculate the total sample volume in cubic meters (m3). The mass of particulate matter and the sample volume are
used to calculate the average particulate concentration in micrograms per cubic meter (µg/m3) over the sampling
period.

A high volume sampler employs one of the following types of flow control systems:
       Mass flow control system
       Volumetric flow control system
       Electronic flow controller


                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                           Page 84 of 206
Mass flow controlled samplers use a hot wire anemometer probe to monitor the volumetric flow rate within the
sample collection chamber and the sampler adjusts the motor speed to maintain the desired volumetric flow rate.

A volumetric flow control system uses a choke-flow orifice of a specific size that is calibrated to maintain a
predetermined volumetric flow rate. The orifice is calibrated to draw constant volume under a given average
temperature and pressure.

An electronic flow controller uses internal temperature and pressure sensors and a microprocessor to
electronically control the motor to adjust the volumetric flow rate.
4. Interferences
Potential interferences with this sampling method include filter contamination and damage, particulate
accumulation on the size selective inlet, extraneous objects, liquid aerosols, reactant residue, filter selection,
motor dust, sample particulate size range, accumulated snow, flow rate variation over the sampling period and air
leakage.

Filter contamination and damage
Filter contamination can interfere with measurement results. The filter should be secured and kept clean prior to
filter installation. After the sampling event the filter should be removed as soon as practical. To minimize
contamination it is recommended that powderless nitrile gloves be worn when handling filters. Any damage to the
filter during handling will invalidate the measurement. Filter damage is commonly associated with filter media
sticking to the faceplate gasket.

Particulate accumulation on the size selective inlet
Particle size selective inlets provide a stable cut-point as long as they are routinely serviced to minimize particulate
accumulation on the inlet surface. Inadequate maintenance of the size selective inlet may result in a shift of the
particle size cut-off, or undesired particle re-entrainment.

Extraneous objects
Objects such as insects may get drawn into the sampler and be weighed as PM.

Liquid aerosols
Liquid droplets such as fog can be drawn into the sampler and be retained by the filter. If the amount of liquid
droplets is significant, the filter becomes wet and will not function as designed.

Reactant residue
A gas constituent within the sampled air may react with the filter medium, or sorb onto the filter. This action may
cause a residue to be retained and weighed as PM.

Filter selection
High concentrations of ambient SO2 and NO2 can interfere with glass fibre filters.

Motor dust
ASTM, 2009 report that dust containing metals from sampler motors, particularly copper, can significantly
contaminate samples.

Particle size range




                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                               Page 85 of 206
The high volume sampling method allows particulates of up to 100 µm in diameter to be collected. Collection
efficiency decreases for particles greater than 20 µm in diameter and consequently particulate sample collection
can be biased to the smaller particulate sizes.

Accumulated snow
Snow can accumulate on the filter during winter conditions and special care is required for filter handling in this
circumstance to ensure that particulates captured on the filter are not removed.

Flow rate variation
This interference is specific to a sample collection approach that uses an average flow rate calculated from a
discrete flow rate measurement recorded at the start and end of a sampling period. Throughout the sampling
period as the PM accumulates on the filter, the flow rate through the filter is gradually reduced. If at some point
in the sampling period a significant drop in flow rate occurs, then the average of the flow rate at the start and end
of the sampling period will not accurately represent the total sample volume. This is not a potential interference
for samplers that continuously monitor and record flow rate throughout the sampling period or samplers that
sense a decrease in air flow as the particulate builds up on the filter and makes adjustments to maintain the flow
rate (such as a mass or electronic flow controller). Inadequate flow can also result from voltage loss in extension
cords. When using extension cords for sampler power, 12 gauge wire is recommended and extra care is required
when using extension cords beyond 15 metres.

Air Leakage
If the faceplate gasket is improperly sealed (e.g. due to deterioration, dirt or improper installation) the
measurement will be invalidated.
5. Precision and Accuracy
The precision of an analysis is generally considered to be the ‘repeatability of the measurement’.
ASTM, 2009 report that the relative standard deviation (coefficient of variation) for multi-laboratory variation is
3.7%.

The accuracy of an analysis is generally considered to be a measure of the ‘deviation from true’. The accuracy of
this method is unknown.
6. Recommended Equipment and Apparatus
The following instruments are commercially available and suitable for use within the provincial jurisdiction of B.C.:

       Ecotech HiVol 3000 High Volume Air Sampler
       Tisch Environmental High Volume Air Sampler (Various models including mass flow controlled, volumetric
        flow controlled and electronic based controller)

Note that different makes/models allow for different data collection and recording over the sampling period. Some
samplers allow for documentation of flow rate at the start and end of the sampling period, whereas other samplers
provide a continuous record of operating parameters throughout the sampling period using either a chart recorder
or electronic datalogger. A sampler’s data collection and recording capabilities should be considered during
equipment selection to ensure monitoring objectives are met. Samplers that provide a continuous record of
operating parameters during sample collection are preferred over samplers that only allow for documentation of
flow rate at the start and end of sampling.

A calibrator kit is required to calibrate the sampler.

Filters should generally:
        collect more than 99% of TSP that passes through,

                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                             Page 86 of 206
       be strong enough to minimize leaks,
       not react with the air or particulate passing through it,
       be thermostable (i.e. not have differing efficiencies based on temp fluctuation), and;
       not contain high levels of the targeted compound to be monitored.

There are a variety of filter types with differing effectiveness relative to these criteria. In selecting the appropriate
filter it is important to take into account the monitoring environment, monitoring objectives and required filter
analysis. Generally a glass-fibre filter is used, however, silica fiber filters, cellulose paper and polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) filters can be used depending on the analysis required. If further metals analysis on the sample filter is
required, a TX40 (Teflon coated glass fibre filter) is recommended. A glass fibre filter is not recommended if
analysis to determine silica content is required. Some sampler types (such as the Ecotech) use a filter cassette to
hold the filter in place.

This list does not necessarily exclude other commercially available high volume air samplers. It is highly
recommended however that you consult with B.C. Ministry of Environment and Climate Change Strategy (ENV) if
you intend to deploy a non-continuous PM sampler that is not listed above. Regardless of the instrument deployed,
all samplers should meet the specifications described within this document.
7. Measurement Range and Sensitivity
By using different sample inlets, high volume samplers can be used to collect TSP and PM10 samples.

ASTM, 2009 report that the minimum amount of particulate detectable is 3 milligrams (mg). For a sampler
operated at an average flow rate of 1.70 m3/min, this results in a lower concentration limit of 1 to 2 µg/m3. B.C.
ENV, 2013 report that an estimated upper concentration is at least 780 µg/m3 and 420 µg/m3 for TSP and PM10
respectively.
8. Site Requirements
Sampling site specifications should be developed to ensure that the data obtained from the site meets the
intended or established sampling objectives. It is recommended that sampling site requirements be established in
consultation with the B.C. ENV to ensure that siting requirements are commensurate with sampling objectives. As
a preliminary guideline site selection should consider and address: sampling objectives, representativeness of the
region, interference from the surrounding area, zone type (residential, commercial, industrial) of the location.
Refer to Section 2 of Part B1 of the BCFSM for further information on site selection.




                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                Page 87 of 206
9. Installation Requirements
Follow sampler specific installation requirements discussed in the manufacturer’s manual. The installation should
also conform to the following:
       The sampler inlet should be located at a height of 2 m to 7 m above ground level.
       If the sampler is located on a roof or other structure the inlet should be at least 2 m from walls or parapets
        and not near any building vents or flues.
       The sampler should be located away from structures such as trees and buildings. The distance between
        any obstacle and the sampler should be at least twice the height of the obstruction.
       There should be unrestricted flow in 3 of the 4 wind quadrants.
       The appropriate size fraction separator should be installed onto the instrument for PM10 monitoring.
       The sampler should be located away from localized sources of particulate that could influence monitoring
        results such as unpaved roads and temporary generators unless identified as a source of interest when
        establishing the site’s monitoring objectives.
       If the sampler has a motor and a metals analysis of the sample is required, consideration should be given
        to venting the exhaust motor away from the sample inlet.
       High volume samplers draw a considerable amount of electricity and care to select an appropriate
        extension cord is required. Extension cords should not exceed 15 metres and be constructed with 12 gauge
        conductors (wire). Ensure power is supplied in a manner consistent with all applicable electrical codes.
        Consider installing dedicated power for extended sampling programs (e.g., outlet with cover at sampler).
10. Operational Requirements
Follow instrument specific operational requirements discussed in the manufacturer’s manual. Exact requirements
will vary by sampler, however in general the following activities should be performed by the operator of a high
volume sampler:

       Action               Time/Frequency                            Description                         Record Keeping
                                                  • Sampler to operate every 6 day on the
                                                                                 th

                                                    North American standard, unless an                •   Record in
 Sampling Frequency       At installation
                                                    alternative schedule has been agreed with             logbook
                                                    the B.C.
                                                  • Samples should be collected over a 24 hour        •   Record in
   Sampling Period        At installation
                                                    period (midnight to midnight).                        logbook
                                                  • Perform flow verification to verify the flow
                                                                                                      • Record in
                                                    rate is within 1.13 to 1.70 m3/min. If the flow
                                                                                                        logbook
                                                    rate is outside this range a calibration should
                                                                                                      • Complete Chain
                                                    be performed.
                          At the start of each                                                         of Custody (COC)
                                                  • Use filter within 30 days of conditioning by
                           sample period                                                                information
                                                    the laboratory.
                                                                                                        required by the
                                                  • Record sampler ID, filter ID’s and date.
                                                                                                        analytical
                                                  • Record start time, flow rate, ambient
                                                                                                        laboratory
    Sampling Start                                  temperature and ambient pressure
                                                  • Clean as per manufacturers operation manual

                                                  • Inspect inlets and clean if required.

                                                  • Inspect the filter screen and remove any

                                                    foreign deposits.                                 •   Record in
                          After each use
                                                  • Inspect the faceplate gasket and ensure it is         logbook
                                                    clean and in good condition to allow a correct
                                                    seal. Do not overtighten the faceplate gasket
                                                    as filter damage may occur.
                                                  • Visually check for any leaks, damage or other
                                                                                                      •   Record in
    Data Retrieval        At filter retrieval      possible interferences during the sampling
                                                                                                          logbook
                                                    period (e.g. vegetation clearing occurred).


                                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                  Page 88 of 206
                                                     • Retrieve filter within 5 days of the sampling   •   Complete COC
                                                       event.                                              information
                                                     • Record end and elapsed time, flow rate,             required by the
                                                       sample volume, ambient temperature and              analytical
                                                       ambient pressure.                                   laboratory
                        Every 400 to 500            • Check motor brushes and change if required

                         running hours                 (for samplers that have motor brushes)
                        Every 1500 running
                         hours or after
                                                     •   Replace motor
                         replacing motor
                         brushed two times
                                                                                                       •   Record in
 Routine checks and
                                                     • Inspect top and bottom motor gaskets and            logbook
   Maintenance
                                                       replace if necessary.
                                                     • Inspect flow meter tubing and replace if
                          Every 800 running
                                                       necessary.
                           hours
                                                     • Check Rotameter and clean if required (for

                                                       samplers that have rotameters)


                          At installation
                          After the sampler fails
                           for any reason
                          After maintenance or
                           change of motor or
                           motor brushes
                          After a flow
        Calibration        verification indicated       As per Section 12 of this SOP                 •   Record in
                           that the flow is                                                                logbook
                           outside of the
                           acceptable range.
                          After the
                           manufacturer’s
                           specified number of
                           sampling hours.
                          At least quarterly

11. Zero and Span Checks
This section is not applicable to this measurement method.
12. Calibration
Calibration should be performed following the manufacturer’s manual and in accordance with Section 6 of Part B1
of the BCFSM. Certain aspects specific to the high volume sampler’s calibration are included in this section. Exact
calibration procedures will vary by sampler make/model and type, for example calibration procedures vary
between mass flow controlled and volumetric flow controlled samplers.

Several parameters require calibration including flow, ambient temperature, ambient pressure, clock and date.
The calibration procedure comprises the following sequential steps:

         Step 1 – Leak check As-found verification of flow, temperature and pressure
         Step 2 – As-found verification of flow, temperature and pressure
         Step 3 – Multi-point verification; calibrate if necessary.
         Step 4 – As-left verification



                                 British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                    Page 89 of 206
Step 1, leak checks (internal and external) are undertaken to ensure there are no leaks in the sample train before
undertaking a calibration. In Step 2 verification is used to confirm that samples obtained prior to this check were
collected under valid conditions. The verification comprises a check against a known standard. The flow verification
should be performed using a flow meter which is calibrated or certified annually against a NIST traceable standard.
Similarly, temperature and pressure verification should be performed using a temperature and pressure standard
which is calibrated or certified annually against a NIST traceable standard.

The pass criteria for all parameters for Steps 1 and 2 are provided in the following table.

                        Parameter                                                  Pass Criteria
                                                             Between 1.13 m³/min to 1.70 m³/min with a correlation
                           Flow
                                                                          coefficient of 0.990 or better.
                                                             As stated within the manufacturers manual for a specific
                       Temperature
                                                                                     sampler.
                                                             As stated within the manufacturers manual for a specific
                    Ambient pressure
                                                                                     sampler.
                                                             Clock should be within ±2 minutes of standard time, and
             Clock and date verification check
                                                                            the date should be correct.
                        Leak check                                     No air leakage detected by operator

Parameters that do not meet the pass criteria in the table above should be adjusted in Step 3. After adjustment a
final verification (Step 4) is undertaken to confirm parameters are within the required criteria.
13. References

National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Program. Monitoring and Quality Assurance/Quality Control Guidelines.

Alaska Department of Environmental Conservation 2011. Standard Operating Procedures for Lead monitoring
Using a TSP High-Volume Sampler. Division of Air Quality Air Monitoring and Quality Assurance Section.

American Standard Test Method (ASTM) 2009. Standard Test Method for Determination of Total Suspended
Particulate Matter in the Atmosphere (High-Volume Sampler Method). Designation D4096-91 (Reapproved 2009).

Ministry of Water, Land and Air Protection 2013. British Columbia Field Sampling Manual Part B Air and Air
Emissions Testing. Water, Air and Climate Change Branch.

EcoTech 2013. HiVol 3000 High Volume Air Sampler User Manual. Version 1.8.

Environment Canada 2004. NAPS Network Quality Assurance and Quality Control Guidelines. EC Environmental
Protection Service Environmental Technology Advancement Directorate Analysis and Air Quality Division. Report
No. AAQD 2004-1.

State of California Air Resources Board 2008. Air Monitoring Quality Assurance Volume V Audit Procedures for Air
Quality Monitoring Appendix D Performance Audit Procedures for High Volume Samplers. Monitoring and
Laboratory Division.

State of California Air Resources Board 1992. Standard Operating Procedures for Air Quality Monitoring Appendix
E High Volume Sampler. Monitoring and Laboratory Division.

Tisch Environmental not dated. Operations Manual TE-5170 Total Suspended Particulate Mass Flow Controlled
High Volume Air Sampler.


                                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                             Page 90 of 206
United States Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA) 2013. QA handbook for Air Pollution Measurement
Systems Volume II Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program. US EPA Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
Air Quality Assessment Division.

US EPA 1999. Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Inorganic Compounds in Ambient Air Compendium
Method IO-2.1 Sampling of Ambient Air for Total Suspended Particulate Matter (SPM) and PM10 Using High Volume
(HV) Sampler. Center for Environmental Research Information Office of Research and Development.

United States Code of Federal Regulations 2013. Title 40 Part 58 Appendix E, Probe and Monitoring Path Siting
Criteria for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring. Prepared by the US Government Publishing Office.

Revision History: 0.0 (New document)

Approval




                             British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                         Page 91 of 206
                                                      Standard Operating Procedure for the
         Monitoring Parameter:
     Particulate Matter (PM)                   Non-Continuous Measurement of Particulate Matter in
                                                    Ambient Air Using a Low Flow Rate Sampler
      Revision No: Original                                    Reference No: SOP-05e
   Revision Date: 05 May, 2020                   Parent Document: Part B1 – B.C. Field Sampling Manual

1. Introduction and Scope
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) provides operating guidelines and instructions for discrete non-
continuous ambient monitoring of total suspended particulate (TSP), particulate matter of 10 microns (µm) or less
in aerodynamic diameter (PM10), and particulate matter of 2.5 µm or less in aerodynamic diameter (PM2.5), within
the provincial jurisdiction of British Columbia (B.C.).

This SOP describes particulate matter (PM) measurements using a low flow rate sampler, (e.g., Partisol™).
Subsequent analysis of the sample filter by an analytical laboratory is required to complete the measurement of
PM. The laboratory analysis procedure is not covered in detail within this SOP.

Operating guidelines and instructions for particulate matter measurements using other analytical methods are
provided in SOPs 5a through 5d.

This SOP forms part of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual (BCFSM). Part B - Air and Air Emissions Testing, of the BCFSM
provides additional information on Air Quality Monitoring that must be used in conjunction with the information
provided in this SOP. Installation and maintenance of a low flow rate sampler within the provincial jurisdiction of
B.C. should be carried out with consideration to Part B of the BCFSM, the equipment manufacturer’s manual, and
this document.
2. Document Control
This Standard Operating Procedure is a controlled document. Document control provides a measure of assurance
that the specifications and guidance it provides are based on current information that has been scrutinized by a
qualified reviewer/s. Controlled documents are reviewed within a five year life cycle. Please ensure that the
revision date listed in the header of this document does not exceed five years.

This SOP and the B.C. Field Sampling Manual are available at: www2.gov.bc.ca
3. Principle of the Measurement Method
Low Flow Rate Filter Collection and Gravimetric Mass Determination

The Sampler can be fitted with a TSP, PM10 or PM2.5 inlet head to provide selective sampling of the particulate size
fraction of interest. The Sampler draws ambient air through the inlet head and a 47 millimeter (mm) diameter
sample filter, which traps the particulate. The sample filter is pre-conditioned, inspected and pre-weighed before
sampling. After sampling the filter is reconditioned and reweighed. The difference in filter weights provides the
mass of the target size particulate that accumulated on the filter during the sampling period. The Sampler draws
air through the filter at a controlled flow rate of 16.67 liters per minute (l min-1). During the sampling period the
elapsed sampling time is recorded. The flow rate and elapsed time are used to calculate the total sample volume
in cubic meters (m3). The mass of the accumulated particulate and sample volume are used to calculate the average
particulate concentration in micrograms per cubic meter (µg/m3) over the sampling period.

The Partisol™ model 2025i is equipped to exchange sample filters automatically at a pre-set time interval, and a
capacity of 16 filter cassettes. A dichotomous version of this Sampler provides dual sample trains that sample both
PM10 and PM2.5 simultaneously in the same unit.


                                 British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                            Page 92 of 206
4. Interferences
Filter contamination can interfere with measurement results. The filter should be secured and kept clean prior to
installation. After the sampling event the filter should be removed as soon as practical. To minimize contamination
it is recommended that powderless nitrile gloves are worn when handling filter cassettes.

Any damage to the filter during handling will invalidate the measurement.
5. Precision and Accuracy
Since particulate measurement relies on pre-sampling and post-sampling filter weights any contamination of the
filter can lead to invalid results.

One blank filter should be submitted to the laboratory with each shipment of sampled filters. The blank filter is a
‘trip blank’ and as such should remain in the holder/petri dish and be returned to the laboratory with the same
batch of filters it was received with. It is recommended that you consult with your laboratory to determine if your
particular monitoring objectives should also include a field blank.
6. Recommended Equipment and Apparatus
The following instruments are commercially available and suitable for use within the B.C. ENV’s jurisdiction:

       Thermo Scientific Partisol™ Model 2025i and 2025i-D
       Thermo Scientific Partisol™ Model 2000i and 2000i-D
       Thermo Scientific Partisol™ Model Plus 2025 and 2025D
       Thermo Scientific Partisol™ Model 2000-D
       Thermo Scientific Partisol™ Model 2000-FRM
       Rupprecht & Patashnick Partisol™ Model 2000

Generally, a 47 mm Teflon filter is used for PM2.5 sampling and a TX40 (Teflon coated glass fibre), quartz fibre or
Teflon materials are used for PM10 and TSP sampling. However; if further analysis (e.g. metals analysis) on the
sample filter is required, a different filter type may be recommended by the analytical laboratory.

This list does not necessarily exclude other commercially available non-continuous PM filter Samplers, and
Samplers recognized by United States (US) Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) Federal Reference and
Equivalent Methods. It is recommended however that you consult with the B.C. Ministry of Environment and
Climate Change Strategy (ENV) if you intend to deploy a non-continuous PM Sampler that is not listed above.
Regardless of the instrument deployed, all Samplers should meet the specifications described within this
document.
7. Measurement Range and Sensitivity
By using different sample inlets, low flow rate samplers can be used to collect TSP, PM10 and PM2.5 samples.

The lower range of particulate concentration resulting from this method of sampling is typically around 2 µg/m3.
Environment Canada reported in 2008 that the upper concentration limit is at least 200 µg/m3 for PM2.5 sampling
at a flow rate of 16.7 l min-1 over a sampling period of 24 hours.
8. Site Requirements
Sampling site specifications should be developed to ensure that the data obtained from the site satisfies the
requirements of intended or established sampling objectives. It is recommended that sampling site requirements
be established in consultation with ENV to ensure that siting requirements are commensurate with sampling
objectives.




                               British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                            Page 93 of 206
As a preliminary guideline, site selection should consider and address: sampling objectives, representativeness of
the region, interference from the surrounding area, and zone type (residential, commercial, industrial) of the
location.

Refer to Section 2 of Part B1 of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual for further information on site selection.
9. Installation Requirements
Follow the installation requirements provided in the manufacturer’s manual. The installation should also conform
to the following:

     The Sampler inlet should be located at a height of 2 m to 7 m above ground level.
     If the Sampler is located on a roof or other structure the inlet should be at least 1 meter from walls or parapets
      and positioned away from building vents or flues.
     The Sampler should be located away from structures such as trees and buildings. The distance between any
      obstacle and the Sampler’s inlet should be at least twice the height of the obstruction.
     The Sampler should be located in a position that accommodates an unrestricted air flow in 3 of the 4 wind
      quadrants.
     The appropriate size fraction separator must be installed onto the instrument for the particulate size fraction
      of interest.
     The tube connecting the size selective inlet to the filter compartment should be vertical with no bends.
     The Sampler should be located away from localized sources of particulate such as unpaved roads that could
      influence monitoring results unless identified as a source of interest when establishing monitoring objectives.
10. Operational Requirements
Follow instrument specific operational requirements discussed in the manufacturer’s manual. Exact requirements
will vary by Sampler, however in general the following activities should be performed by the operator of a low flow
rate Sampler:

           Action              Time/Frequency                           Description                       Record Keeping
                                                     •   Sampler to operate every 6th day on the
                                                         North American standard, unless an
     Sampling Frequency       At installation                                                       •   Record in logbook
                                                         alternative schedule has been agreed with
                                                         by the B.C. ENV.

                                                     •   Samples should be collected over a 24
      Sampling Period         At installation                                                       •   Record in logbook
                                                         hour period (midnight to midnight).

                                                                                                     •   Record in logbook
                                                     • Use filters within 30 days of conditioning    •   Complete Chain of
                                                       by the laboratory.                                Custody (COC)
                              At installation
                                                     • Record Sampler ID, filter and cassette ID’s       information required
       Filter Cassettes                                and date.                                         by the analytical
                                                                                                         laboratory
                                                     • Clean cassette as per manufacturer’s
                                                       operation manual.
                              After each use                                                        •   Record in logbook
                                                     • Inspect the rubber seals and replace if

                                                       necessary.
                                                     • Retrieve filter within 5 days of the
                                                                                                     •   Record in logbook
                                                       sampling event.
                                                                                                     •   Complete COC
                                                     • Record end and elapsed time, sample
       Data retrieval         At filter retrieval                                                       information required
                                                       volume, filter temperature, ambient
                                                                                                         by the analytical
                                                       temperature (minimum, maximum and
                                                                                                         laboratory
                                                       average), and ambient pressure.



                                 British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                     Page 94 of 206
                                                     Check water trap on PM10 inlet and
                              Weekly
                                                      empty if required.
                                                     Verification (as-is check) as per
                                                      manufacturer’s operation manual for
                                                      flow, pressure, temperature, date and
                                                      clock.
                                                     If any of the parameters are outside of
                                                      the pass criteria listed in the table
                              Quarterly              provided in Section 12 of this SOP, a
                              Prior to               calibration should be performed.
                               calibration           Perform leak check.
                                                     Inspect inlets and impactor; clean if
                                                      required.
                                                     Lubricate O-rings. Inspect and replace if
                                                      required.
                                                     Lubricate V seals on the PM2.5 inlet.        •   Record in logbook
     Routine checks
                                                      Inspect and replace if required.
                                                     Inspect Sampler interior, inlet and
                                                      impactor and clean if required.
                                                     Check the in-line filter and replace if
                              Bi-annual
                                                      required.
                                                     Perform calibration (temperature,
                                                      pressure, flow and clock).
                                                     Replace the in-line filter.
                                                     Rebuild the pump.
                                                     Check the clock battery and replace if
                                                      required.
                              Annual                Temperature, pressure and flow rate
                                                      verification check standards should be
                                                      calibrated against a National Institute of
                                                      Standards and Technology (NIST)
                                                      traceable standard.
                            Monthly
                            Prior to bi-annual
                             inspection (of
                                                     Perform Internal and external leak check
  Internal/External Leak     Sampler interior,
                                                      as per the manufacturer’s operation          •   Record in logbook
          check              inlet and
                                                      manual.
                             impactor)
                            Prior to
                             calibration
                                                     As per Section 12 of this SOP
      Calibration                                    If the temperature or pressure sensor
                              At installation
 (temperature, pressure,                              requires calibration (adjustment) then       •   Record in logbook
                              Bi-annually
      flow, clock)                                    the flow must be verified and
                                                      recalibrated.

11. Zero and Span Checks
This section is not applicable to this measurement method.
12. Calibration
Calibration should be performed in accordance with Section 6 of Part B1 of the BCFSM and the manufacturer’s
manual. The following instructions and information are specific to low flow rate Sampler calibration.




                                 British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                   Page 95 of 206
Several parameters require calibration including flow, temperature, ambient pressure, clock and date. The
calibration procedure comprises the following sequential steps:

       Step 1 – Leak check
       Step 2 – As-found verification of flow, temperature and pressure
       Step 3 – Multi-point verification; calibrate if necessary
       Step 4 – As-left verification

Step 1, leak checks (internal and external) are undertaken to ensure there are no leaks in the sample train before
undertaking a calibration. In Step 2 verification is used to confirm that samples obtained prior to this check were
collected under valid conditions. The verification comprises a check against a known standard. The flow verification
should be performed using a flow meter which is calibrated or certified annually against a NIST traceable standard.
Similarly, temperature and pressure verification should be performed using a temperature and pressure standard
which is calibrated or certified annually against a NIST traceable standard. The pass criteria for all parameters for
Steps 1 and 2 are provided in the following table.

                  Parameter                                                   Pass Criteria
                      Flow                            ±4% of 16.7 l min-1 (between 16.00 l min-1 and 17.34 l min-1)
                 Temperature                                                 ±2 °C from true
               Ambient pressure                                           ±10 mmHg from true
               Relative Humidity                                                 ±10%
                                                   Clock should be within ±2 minutes of standard time, and the date
        Clock and date verification check
                                                                          should be correct.
                   Leak check                                         As per instrument manual

Parameters that do not meet the pass criteria in the table above should be adjusted in Step 3. After adjustment a
final verification (Step 4) is undertaken to confirm parameters are within the required criteria.
13. References

National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Program. Monitoring and Quality Assurance/Quality Control.

Environment Canada 2008. Method for the measurement of PM10 Concentration in Ambient Air Using Filter
Collection. Environment Canada Environmental Science and Technology Centre.

Environment Canada 2004. NAPS Network Quality Assurance and Quality Control Guidelines. EC Environmental
Protection Service Environmental Technology Advancement Directorate Analysis and Air Quality Division. Report
No. AAQD 2004-1.

Environment Canada 2012. National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Network Reference Method for the
Measurement of PM2.5 Concentration in Ambient Air Using Filter Collection and Gravimetric Mass Determination.
Air Quality Research Division.

Alberta Environment (AENV) 2011. Standard Operating Procedure for Measurement of Particulate Matter in
Ambient Air Using the Partisol 2000H. AENV Air Monitoring and Audit Centre.

California Environmental Protection Agency Air Resources Board (CARB) 2016. Standard Operating Procedures for
Thermo Scientific Partisol Model 2025i Sequential Air Sampler. AQSB SOP 404, Second Edition.

Thermo Scientific 2015. Partisol 2025i Sequential Air Sampler/Partisol 2025i-D Dichotomous Sequential Air
Sampler Instruction Manual.

                                 British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                Page 96 of 206
United States Code of Federal Regulations 2013. Title 40 Part 58 Appendix E, Probe and Monitoring Path Siting
Criteria for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring. Prepared by the US Government Publishing Office.

United States Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA) 2013. QA handbook for Air Pollution Measurement
Systems Volume II Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program. US EPA Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
Air Quality Assessment Division.

Revision History: 0.0 (New document)

Approval




                             British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                         Page 97 of 206
         Monitoring Parameter:                                Standard Operating Procedure for the
      Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)                                 Continuous Measurement of Ambient SO2

       Revision No: Original                                       Reference No: SOP-06
    Revision Date: 05 May, 2020                      Parent Document: Part B1 – B.C. Field Sampling Manual

1. Introduction and Scope
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) provides operating guidelines and instruction for the continuous ambient
monitoring of Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) within the provincial jurisdiction of British Columbia (B.C.).

This SOP forms part of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual (BCFSM). Part B - Air and Air Emissions Testing, of the BCFSM
provides additional information on Air Quality Monitoring that must be used in conjunction with the information
provided in this SOP. Installation and maintenance of an SO2 analyzer within the provincial jurisdiction of B.C. should
be carried out with consideration to Part B of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual, the analyzer manufacturer’s manual,
and this document.
2. Document Control
This Standard Operating Procedure is a controlled document. Document control provides a measure of assurance
that the specifications and guidance it provides are based on current information that has been scrutinized by a
qualified reviewer/s. Controlled documents are reviewed within a five year life cycle. Please ensure that the revision
date listed in the header of this document does not exceed five years.

This SOP and the B.C. Field Sampling Manual are available at: www2.gov.bc.ca.
3. Principle of the Measurement Method
Ultraviolet fluorescence

The principle detection and quantification method deployed for the measurement of ambient concentrations of SO2
involves ultraviolet (UV) fluorescence and a photomultiplier tube.

                                  𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆2 + ℎ𝑣𝑣1 → 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆2 → 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆2 + ℎ𝑣𝑣2

The concentration of SO2 in a sample of ambient air is quantified as a measure of ultraviolet (UV) fluorescence
absorbed by the SO2 molecules in the sample. A bulb within the analyzer emits the UV rays which are absorbed by
the SO2 molecules at a wavelength of 214 nm. The absorption of UV rays causes the SO2 molecules to transition to
an excited state. As the excited state SO2 molecules return to their normal state they release energy by emitting UV
light at a wavelength of 330 nm. The SO2 analyzer measures the amount of UV light present at a wavelength of 330
nm using a photo multiplier tube. The measurement of 330 nm UV rays is then used to quantify the concentration
of SO2.

A more detailed discussion on the SO2 measurement principle is typically provided within the manufacturer’s
operation manual.
4. Interferences
As the principle method of measuring the concentration of SO2 relies on the measurement of ultraviolet (UV)
fluorescence, compounds that emit UV rays at similar wavelengths may, if present, interfere with the measurement
of SO2. Compounds such as Nitric Oxide (NO), hydrocarbons, Ozone (O3), Carbon Dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O) emit
UV rays at similar wavelengths and as such have the potential to interfere with SO2 measurements.

Hydrocarbons


                                 British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                            Page 98 of 206
To minimize interference from hydrocarbons, SO2 analyzers can be equipped with a hydrocarbon scrubber.

NO
The presence of NO compounds at sufficiently high concentrations can result in a detectable interference in SO2
measurement. The use of optical filters can greatly reduce this interference by limiting the wavelength emitted by
the UV bulb and the wavelength of the photomultiplier tube (PMT) to those specific to SO2 absorption and emission.
Greater interference can be observed when measuring trace levels of SO2 when sufficiently high concentrations of
NO are present in ambient air. If typical ambient levels of NO are known to be high relative to SO2, particularly for
trace level analyzers, it is recommended that the analyzer be tested for its degree of sensitivity to NO using span
gas at concentrations of 600 ppb to 800 ppb NO.

O3
Although current analyzers are equipped to reduce interference caused by O3 it’s important to recognize this
potential interference. O3 interferes with the measurement of SO2, due to its absorption of a broad wavelength
range of UV light. To counteract this interference the wavelength of the PMT is kept to a short light path.

Particulate Matter
The presence of particulate matter in an air sample may to interfere with SO2 measurement. This can be minimized
by using a particle filter of 5 µm pore size (for analyzers that do not have an internal filter). The filter must be made
of an inert material such as Teflon and should be installed at the sample inlet.

Chemical Reactions
Chemical reactions between SO2 and NO, CO2, and H2O are reported to have negligible interference.
5. Precision and Accuracy
Air contaminant concentration measurements are affected by an instrument’s precision and accuracy.

The precision of a measurement is generally considered to be the ‘repeatability of the measurement’. This can be
confirmed through zero and span checks, and calibrations.

The accuracy of the sensor is generally considered to be a measure of the ‘deviation from true’. The accuracy of a
sensor can be evaluated and adjusted by performing a calibration against a certified sulphur dioxide calibration
standard mixture (See sections 11 and 12 below). Accuracy can also be evaluated through span checks and
calibrations.
6. Recommended Equipment and Apparatus
The following instruments are commercially available SO2 analyzers deemed to be suitable for use within the
provincial jurisdiction of B.C.:

       Thermo Environmental Instruments (TEI) Models 43i SO2 Analyzers.
       Teledyne API T200
       Ecotech EC9850T

This list does not necessarily exclude other commercially available SO2 analyzers, and analyzers recognized by United
States (US) Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) Federal Reference and Equivalent Methods. In deed as
technology advances, new analyzers will enter the market which may be suitable for use within the provincial
jurisdiction of B.C. It is highly recommended however that you consult with the B.C. Ministry of Environment and
Climate Change Strategy (ENV) if you intend to deploy SO2 analyzers not listed above. Regardless of the equipment
deployed all analyzers must meet the specifications described within this document.
7. Measurement Range and Sensitivity


                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                               Page 99 of 206
Typical commercially available SO2 analyzers can operate at a user selectable range of 0 ppb to 1000 ppb. For B.C.
ENV monitoring purposes the range should be set at 0 ppb to 200 ppb or 0 ppb to 500 ppb. In areas where high SO2
concentrations are likely to exist consult with B.C. ENV to establish an appropriate range to capture peak ambient
concentrations.

Detection limits are determined by instrument type but are generally around 0.3 ppb.
8. Site Requirements
Monitoring site requirements should be developed to ensure that the data generated from the site satisfies the
requirements of intended or established monitoring objectives. It is recommended that monitoring site
requirements be established in consultation with the B.C. ENV to ensure that siting requirements are commensurate
with the monitoring objectives.

As a preliminary guideline site selection should consider and address: monitoring objectives, representativeness of
the region, interference from the surrounding area, and zone type of the monitoring location (residential,
commercial, industrial).

Refer to Section 2 of Part B1 of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual for further information on site selection.
9. Installation Requirements
Follow analyzer specific installation requirements provided in the analyzer manufacturer’s manual. The installation
should also conform to the following:

       The monitoring station’s sampling inlet and manifold shall meet the requirements of the most recent
        version of the National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Program’s Monitoring and Quality
        Assurance/Quality Control Guidelines Section 8.2 and Section 8.3.
       All connection tubing, connectors and fittings from the manifold to the analyzer inlet must be made of
        Teflon or a material of equivalent chemical inertness.
       A Teflon particulate filter capable of removing at least 99% of 1 micron and larger particles must be placed
        in the sampling line upstream of the analyzer, unless the analyzer is equipped with a similar internal filter.
        The filter holder should be constructed of an inert material (e.g. Teflon, stainless steel).
       A data acquisition system (data logger) should be connected to the analyzer to record or download the
        measurement data from the analyzer. If an analog data logger is used, it must be set to match the voltage
        range of the analyzer, typically at 1 V or 10 V full scale. The data logger must also record and monitor any
        alarm conditions of the analyzer.
       The analyzer must be placed in a temperature controlled, temperature stable enclosure. The enclosure’s
        temperature must be maintained between 20 °C to 30 °C.
       Remove any sources of solvents and volatile hydrocarbons from the vicinity of the station.

10. Operational Requirements
The following activities should be performed by the operator of a continuous automated SO2 analyzer.

          Action                      Time/Frequency                         Description             Record Keeping
                                                                   As per manufacturers operation
  Analyzer Range Set Up      After installation                    manual. Monitoring range        Record in logbook
                                                                    should be 0 ppb to 500 ppb




                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                 Page 100 of 206
                             After installation (or relocation)
                              following a 24 hour warm up
                              period;
                             For new analyzers, after the first 3
                              months of operation;
                             After analyzer
                              repairs/maintenance that may
                              have affected the performance of
                              the instrument;                         As per Section 6 of Part B1 of
  Multipoint Verification                                                                                Record in logbook
                             When the span check is less than         the BCFSM
                              or is equal to ± 10 % of reference
                              value;
                             When the zero check exceeds ±
                              1.0 ppb;
                             Quarterly required if using weekly
                              zero/span checks. A maximum 6
                              month interval is permissible if
                              using daily zero/span checks.

      Zero and Span                                                   As per manufacturers operation
                             Daily preferred, weekly minimum
       Verification                                                    manual
    Verify Operational                                                As per manufacturers operation
                             Each station visit
       Parameters                                                      manual                            Record in logbook

                             Inspect monthly, change as              As per manufacturers operation
    Inlet Filter Change
                              required                                 manual

                             As recommended by                       As per manufacturers operation
  Analyzer Maintenance                                                                                   Record in logbook
                              manufacturer or as required              manual
                                                                      Where necessary replace with
 Sample Path Inspection                                                new lines, tighten loose
                             Monthly                                                                    Record in logbook
   (Probe to Analyzer)                                                 connections, clean manifold as
                                                                       required

11. Zero and Span Checks
Zero and span checks are required to verify the analyzers performance between calibrations. These checks should
be performed in accordance with Section 6 of Part B1 of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual and the manufacturer’s
manual.
12. Calibration
Calibration should be performed in accordance with Section 6 of Part B1 of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual and the
manufacturer’s manual.
13. References

National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Program. Monitoring and Quality Assurance/Quality Control Guidelines.

Alberta Environment (AENV) 2011. Standard Operating Procedure for Measurement of SO2 by SO2 Fluorescence.
AENV Air Monitoring and Audit Centre.

AENV 2011. Standard Operating Procedure for Dilution Calibrations. AENV Air Monitoring and Audit Centre.

Environment Canada (EC) 2010. Continuous Measurement of Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) in Ambient Air by UV
Fluorescence. EC National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Operations Unit.


                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                  Page 101 of 206
Thermo Fisher Scientific 2015. Model 43i Instruction Manual Pulsed Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer.

EC 2004. NAPS Network Quality Assurance and Quality Control Guidelines. EC Environmental Protection Service
Environmental Technology Advancement Directorate Analysis and Air Quality Division. Report No. AAQD 2004-1.

United States (US) Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 2013. QA handbook for Air Pollution Measurement
Systems Volume II Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program. US EPA Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards Air
Quality Assessment Division.

Revision History: 0.0 (New document)

Approval




                             British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                             Page 102 of 206
            Monitoring Parameter:                         Standard Operating Procedure for the
           Various Compounds                        Passive/Diffusive Method of Air Sample Collection

           Revision No: Original                                  Reference No: SOP-07
        Revision Date: 05 May, 2020                 Parent Document: Part B1 – B.C. Field Sampling Manual

1. Introduction and Scope
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) provides operating guidelines and instructions for the passive (diffusive)
measurement of air compounds within the provincial jurisdiction of British Columbia (B.C.).

This SOP describes passive sample collection. Subsequent analysis of the sample by an analytical laboratory is
required to complete the measurement of the target air compound. The laboratory analysis procedure is not
covered in detail within this SOP.

This SOP forms part of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual (BCFSM). Part B - Air and Air Emissions Testing, of the BCFSM
provides additional information on Air Quality Monitoring that must be used in conjunction with the information
provided in this SOP. Passive sampling within the provincial jurisdiction of B.C. should be carried out with
consideration to Part B of the BCFSM, and this document.

Passive monitoring is a diffusive sampling method that is generally used to determine low level concentrations of
air compounds over a sampling period that ranges between 24 hours to 30 days. This sampling method is suitable
for remote locations as the method itself does not require electricity. A thirty day sampling period is recommended
as a nominal passive sampling period. For monitoring objectives designed to consider concentrations measured at
shorter time scales, or those designed to measure concentrations that are expected to exceed the high or low
thresholds of the passive samplers, active monitoring of ambient air concentrations would provide a more
appropriate sampling method.
2. Document Control

This Standard Operating Procedure is a controlled document. Document control provides a measure of assurance
that the specifications and guidance it provides are based on current information that has been scrutinized by a
qualified reviewer/s. Controlled documents are reviewed within a five year life cycle. Please ensure that the revision
date listed in the header of this document does not exceed five years.
This SOP and the B.C. Field Sampling Manual are available at: www2.gov.bc.ca.
3. Principle of the Sampling Method
Passive Samplers

A passive sampler is a simple device capable of sampling gaseous compounds in ambient air via diffusion or
permeation. Passive sampling does not require active movement of air through the sampler. Gaseous compounds,
if present in the ambient air, diffuse through a static air layer or permeate a membrane. Samplers are generally
specific to one target compound.

Samplers for the following compounds are commercially available:

         speciated volatile organic compounds (VOCs) including benzene,
         aldehydes, ketones, and phenolics,
         chlorinated compounds,
         alcohols,


                                    British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                       Page 103 of 206
       sulphur dioxide (SO2),
       hydrogen sulphide (H2S),
       nitrogen dioxide/oxides of nitrogen (NO2/NOX),
       ozone (O3),
       ammonia (NH3), and;
       nitric acid (HNO3).

Regardless of the target compound this method deploys a sampler body or sampling tube of known dimensions that
is prepared by a laboratory. Sampler bodies and sampling tubes contain a diffusion barrier and a chemical-specific
sampling media. At the sampling location, the sampler housing is set up on a stand and the sampler bodies or tubes
are taken out of their protective containers and installed in the housing. The passive samplers are normally exposed
for a period of 30 days although this may vary depending on the requirements of the sampling program. Sample trip
blanks (unopened samplers) and duplicate samples are deployed and returned to the laboratory as part of the same
batch. A duplicate sample should be deployed for every 10 samples. Where possible one passive station in a network
should be co-located with a reference method or equivalent.

At the end of the sampling period, the sampler bodies or tubes are placed within their protective containers and
sealed plastic bags and returned to the laboratory for analysis. The laboratory analysis determines the average
concentration of the compound over the sampling period. Average regional or local meteorological conditions
(temperature, relative humidity, and wind speed) for the sampling period are generally required for accurate
analysis of the passive concentrations. Common measurement units are parts per billion (ppb).
4. Interferences
Potential interferences include precipitation, particulate matter contamination, physical damage to the sampler
body or membrane, siting exposure that differs from the meteorological data representing station conditions, and
contamination by incidental exposure to the target compound that was not part of the ambient environment.

Precipitation
Wetting can damage the passive sampler media, or may introduce dissolved gases to the sampler media resulting
in inaccurate measurements. To prevent precipitation interference passive samplers should be installed facing
downwards and within a housing equipped with a rain shelter; or deployed in a similar manner which will prevent
wetting of the media.

Particulate Matter
Air compounds may be absorbed by particulate matter, resulting in inaccurate measurements if particulate matter
is allowed to settle on the sampler media. To prevent this, passive samplers should be installed facing downwards
in a housing or deployed in a similar manner which will prevent the settling of suspended particulate matter on the
media.

Physical Damage
The diffusion barrier on passive samplers is delicate and can be easily damaged if handled improperly. Proper care
must be taken to avoid touching the diffusion barrier during deployment or retrieval of the samplers. Samplers
should be positioned in a location where they are unlikely to be damaged by wildlife.

Siting Exposure
Passive samplers must be deployed in a setting which has similar meteorological characteristics to the
meteorological station data used to determine the concentrations of target compounds. A white housing will
generally be appropriate to minimize the effects of solar radiant heating. Excessive winds can interfere with
sampling. This can be minimized by using a sample housing.



                             British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                            Page 104 of 206
Contamination
Passive samplers must be left in their protective containers and stored according to laboratory specifications to
prevent the uptake of compounds when not deployed, e.g., in transit. Contact with the diffusion barrier when
handling must be prevented to avoid contamination of the samplers. Sample blanks must not be opened, and should
remain in their protective containers throughout the sampling period. Sample blanks must be treated similarly to
the deployed samplers throughout the sampling program, and placed in a similar temperature environment as the
deployed samplers during the sampling period.
5. Precision and Accuracy
Passive sampling measurements are affected by factors such as measurement height and meteorological conditions
during the sample collection period as well as the laboratory’s analytical method.

The precision of a measurement is generally considered to be the ‘repeatability of the measurement’. The accuracy
of the measurement is generally considered to be a measure of the ‘deviation from true’. Determination of precision
and bias should be completed by the analytical laboratory as per their quality assurance/quality control (QA/QC)
procedures. In the field, one duplicate passive sample and one method blank should be deployed for every batch of
1 to 10 passive samplers, and all samplers should be deployed as per Section 9 ‘Installation Requirements’.
6. Recommended Apparatus
For passive sampling, a sampler body with a diffusion barrier and stand are required. A sampler housing and rain
shield are recommended unless the sampler body can be mounted in a configuration that effectively mitigates or
eliminates the potential for interference. Passive sampler housings provided by laboratories often double as a rain
shield.

To prevent contamination, the samplers should be stored and transported in protective cases which are themselves
kept within a sealable plastic bag. It is important to use samplers when shipped from the laboratory and then return
them to the laboratory soon after retrieval for the following reasons:

       The samplers have a pre-exposure storage life ranging from a few weeks to a few months
       The samplers have a post-exposure storage life ranging from a few weeks to a few months

For a given network and monitoring period, it is important to use samplers, including blanks and duplicates, from
the same laboratory batch to eliminate variability from sampler manufacture.

The stand can be fabricated from wood or metal, or could be an existing structure that does not prevent the proper
sampling of air compounds (i.e. an existing fence post).
7. Measurement Range and Sensitivity
Analysis range and sensitivity depend on the method employed by the laboratory and by the compound being
monitored. The lower range of passive detection limits reported by a commercial laboratory is typically on the order
of 1 ppb to 10 ppb for a 24-hour exposure, to 0.01 ppb to 0.1 ppb for a 30-day exposure. Maximum sample
concentrations are in the order of 20 ppb to 100 ppb. The sampling rate is moderately sensitive to meteorological
conditions, and these must be taken into account.
8. Site Requirements
Monitoring site specifications should be developed to ensure that the data obtained from the site satisfies the
requirements of intended or established monitoring objectives. It is recommended that monitoring site
requirements be established in consultation with the B.C. Ministry of Environment and Climate Change Strategy
(ENV) to ensure that siting requirements are commensurate with monitoring objectives.




                             British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                            Page 105 of 206
As a preliminary guideline, site selection should consider and address: monitoring objectives, representativeness of
the region, interference from the surrounding area, and zone type (residential, commercial, industrial) of the
location.

Refer to Section 2 of Part B1 of the BCFSM for further information on site selection.
9. Installation Requirements
The passive sampling station installation should conform to the following:

          The sampler housing shall be mounted to a supporting structure in accordance with the manufacturer’s
           specifications and in a configuration that ensures that there is no restriction to airflow.
          The sampler must be deployed in a manner that prevents the diffusion barrier from becoming wet, protects
           the diffusion barrier from the precipitation of suspended particulates, and protects the diffusion barrier
           from high wind speeds (i.e. use a housing/rain shield).
          The sampler housing shall be placed so that the diffusion barrier of the sampler body is at a height of 2 m
           to 4 m above ground surface.
          Co-located samplers should be within a 4 m horizontal distance of each other.
          Passive samplers within a monitoring network should be positioned at the same sampling height.
          Higher objects such as trees and buildings should not exceed 30 degrees from the horizontal plane of the
           sampler body as illustrated in the following figure.




         Figure reference: Blair R. Irwin, ENV 2018

10. Sampling Requirements
The following activities should be performed by the operator of a passive sampling program:

         Action                Time/Frequency                             Description                       Record Keeping
                                                      • Store in a cool location out of direct light.

                         •   Prior to or after          Store samplers and method blanks together.
 Sampler Storage                                                                                                  n/a
                             installation               Do not open storage containers outside of
                                                        the deployment period.
                                                                                                        • Record in logbook;
                                                                                                          record sample ID on
                                                      •   Record the date, time, location,                sampler body.
    Sampler                                               measurement height, and sample                • Complete Chain of
                         •   At installation
   Deployment                                             identification and batch number; record         Custody (COC)
                                                          sample identification on the sampler body.      information required
                                                                                                          by the analytical
                                                                                                          laboratory.
                         •   At the end of the        •   Check for signs of damage/tampering. Check    • Record in logbook.

                             sampling period (30          integrity of samplers.                        • Complete COC
        Sampler
                             days ±4 days after       •                                                   information required
        Retrieval
                             deployment, unless       •   Place the protective cap on the sampler,        by the analytical
                             otherwise determined)        return the sampler to its protective            laboratory.

                                       British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                               Page 106 of 206
                                             container, place in a sealable bag, and record
                                             the date, time, and sample identification
                                             number at the time of sample collection.
                                           • Send to laboratory for analysis. Minimize

                                             storage period.

11. Zero and Span Checks
This section is not applicable to this measurement method.
12. Calibration
This section is not applicable to this measurement method.
13. References
Alberta Government. 2016. Air Monitoring Directive, Chapter 3: Ambient Monitoring Site Selection, Siting Criteria
and Sampling System Requirements. Version Dec 16, 2016.

Revision History: 0.0 (New document)

Approval




                             British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                           Page 107 of 206
          Monitoring Parameter:                            Standard Operating Procedure for the
          Ammonia (NH3)                                  Continuous Measurement of Ambient NH3

       Revision No: Original                                     Reference No: SOP-08
    Revision Date: 05 May, 2020                    Parent Document: Part B1 – B.C. Field Sampling Manual

1. Introduction and Scope
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) provides operating guidelines and instructions for the continuous ambient
monitoring of Ammonia (NH3) within the jurisdiction of British Columbia (B.C.).

This SOP forms part of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual (BCFSM). Part B - Air and Air Emissions Testing, of the BCFSM
provides additional information on Air Quality Monitoring that must be used in conjunction with the information
provided in this SOP. Installation and maintenance of NH3 analyzers within the provincial jurisdiction of B.C. should
be carried out with consideration to Part B of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual, the analyzer manufacturer’s manual,
and this document.
2. Document Control
This Standard Operating Procedure is a controlled document. Document control provides a measure of assurance
that the specifications and guidance it provides are based on current information that has been reviewed by a
qualified reviewer/s. Controlled documents are reviewed within a five year life cycle. Please ensure that the revision
date listed in the header of this document does not exceed five years.

This SOP and the B.C. Field Sampling Manual are available at: www2.gov.bc.ca.
3. Principle of the Measurement Method
Chemiluminescence

The principle detection and quantification method deployed for ambient concentrations of NH3 is
chemiluminescence. NH3 measurement is based on the same principle deployed for nitrogen dioxide (NO2)
measurement. A photomultiplier tube is used to measure the light (ℎ𝑣𝑣) emitted by the chemical reaction of nitric
oxide (NO) and ozone (O3).

                                           𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 + 𝑂𝑂3 → 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁2 + 𝑂𝑂2 + ℎ𝑣𝑣

This method involves two measurement processes. The first process measures the total amount of nitrogen in the
ambient air sample, which includes the nitrogen within NH3, NO2, and NO. The second process measures the amount
of NO and NO2 (collectively referred to as NOX). The concentration of NH3 is then calculated as the difference
between the two measurements.

First Process – Total Nitrogen Measurement
In the first process, the total nitrogen concentration is determined by passing an ambient air sample through a high
temperature (approximately 750 °C) chamber which converts both NH3 and NO2 to NO. In a subsequent reaction
chamber the converted NO molecules and original NO molecules present in the air sample react with O3. When
exposed to O3, the converted NO molecules and original NO molecules are readily oxidized to NO2 in a 1:1
relationship. As excited NO2 decays to a lower energy state it releases infrared light with an intensity that is linearly
proportional to the amount of NO. The infrared light emitted during this chemical reaction is measured using a
photomultiplier tube. The infrared light measurement is used to determine the concentration of total nitrogen.

Second Process – NOX Measurement


                                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                            Page 108 of 206
In the second process, the concentration of NOX (which includes NO and NO2) is determined by passing the ambient
air sample through a molybdenum catalysis oven that is heated to approximately 325 °C, which converts NO2 to NO.
The lower converter temperature prevents the catalytic conversion of NH3 to NO conducted in the first process. In
a subsequent reaction chamber the converted NO molecules and original NO molecules present in the air sample
react with O3. The light emitted during this chemical reaction is measured using a photomultiplier tube. The infrared
light measurement is used to determine the concentration of NOX.

Use of Outputs from Processes 1 and 2 to Calculate NH3
The concentration of NH3 is determined by the difference of total Nitrogen and NOX as follows:

                     𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁3 = 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 (𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁3 , 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑁𝑁𝑂𝑂𝑋𝑋 ) − 𝑁𝑁𝑂𝑂𝑋𝑋

A more detailed discussion of the NH3 measurement principle is typically provided within the manufacturer’s
operation manual.
4. Interferences

Nitrogen based compounds
The presence of nitrogen based compounds in ambient air may interfere with NH3 measurement using this method.
These compounds are known to erroneously increase analyzer response as they can undergo chemical reactions
within the catalysis oven or reaction chamber resulting in an inaccurate analyzer response. Some of the nitrogen
based compounds known to interfere with NH3 measurement include nitrites and nitrates.

H2O
Water and high levels of carbon dioxide (>0.5 %) have the potential to interfere with measurements. Analyzers
situated in areas of high humidity should use a gas dryer to reduce moisture in the sample. The gas dryer should be
positioned in the sample line upstream of the analyzer.

Particulate Matter
Particulate matter in ambient air is known to reduce analyzer response by absorbing and scattering light.
Interference by particulate matter can be minimized by placing a particle filter at the sample inlet (for analyzers that
do not have an internal filter). The particle filter must have a 5 micron pore size and be made of an inert material
such as Teflon.
5. Precision and Accuracy
Air contaminant concentration measurements are affected by an instrument’s precision and accuracy.

The precision of a measurement is generally considered to be the ‘repeatability of the measurement’. This can be
confirmed through zero and span checks, and calibrations.

The accuracy of the sensor is generally considered to be a measure of the ‘deviation from true’. The accuracy of the
sensor can be checked by performing analyzer calibrations against a certified standard gas mixture (see Sections 11
and 12). Accuracy can also be evaluated through periodic span checks.
6. Recommended Equipment and Apparatus
The following are common commercially available NH3 analyzers suitable for use within the provincial jurisdiction of
B.C.:
        Thermo Environmental Instruments (TEI) Model 17i Ammonia Analyzer
        Thermo Scientific Model 17i Ammonia Analyzer
        Teledyne API Model T201 Ammonia Analyzer



                                 British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                                          Page 109 of 206
This equipment list does not necessarily exclude the use of other commercially available NH3 analyzers, and
analyzers recognized by United States (US) Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) Environmental Federal
Reference and Equivalent Methods. It is recommended however that you consult with the B.C. Ministry of
Environment and Climate Change Strategy (ENV) if you intend to deploy an NH3 analyzer not listed above. Regardless
of the equipment deployed, all analyzers should meet the specifications described within this document.
7. Measurement Range and Sensitivity
Typical commercially available NH3 analyzers can operate at user selectable ranges between 0 and 20000 parts per
billion (ppb); for B.C. ENV monitoring purposes analyzers should be set to a range of 0 ppb to 5000 ppb.

Detection limits are determined by instrument type, but are generally around 1 ppb.
8. Site Requirements
Monitoring site specifications should be developed to ensure that the data generated from the site satisfies the
requirements of intended or established monitoring objectives. It is recommended that monitoring site
requirements be established in consultation with the B.C. ENV to ensure that siting requirements are commensurate
with monitoring objectives.

As a preliminary guideline site selection should consider and address: monitoring objectives, representativeness of
the region, interference from the surrounding area, and zone type (residential, commercial, industrial) of the
monitoring location.

Refer to Section 2 of Part B1 of the BCFSM for further information on site selection.
9. Installation Requirements
Follow analyzer specific installation requirements provided in the analyzer manufacturer’s manual. Installation
should also conform to the following:
       The monitoring station’s sampling inlet and manifold shall meet the requirements of the most recent version
        of the National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Program’s Monitoring and Quality Assurance/Quality
        Control Guidelines Section 8.2 and Section 8.3.
       The ¼ inch diameter connection tubing from the manifold to the analyzer inlet must be made of Teflon or
        equivalent material for chemical inertness.
       A Teflon particulate filter meeting the manufacturer’s pore size specifications must be placed in the sampling
        line upstream of the analyzer, unless the analyzer is equipped with a similar internal filter. The filter holder
        should be constructed of an inert material (e.g. Teflon, stainless steel).
       To reduce the risk of moisture entering the analyzer it is recommended that horizontally mounted manifolds
        be oriented with the ports facing upwards (with the exception of manifolds such as the “ARB style” which
        must be mounted vertically); ensure any water traps are oriented vertically.
       A data acquisition system (‘DAS’ of ‘data logger’) should be connected to the analyzer to record or download
        the measurement data from the analyzer. If an analog data logger is used, it must be set to match the voltage
        range of the analyzer, typically at 1V or 10V full scale. It must be ensured that the analog output matches
        the digital output displayed on the analyzer. The data logger must also record and monitor any alarm
        conditions of the analyzer.
       The analyzer must be placed in a weather resistant enclosure that is vented, heated and cooled to maintain
        a stable temperature preferably in the range of 20 °C and 30 °C but must ultimately be capable of
        maintaining the operating range specified by the manufacturer. Enclosure temperatures should not deviate
        by more than 2 °C over a one hour period.
       Remove any sources of solvents and volatile hydrocarbons from the vicinity of the station.
       A permeation dryer should be placed in the sampling line upstream of the analyzer.




                              British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                               Page 110 of 206
10. Operational Requirements
The following activities should be performed by the operator of a continuous automated NH3 analyzer.

          Action                          Time/Frequency                         Description             Record Keeping
                                                                          As per manufacturers
                                                                           operation manual.             Record in
  Analyzer Range Set Up      After installation.
                                                                           Monitoring range should        logbook
                                                                           be 0 ppb to 5000 ppb.
                             After installation (or relocation)
                              following a 24 h to 72 h warm up period;
                             After analyzer repairs/maintenance that
                              may affect performance of the
                              instrument;
                             When zero check exceeds ±0.1 ppm;
                             When span drift is ≥ ±10% of reference
                              value;
                                                                          As per Section 12 of this     Record in
  Multipoint Verification    For new analyzers, after the first 3
                                                                           SOP.                           logbook
                              months of operation;
                             Bi-annually if span checks are conducted
                              daily – or when any threshold above is
                              reached (whichever happens first);
                             Quarterly if span checks are conducted
                              less than daily – or when any threshold
                              above is reached (whichever happens
                              first).
      Zero and Span                                                       As per manufacturers
                             Daily preferred, weekly minimum
       Verification                                                        operation manual.
    Verify Operational                                                    As per manufacturers
                             Each monitor station visit
       Parameters                                                          operation manual
                                                                          As per manufacturers        Record in
                                                                           operation manual. A filter   logbook
                                                                           change can affect flow
    Inlet Filter Change      Inspect monthly, change as required
                                                                           and pressure so a
                                                                           verification or full
                                                                           calibration is required.
                             As recommended by manufacturer or as        As per manufacturers        Record in
  Analyzer Maintenance
                              required                                     operation manual.            logbook
                                                                          Where necessary replace
                                                                           with new lines, tighten
                                                                           loose connections, clean
                                                                           manifold if required.
 Sample Path Inspection                                                                                Record in
                             Each monitor station visit                  Any alteration to the
   (Probe to Analyzer)                                                                                  logbook
                                                                           sample pathway should be
                                                                           accompanied by
                                                                           verification or full
                                                                           calibration.

11. Zero and Span Checks
Zero and span checks are required to verify analyzer performance between calibrations. These checks should be
performed in accordance with Section 6 of Part B1 of the BCFSM.
12. Calibration
Calibration should be performed in accordance with Section 6 of Part B1 of the BCFSM and the manufacturer’s
manual. Certain specifics of the NH3 analyzer calibration are as follows:


                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                 Page 111 of 206
A 3-stage calibration is required, which is unique to NH3 analyzers. The first stage is typical of other continuous gas
analyzer types and involves serial dilution of a NO standard to verify analyzer NO and NOX response.

In the second stage the NO2 response is verified by gas phase titration. Two levels of ozone are generated and
calibrated in the gas phase titration to verify the linearity of the analyzer. This involves titrating the NO standard
used in the first stage with a known concentration of ozone. The introduced ozone converts the equivalent amount
of NO into NO2, which is converted back into NO by the analyzer’s converter oven and read as NOx. As the NO and
NOX channels were calibrated and verified in the first stage, the analyzer’s response to the remaining NO, not
converted by ozone, can be accepted as accurate. Comparison of the introduced ozone concentration with the
analyzer’s NOx and NO response therefore allows for a determination of converter efficiency, and verification of the
NO2 channel.

In the third stage, a known concentration of NH3 is used to verify the catalytic conversion process of the analyzer.
Similar to the second stage of calibration, four different levels of NH3 are generated to verify the linearity of the
analyzer.
13. References
Alberta Environment (AENV) 2011. Standard Operating Procedure for NH3 Analyzers. AENV Air Monitoring and Audit
Centre.

Greater Vancouver Regional District (GVRD) 2006. Measurement of Ammonia (NH3) using Chemiluminescence
Ambient Air Monitoring Program Methods. Air Quality Policy and Management Division.

Thermo Fisher Scientific 2014. Model 17i Instruction Manual Chemiluminescence NH3 Analyzer.

United States (US) Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 2013. QA handbook for Air Pollution Measurement
Systems Volume II Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program. US EPA Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards Air
Quality Assessment Division.

Wood Buffalo Environment Association 2013. Procedures for Operating Continuous Ammonia (NH3) Analyzers.

Revision History: 0.0 (New document)

Approval




                              British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                              Page 112 of 206
        Monitoring Parameter:                         Standard Operating Procedure for the
         Formaldehyde                        Non-Continuous Measurement of Ambient Formaldehyde

      Revision No: Original                                    Reference No: SOP-09
   Revision Date: 05 May, 2020                   Parent Document: Part B1 – B.C. Field Sampling Manual

1. Introduction and Scope
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) provides operating guidelines and instructions for the non-continuous
active sampling of ambient formaldehyde using cartridge samplers, within the provincial jurisdiction of British
Columbia (B.C.).

Subsequent analysis of the sample by an analytical laboratory is required to complete the measurement of ambient
formaldehyde. The laboratory analysis procedure is not covered in detail within this SOP. For further information
regarding the laboratory analysis of formaldehyde see section 8 of the B.C. Environmental Laboratory Manual (B.C.
ENV, 2015).

This SOP forms part of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual (BCFSM). Part B - Air and Air Emissions Testing, of the BCFSM
provides additional information on Air Quality Monitoring that must be used in conjunction with the information
provided in this SOP. Installation and maintenance of a cartridge formaldehyde sampler within the provincial
jurisdiction of B.C. should be carried out with consideration to Part B of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual, the sampler
manufacturer’s manual/instructions, and this document.

The sampling method described in this SOP can be used to measure ambient concentrations of formaldehyde over
long durations. This method is suitable for durations of 1 to 24 hours when formaldehyde concentrations are low
(~1 ppb to 20 ppb), or short durations of 5 to 60 minutes, when concentrations are in the parts per million (ppm)
range. For longer monitoring durations (up to 7 days), passive monitoring or continuous methods should be
considered. This method is not compatible with personal sampling pumps due to the high pressure drop across the
cartridge.
2. Document Control
This Standard Operating procedure is a controlled document. Document control provides a measure of assurance
that the specifications and guidance are based on current information that has been scrutinized by a qualified
reviewer/s. Controlled documents are reviewed within a five year life cycle. Please ensure that the revision date
listed in the header of this document does not exceed five years.

This SOP and the B.C. Field Sampling Manual are available at: www2.gov.bc.ca.
3. Principle of the Sampling Method
Cartridge Sampler

Air is drawn through a sampling cartridge containing silica gel that is coated with 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazine (DNPH)
reagent. The sampler system draws air through the cartridge at a controlled flow rate that is generally between 0.5
l min-1 and 2 l min-1. Aldehydes and ketones, if present in the sample stream readily form stable derivatives which
are captured within the cartridge. During the sampling period the elapsed sampling time is recorded. When sampling
is complete the cartridge is sent for laboratory analysis by high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) to
determine the formaldehyde content. The flow rate and elapsed time are used to calculate the total sample volume
in cubic meters (m3). The mass of formaldehyde and the sample volume are used to calculate the average
formaldehyde concentration in micrograms per cubic meter (µg/m3) over the sampling period.




                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                           Page 113 of 206
4. Interferences
Potential common interferences include the presence of ozone in the sample, reagent contamination, sunlight,
ambient temperature, relative humidity and system leaks.

Ozone
The presence of ambient ozone in concentrations of 50 ppb and greater is known to interfere with the cartridge
sampling method. Ozone reacts with both the DNPH coating and the derivatives captured on the cartridge. To
minimize this interference an ozone denuder or scrubber (typically a copper tube coated with potassium iodide) can
be placed upstream of the sampling cartridge.

Reagent contamination
The DNPH reagent may be contaminated with formaldehyde. This potential interference can be minimized by
instructing the laboratory to determine impurity levels prior to use, and confirming that they are less than the
certification blank levels of 0.15 µg/cartridge.

Sunlight
Exposure of the cartridges to sunlight may cause artifacts. Sunlight exposure should be avoided during storage, and
during sampling by using a sampler shield.

Ambient temperature
High temperatures can cause loss of formaldehyde-DNPH derivatives. Cartridges should be stored and transported
at temperatures less than 4 degrees Celsius (°C) prior to, and following sampling. Ambient air temperatures during
sampling may also affect sample collection efficiency and a heated inlet probe is recommended for ambient
temperatures less than 15 °C.

Relative humidity
Very low (<10%) or high (>90%) humidity is reported to impact collection efficiency. Very low or high relative
humidity conditions also affect the performance of ozone denuders or scrubbers used in the sampling system. In
high humidity environments the scrubbers can become saturated. To avoid this potential interference a heated inlet
probe can be used.

System Leaks
Air leaks in the sampling system can result in reduced formaldehyde measurement. The formaldehyde sampler must
pass a leak check to produce valid results. Consult the manufacturer’s operation manual for leak check instructions
specific to the sampler.
5. Precision and Accuracy
Cartridge sampling measurements are affected by factors such as measurement height, meteorological conditions
and the laboratory’s analysis method.

The precision of a measurement is generally considered to be the ‘repeatability of the measurement’. The accuracy
of the measurement is generally considered to be a measure of the ‘deviation from true’. Determination of precision
and bias should be completed by the analytical laboratory as per their quality assurance/quality control (QA/QC)
procedures. During sampling at least one field blank should be used, or the number of blanks should be 10% of field
samples whichever is greater. The use of trip blanks and laboratory blanks is also recommended.
6. Recommended Equipment and Apparatus
The following instruments are commercially available and suitable for use within the provincial jurisdiction of B.C.:

       Xonteck Model 924 Toxic Air Sampler
       ATEC Model 2200 Toxic Air Sampler

                              British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                             Page 114 of 206
Depending on ambient sampling conditions, a heated inlet probe or dryer may be required. An ozone denuder or
scrubber should be used.

This list does not necessarily exclude other commercially available formaldehyde sampler systems recognized by the
United States (US) Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) Federal Reference and Equivalent Methods. It is highly
recommended however that you consult with the B.C. Ministry of Environment and Climate Change Strategy (ENV)
if you intend to deploy a sample system that is not listed above. Regardless of the instrument deployed all samplers
should meet the specifications described within this document.
7. Measurement Range and Sensitivity
Analysis range and sensitivity depend on the method employed by the laboratory and the volume of sample. The
typical measurement range for formaldehyde using this method is 10 ppb to 1 ppm.
8. Site Requirements
Sampling site specifications should be developed to ensure that the data obtained from the site satisfies the
requirements of intended or established sampling objectives. It is recommended that sampling site requirements
be established in consultation with the B.C. ENV to ensure that siting requirements are commensurate with sampling
objectives.

As a preliminary guideline site selection should consider and address: sampling objectives, representativeness of the
region, interference from the surrounding area, zone type (residential, commercial, industrial) of sampling location.

Refer to Section 2 of Part B1 of the BCFSM for further information on site selection method.

9. Installation Requirements
Follow sampler specific installation requirements discussed in the manufacturer’s manual.
The installation should also conform to the following:

    The sampler inlet should be located at a height of 2 m to 7 m above ground level.
    If the sampler is located on a roof or other structure the inlet should be at least 1 m from walls or parapets and
     positioned away from building vents or flues.
    The sampler should be located away from structures such as trees and buildings. The distance between any
     obstacle and the sampler should be at minimum, twice the height of the obstruction above the inlet.
    Air-flow should be unrestricted in 3 of the 4 wind quadrants.

10. Operational Requirements
Follow instrument specific operational requirements discussed in the manufacturer’s manual. In general the
following activities should be performed by the operator of a sampler:

        Action             Time/Frequency                      Description                            Record Keeping
                                             • Record start time, flow rate, sample volume,
                                               ambient temperature, ambient pressure and        •   Record in logbook
                                               relative humidity.                               •   Record available
                       •   At the start of
                                             • Record the date, time, location, measurement         information on the
     Sample Start          each sampling
                                               height, and cartridge identification and batch       Chain of Custody (COC)
                           period
                                               number.                                              form provided by the
                                             • Cartridges should be used within 30 days of          analytical laboratory.
                                               preparation by the laboratory.




                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                Page 115 of 206
                                                 • Record end and elapsed time, flow rate,
                                                   sample volume, ambient temperature,
                                                   ambient pressure and relative humidity.
                                                 • Record the date, time, location, measurement

                                                   height, and cartridge identification and batch
                                                   number.
                                                 • Note any instrument errors.

                                                 • Remove cartridge using polyethylene gloves,       •   Record in logbook
                         •   At end of             seal at ends using Teflon tape and follow the     •   Complete the COC as
     Sample Retrieval
                             sampling period       packing requirements of the cartridge                 required by the
                                                   supplier. Packing requirements could include          analytical laboratory.
                                                   the use of DNPH soaked filter paper within the
                                                   packaging.
                                                 • Ship in a box not a cooler (since the cooler

                                                   could contain formaldehyde).
                                                 • Refrigerate at 4 °C until analysis.

                                                 • Refrigeration period prior to analysis should

                                                   not exceed 2 weeks.

                         •   Each sampling       •   As per manufacturers operation manual.
                             event (or at        •   Leak rate should be within the tolerances       •    Record in logbook
        Leak Check
                             frequency stated        stated by the manufacturer (e.g. less than 2%
                             by manufacturer)        of full scale).

                         •   Quarterly or at
                             replacement
        Calibration
                             frequency stated    •   As per Section 12 of this SOP.                  •    Record in logbook
                             in manufacturer’s
                             manual
 • Check that time is
   within ± 5 min
   from true
 • Check pressure on

   vacuum manifold       •   Monthly             •   As per manufacturers operation manual           •    Record in logbook
 • Inspect sample

   inlet, tubing and
   power cord,
   replace if required
   Clean control box
                         •   Quarterly           •   As per manufacturers operation manual           •    Record in logbook
           filter
    Clean inside and
   outside of control    •   Quarterly           •   As per manufacturers operation manual           •    Record in logbook
    and pump boxes
                         •   Bi-annually or at
                             the replacement
     Check and replace
                             frequency stated    •   As per manufacturers operation manual           •    Record in logbook
      ozone scrubber
                             in manufacturer’s
                             manual
 Replace pump vanes      •   Annual              •   As per manufacturers operation manual           •    Record in logbook

11. Zero and Span Checks
This section is not applicable to this measurement method.
12. Calibration


                                 British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                    Page 116 of 206
Calibration should be performed in accordance with Section 6 of Part B1 of the BCFSM and following the
manufacturer’s manual. Certain specifics to a formaldehyde sampling system are as follows:
       Several parameters require calibration including flow, ambient temperature and ambient pressure.
       Calibration of the sampling system flow controller should be undertaken using a flow meter which is
        calibrated or certified annually against a National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) traceable
        standard.
       Similarly, temperature and pressure verification should be performed using a temperature and pressure
        standard which is calibrated or certified annually against a NIST traceable standard.
13. References
B.C. ENV 2016. British Columbia Environmental Laboratory Manual 2015 Edition. Section 8. Environmental
Monitoring, Reporting & Economics Knowledge Management Branch.

Environment Canada 2013. Determination of Carbonyl Compounds in Ambient Air Using Adsorbent Cartridge
Followed by High Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC). Method No. 1.01/2.8/M.

American Standard Test Method (ASTM) 2016. Standard Test Method for Determination of Formaldehyde and Other
Carbonyl Compounds in Air (Active Sampler Methodology). Designation D5197-16.

ATEC 2014. Model 2200 Toxic Air Sampler Operations and Maintenance Manual. Version 2.00.

Bay Area Air Quality Management District (BAAQMD) 2012. Standard Operating Procedure Data Mgt SOP 607 Toxics
924. Revision 607.2.00.

California Environmental Protection Agency Air Resources Board 2004. Standard Operating Procedures for Xontech
924 Toxics Air Sampler. AQSB SOP 801. First Edition.

US EPA 1999. Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Toxic Organic Compounds in Ambient Air.
Compendium Method TO-11A. Determination of Formaldehyde in Ambient Air Using Adsorbent Cartridge Followed
by High Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC) [Active Sampling methodology]. Center for Environmental
Research Information Office of Research and Development.

Revision History: 0.0 (New document)

Approval




                             British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                           Page 117 of 206
         Monitoring Parameter:                         Standard Operating Procedure for the
        Methane and                         Non-Continuous Measurement of Ambient Methane and Non-
   Non-Methane Hydrocarbons                     Methane Hydrocarbons Using Gas Chromatography
       Revision No: Original                                    Reference No: SOP-10
    Revision Date: 05 May, 2020                   Parent Document: Part B1 – B.C. Field Sampling Manual

1. Introduction and Scope
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) provides operating guidelines and instructions for the continuous ambient
monitoring of Methane and Non-Methane Hydrocarbons (NMHC), within the provincial jurisdiction of British
Columbia (B.C.).

This SOP forms part of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual (BCFSM). Part B - Air and Air Emissions Testing, of the BCFSM
provides additional information on Air Quality Monitoring that must be used in conjunction with the information
provided in this SOP. Installation and maintenance of a Methane/NMHC analyzer within the provincial jurisdiction
of B.C. should be carried out with consideration to Part B of the BCFSM, the analyzer manufacturer’s manual, and
this document.
2. Document Control
This Standard Operating Procedure is a controlled document. Document control provides a measure of assurance
that the specifications and guidance it provides are based on current information that has been scrutinized by a
qualified reviewer/s. Controlled documents are reviewed within a five year life cycle. Please ensure that the revision
date listed in the header of this document does not exceed five years.

This SOP and the B.C. Field Sampling Manual are available at: www2.gov.bc.ca.
3. Principle of the Measurement Method
Gas Chromatography (GC)

The principle detection and quantification method deployed for monitoring Methane and Non-Methane
Hydrocarbons (NMHC) in ambient air is gas chromatography (GC). Methane/NMHC analyzers use a semi-continuous
collection and analysis sequence that draws air samples into a separation column where it is pushed by an inert
carrier gas into a flame ionization detector (FID). Due to the differences in molecular weight and volatility the
sample’s various gas components are separated based on retention time.

Retention time is described as the time it takes for a component to travel though and emerge from the column.
Methane has a lower molecular weight and higher volatility than other hydrocarbons which results in a lower
retention time. For this reason methane is the first compound to emerge from the separation column. The Methane
is then directed to a flame ionization detector (FID). The signal produced by the FID is converted to a methane
concentration by comparing the response to a known concentration of a methane standard. Non-methane
hydrocarbons emerging later from the separation column produce an FID signal which is converted to an NMHC
concentration using comparisons with a known concentration of a propane standard. After the NMHC measurement
is complete, the analyzer initiates the next sample analysis.




                                 British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                            Page 118 of 206
Figure reference: Thermo Scientific, 2012

A typical gas chromatogram from a Thermo Scientific Model 55i Analyzer using 2 ppm each of methane and propane
(a NMHC) is shown in the figure above.
4. Interferences

Particulate Matter
The presence of particulate matter in air samples may interfere with Methane/NMHC analyzer response.
Interference by particulate matter can be minimized by using a particle filter at the sample inlet. The filter must have
a 2 µm diameter pore size and be made of an inert material such as Teflon.
5. Precision and Accuracy
The precision of an analysis is generally considered to be the ‘repeatability of the measurement’. This can be
confirmed through zero and span checks, and calibrations.

The accuracy of the sensor is generally considered to be a measure of the ‘deviation from true’. The accuracy of a
sensor can be checked by performing calibrations against a certified calibration standard mixture (See Sections 11
and 12). Accuracy can also be confirmed through periodic span checks and multipoint checks/calibrations.
6. Recommended Equipment and Apparatus
The following are common commercially available methane/NMHC analyzers suitable for use within the provincial
jurisdiction of B.C.:

        Thermo Scientific Direct Methane, Non-Methane Hydrocarbon Analyzer, Model 55i
        Synspec GC’s Alpha 115

This list does not necessarily exclude other commercially available Methane/NMHC analyzers, and analyzers
recognized by the United States (US) Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Federal Reference and Equivalent
Methods. In deed as technology advances, new analyzers will enter the market which may be suitable for use within
the provincial jurisdiction of B.C. It is highly recommended however that you consult with the B.C. Ministry of
Environment and Climate Change Strategy (ENV) if you intend to deploy Methane/NMHC analyzers that are not
listed above. Regardless of the instrument deployed, all analyzers should meet the specifications described within
this document.
7. Measurement Range and Sensitivity
Typical commercially available Methane/NMHC analyzers operate at user selectable ranges between 0 ppm and
5000 ppm; for B.C. ENV monitoring purposes analyzers should be set to a range of 0 ppm to 20 ppm for
Methane/NMHC.
                                     British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                         Page 119 of 206
The detection limit is determined by instrument type but is generally around 0.05 ppm.
8. Site Requirements
Monitoring site specifications should be developed to ensure that the data obtained from the site satisfies the
requirements of intended or established monitoring objectives. It is highly recommended that monitoring site
requirements be established in consultation with the B.C. ENV to ensure that siting requirements are commensurate
with monitoring objectives.

As a preliminary guideline site selection should consider and address monitoring objectives, representativeness of
the region, interference from the surrounding area, and zone type (residential, commercial, industrial) of the
monitoring location.

Refer to Section 2 of Part B1 of the BCFSM for further information on site selection.
9. Installation Requirements
Follow analyzer specific installation requirements discussed in the analyzer manufacturer’s manual. The installation
should also conform to the following:
       The monitoring station’s sampling inlet and manifold shall meet the requirements of the most recent version
        of the National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Program’s Monitoring and Quality Assurance/Quality
        Control Guidelines Section 8.2 and Section 8.3.
       The ¼ inch diameter connection tubing from the manifold to the analyzer inlet must be made of Teflon or
        equivalent material for chemical inertness.
       A Teflon particulate filter capable of removing at least 99% of 1 µm diameter and larger particles must be
        placed in the sampling line upstream of the analyzer, unless the analyzer is equipped with a similar internal
        filter. The filter holder should be constructed of an inert material (e.g. Teflon, stainless steel).
       A data acquisition system (‘DAS’ or ‘data logger’) should be connected to the analyzer to record or download
        the measurement data from the analyzer. If an analog data logger is used, it must be set to match the voltage
        range of the analyzer, typically at 1 V or 10 V full scale. It must be ensured that the analog output matches
        the digital output displayed on the analyzer. The data logger must also record and monitor any alarm
        conditions of the analyzer.
       The analyzer must be placed in a weather resistant enclosure that is vented, heated and cooled to maintain
        a stable temperature preferably in the range of 20 °C and 30 °C but must be capable of maintaining the
        operating temperature range specified by the manufacturer. Enclosure temperatures should not deviate by
        more than 2 °C over a one hour period.
10. Operational Requirements
The following activities should be performed by the operator of a continuous automated Methane/NMHC
analyzer.

        Action                   Time/Frequency                            Description                Record Keeping
                                                               As per manufacturers operation
    Analyzer Range                                                                                    Record in
                        After installation                     manual. Monitoring range should be
        Set Up                                                                                         logbook
                                                                0 ppm to 20 ppm.
                        After installation (or relocation)
                         following a 24 h to 72 h warm up
                         period;
                        After analyzer
      Multipoint                                                                                      Record in
                         repairs/maintenance that may          As per Section 12 of this SOP.
      Verification                                                                                     logbook
                         affect performance of the
                         instrument;
                        When zero check exceeds ±
                         0.1ppm;

                               British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                Page 120 of 206
                          When span drift is ≥ ± 10% of
                           reference value;
                          For new analyzers, after the first
                           3 months of operation;
                          Bi-annually if span checks are
                           conducted daily – or when any
                           threshold above is reached
                           (whichever happens first);
                          Quarterly if span checks are
                           conducted less than daily – or
                           when any threshold above is
                           reached (whichever happens
                           first).
    Zero and Span                                                As per manufacturers operation
                          Daily preferred, weekly minimum
     Verification                                                 manual.
  Verify Operational                                             As per manufacturers operation
                              Each monitor station visit
     Parameters                                                   manual.
  Check Support Gas                                              Check gas cylinder pressures and          Record in
                              Each monitor station visit
      Pressures                                                   replace if they drop below 500 psi.        logbook
                                                                 As per manufacturers operation
                             Inspect monthly, change as           manual. A filter change can affect
   Inlet Filter Change
                                      required                    flow and pressure so a verification or
                                                                  full calibration is required.
      Analyzer           As recommended by manufacturer          As per manufacturers operation            Record in
     Maintenance                  or as required                  manual.                                    logbook
                                                                 Where necessary replace with new
                                                                  lines, tighten loose connections,
      Sample Path
                                                                  clean manifold if required.               Record in
  Inspection (Probe to    Each monitor station visit
                                                                 Any alteration to the sample               logbook
       Analyzer)
                                                                  pathway should be accompanied by
                                                                  verification or full calibration.

11. Zero and Span Checks
Zero and span checks are required to verify analyzer performance between calibrations. These checks should be
performed in accordance with Section 6 of Part B1 of the BCFSM.
12. Calibration
Calibration should be performed in accordance with Section 6 of Part B1 of the BCFSM and following the
manufacturer’s manual. Methane/NMHC analyzers are typically calibrated using the dilution method.
13. References
National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Program. Monitoring and Quality Assurance/Quality Control Guidelines.

Alberta Environment (AENV) 2011. Standard Operating Procedure for Measurement of Methane/Non-Methane
Hydrocarbons Using FID Detection. AENV Air Monitoring and Audit Centre.

CARB 2002. Standard Operating Procedure for the Determination of non-Methane Organic Compounds in Ambient
Air by Gas Chromatography Using Dual Capillary Columns and Flame Ionization Detection. Northern Laboratory
Branch Monitoring and Laboratory Division.

Synspec 2010. Synspec GC’s Alpha 115 and Alpha 116 Methane/Total Non Methane HydroCarbons Operator manual.
Thermo Scientific 2012. Model 55i Instruction Manual Direct Methane, Non-Methane Hydrocarbon Analyzer.




                                 British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                    Page 121 of 206
United States Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA) 2013. QA handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems
Volume II Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program. US EPA Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards Air Quality
Assessment Division.

Wood Buffalo Environmental Association (WBEA) 2013. Procedures for Operating Continuous Methane/Non-
Methane Hydrocarbon Analyzers.

Revision History: 0.0 (New document)

Approval




                              British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                           Page 122 of 206
           Monitoring Parameters:
          Benzene, Toluene,                                Standard Operating Procedure for the
    Ethylbenzene & Xylene (BTEX)                      Semi-Continuous Measurement of Ambient BTEX

         Revision No: Original                                     Reference No: SOP-11
      Revision Date: 05 May, 2020                    Parent Document: Part B1 – B.C. Field Sampling Manual

1. Introduction and Scope
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) provides operating guidelines and instructions for the semi-continuous
ambient monitoring of hydrocarbons including Benzene, Toluene, Ethylbenzene and Xylene (BTEX) within the
provincial jurisdiction of British Columbia (B.C.).

This SOP forms part of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual (BCFSM). Part B - Air and Air Emissions Testing, of the BCFSM
provides additional information on Air Quality Monitoring that must be used in conjunction with the information
provided in this SOP. Installation and maintenance of a BTEX analyzer within the provincial jurisdiction of B.C. should
be carried out with consideration to Part B of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual, the analyzer manufacturer’s manual,
and this document.

2. Document Control
This Standard Operating Procedure is a controlled document. Document control provides a measure of assurance
that the specifications and guidance it provides are based on current information that has been scrutinized by a
qualified reviewer/s. Controlled documents are reviewed within a five year life cycle. Please ensure that the revision
date listed in the header of this document does not exceed five years.

This SOP and the B.C. Field Sampling Manual are available at: www2.gov.bc.ca.

3. Principle of the Measurement Method
Gas Chromatography (GC) with a Photoionization Detector (PID) or Flame Ionization (FID) Detector

The principle detection and quantification method deployed for ambient concentrations of BTEX is gas
chromatography (GC).

The analyzers used in the semi-continuous measurement of BTEX repeatedly collect and analyze small volumes of
ambient air (the ‘sample’) that are drawn into the analyzer using a vacuum pump. Each sample enters a separation
column which consists of two sequential columns; a stripper column and an analysis column. The two columns are
identical but have different lengths. In these columns the gas components (compounds) of a sample differentiate
based on their specific physical properties (e.g. molecular mass) and chemical properties (e.g. volatility). The specific
properties of a gas compound determine the speed at which they travel through the columns. For example,
compounds with the lowest molecular weight and highest volatility travel the fastest through the separation column.
These compounds have the lowest column retention times and as such, are the first to emerge from the separation
column. Based on these principles, compounds are identified using retention times.

The concentration of compounds emerging from the column are quantified by a detector; commonly a
photoionization detector (PID). Photoionization detectors use ultraviolet radiation to ionize gas components. The
resulting ions produce an electrical current that elicits a response commensurate with the concentration of the
ionized gas. Photoionization detectors are capable of achieving a high resolution at low concentration ranges;
typically in the parts per trillion (ppt) to parts per million (ppm) range.

Following each sample cycle, the sample path is flushed with clean air in preparation for the next sample.


                                    British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                           Page 123 of 206
4. Interferences

Particluate Matter
The presence of particulate matter in an air sample may interfere with a BTEX analyzer’s response. Interference by
particulate matter can be minimized using a particle filter at the sample inlet. The particle filter must have a 2 µm
diameter pore size and be made of an inert material such as Teflon.

Water Vapour
The presence of water vapour may result in an inconsistent detector response. This potential interference can be
mitigated by using a dryer and ultra-pure carrier gas. The sample cycle should be sufficient to clear all compounds
from the column before proceeding to the next sample cycle.

5. Precision and Accuracy
The precision of an analysis is generally considered to be the ‘repeatability of the measurement’. This can be
confirmed through zero and span checks, and calibrations.

The accuracy of the sensor is generally considered to be a measure of the ‘deviation from true’. The accuracy of a
sensor can be checked by performing calibrations against a certified calibration standard mixture (See Sections 11
and 12 of this SOP). Accuracy can also be confirmed through periodic span checks and multipoint
checks/calibrations.

6. Recommended Equipment and Apparatus
The following is a commercially available BTEX analyzer suitable for use within the provincial jurisdiction of B.C.:

       Syntech Spectras Analyser GC 955

This list does not necessarily exclude other commercially available BTEX analyzers, and analyzers recognized by
United States (US) Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) Federal Reference and Equivalent Methods. In deed as
technology advances, new analyzers will enter the market which may be suitable for use within the provincial
jurisdiction of B.C. It is highly recommended however that you consult with the B.C. ENV if you intend to deploy
BTEX analyzers that are not listed above. Regardless of the instrument deployed, all analyzers should meet the
specifications described within this document.

7. Measurement Range and Sensitivity
Typical commercially available BTEX analyzers operate at a user selectable range of ppt to % range, depending on
customizable detection options. For B.C. ENV monitoring purposes analyzers should be set to the ppt to ppm range.

8. Site Requirements
Monitoring site specifications should be developed to ensure that the data obtained from the site satisifies the
requirements of intended or established monitoring objectives. It is recommended that monitoring site
requirements be established in consultation with the B.C. ENV to ensure that siting requirements are commensurate
with monitoring objectives.

As a preliminary guideline site selection should consider and address: monitoring objectives, representativeness of
the region, interference from the surrounding area, and zone type (residential, commercial, industrial) of the
monitoring location.

Refer to Section 2 of Part B1 of the BCFSM for further information on site selection.


                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                              Page 124 of 206
9. Installation Requirements
Follow analyzer specific installation requirements discussed in the analyzer manufacturer’s manual.
The installation should also conform to the following:
       The monitoring station’s sampling inlet and manifold shall meet the requirements of the most recent version
        of the National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Program’s Monitoring and Quality Assurance/Quality
        Control Guidelines Section 8.2 and Section 8.3.
       The ¼ inch diameter connection tubing from the manifold to the analyzer inlet must be made of Teflon or
        an equivalent material for chemical inertness.
       A Teflon particulate filter capable of removing at least 99% of 1 µm diameter and larger particles must be
        placed in the sampling line upstream of the analyzer, unless the analyzer is equipped with a similar internal
        filter. The filter holder should be constructed of an inert material (e.g. Teflon, stainless steel, aluminum).
       A data acquisition system (‘DAS’ or ‘data logger’) should be connected to the analyzer to record or download
        the measurement data from the analyzer. If an analog data logger is used, it must be set to match the voltage
        range of the analyzer, typically at 1 V or 10 V full scale. It must be ensured that the analog output matches
        the digital output displayed on the analyzer. The datalogger must also record and monitor any alarm
        conditions of the analyzer.
       The analyzer must be placed in a weather resistant enclosure that is vented, heated and cooled to maintain
        a stable temperature preferably in the range of 20°C to 30°C but must be capable of maintaining the
        operating temperature range specified by the manufacturer. Enclosure temperatures should not deviate by
        more than 2°C over a one hour period.
       A permeation dryer should be placed in the sampling line upstream of the analyzer.

10. Operational Requirements
The following activities should be performed by the operator of a semi-continuous automated BTEX analyzer.
      Action                        Time/Frequency                              Description                 Record Keeping
                                                                    As per manufacturers operation
  Analyzer Range                                                                                            Record in
                       After installation                           manual. Monitoring range should
      Set Up                                                                                                 logbook
                                                                     be 0 ppb to 1000 ppb.
                       After installation (or relocation)
                        following a 24 h to 72 h warm up period;
                       After analyzer repairs/maintenance that
                        may affect performance of the
                        instrument;
                       When zero check exceeds ± 0.1 ppm;
                       When span drift is ≥ ± 10% of reference
                        value;
    Multipoint                                                                                              Record in
                       For new analyzers after the first 3         As per Section 11 of this SOP
    Verification                                                                                             logbook
                        months of operation;
                       Bi-annually if span checks are conducted
                        daily – or when any threshold above is
                        reached (whichever happens first);
                       Quarterly if span checks are conducted
                        less than daily – or when any of the
                        thresholds above is reached (whichever
                        happens first).
   Zero and Span                                                    As per manufacturers operation
                       Daily preferred, weekly minimum
    Verification                                                     manual
 Verify Operational                                                 As per manufacturers operation         Record in
                       Each monitoring station visit
    Parameters                                                       manual                                  logbook
  Check Support                                                     Check gas cylinder pressures and
                       Each monitoringing station visit
   Gas Pressures                                                     replace if they drop below 500 psi

                                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                  Page 125 of 206
                                                                 As per manufacturers operation
                                                                  manual.
 Inlet Filter Change    Inspect monthly, change as required     A filter change can affect flow and
                                                                  pressure so a verification or full
                                                                  calibration is required.
    Analyzer            As recommended by manufacturer or as    As per manufacturers operation           Record in
   Maintenance           required                                 manual                                    logbook
                                                                 Where necessary replace with new
                                                                  lines, tighten loose connections,
    Sample Path
                                                                  clean manifold if required.              Record in
 Inspection (Probe      Each monitoringd station visit
                                                                 Any alteration to the sample              logbook
    to Analyzer)
                                                                  pathway should be accompanied
                                                                  by verification or full calibration.

11. Zero and Span Checks
Zero and span checks are required to verify the analyzers performance between calibrations. These checks should
be performed in accordance with Section 6 of Part B1 of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual.

12. Calibration
Calibration should be performed in accordance with Section 6 of Part B1 of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual and the
manufacturer’s manual.

13. References
National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) Program. Monitoring and Quality Assurance/Quality Control Guidelines.

Government of Alberta 2015. Ambient Air Monitoring Performance Specification Standards – Continuous Analyzers
VOCs (BTEX and Styrene).

Syntech 2011. Syntech Spectras Analyser GC 955 – Manual for the Syntech Spectras GC955-series.

United States Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA) 2013. QA handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems
Volume II Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program. US EPA Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards Air Quality
Assessment Division.

US EPA 2013. Method 18 – Measurement of Gaseous Organic Compound Emissions by Gas Chromatography.

Revision History: 0.0 (New document)

Approval




                                    British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                               Page 126 of 206
           Monitoring Parameters:
        Ambient Air Quality &                              Standard Operating Procedure for
         Meteorological Data                     Ambient Air Quality and Meteorological Data Validation

         Revision No: Original                                    Reference No: SOP-12
      Revision Date: 05 May, 2020                   Parent Document: Part B1 – B.C. Field Sampling Manual

1. Introduction and Scope
This Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) provides instruction for the data validation of air quality monitoring and
meteorological data within the provincial jurisdiction of British Columbia (BC).

Guidelines produced by the National Air Pollution Surveillance (NAPS) program set a national standard for data
validation which are incorporated in this document.
2. Document Control
This Standard Operating Procedure is a controlled document. Document control provides a measure of assurance
that the specifications and guidance provided by it is based on current information that has been scrutinized by a
qualified reviewer/s. Controlled documents are reviewed within a five year life cycle. Please ensure that the revision
date listed in the header of this document does not exceed five years.

This SOP and the B.C. Field Sampling Manual are available at: www2.gov.bc.ca.
3. Overview
Many factors related to instruments and data acquisition systems may affect data validity, and it is difficult to
identify or adjust the anomalous data through a single step. As such, data validation is completed in four steps that
subject the data to increasingly detailed levels of scrutiny and analysis. The first level of data validation, Level 0,
provides a review of data completeness and validity as it relates to station operations. Level 1 provides assurance of
data rationality and consistency specific to station operation and parameter. Level 2 verifies data validity in a
broader scope such as pollutant relationship and buddy site comparison, and Level 3 assesses the data using
advanced techniques such as modelling and statistical tests.

Figure 1 illustrates ENV’s data validation process. Table 1 summarizes data validation activities, frequency, and
responsibilities.




 Figure 1. Timeline schematic of the data validation process
 for ENV’s air quality monitoring and meteorological data.



                                    British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                          Page 127 of 206
Level 0 - a combination of automated data invalidation actions which occur in the data logger, analyzer, central
polling system, and manual data verification actions taken by site operators and data validation specialists. Level 0
data validation activities are conducted at the highest frequency of near-real time to weekly.

Level 1 - a collaborative and continuous effort between the data validation specialist and site operator. Level 1
validation involves a review of calibration results, logbook entries and an assessment of data anomalies. These
activities which occur on a monthly to quarterly basis focus on a detailed identification of data issues based on
parameter and instrument-specific behaviour, and a correlation of data with station activities. This function requires
a technical understanding of instrumentation and factors affecting instrument performance and data quality. The
Level 1 data validation process provides the most detailed attention to individual parameters. Detailed electronic
logbook entries provided by site operators is a critical component of this process.

Level 2 – occurs on a semi-annual or annual frequency. The Level 2 validation process includes the generation and
distribution of statistical summaries to site operators and primary data users including ENVs Air Quality (AQ)
Meteorologists and the Clean Air Group. Level 2 data validation activities are also performed by external agencies
who transmit their data annually (overwriting all autopolled data for their sites). Level 2 validation is a pre-requisite
for verified data applicable for Canadian Ambient Air Quality Standards (CAAQS) reporting and decision making.

Upon completion of Level 2 validation, both imported and validated data are certified with a Final Edit attribute
which locks the data from editing. Data validation specialists have administrative rights to unlock this data.

Level 3 – provides an annual independent evaluation of validated data prior to publication. Level 3 validation is
performed by ENV prior to publishing the B.C. Lung report, and the importation of data from B.C. by Environment
and Climate Canada which generally occurs in June of the following year.

Table 1. Verification and Validation activities and frequency of execution.




                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                               Page 128 of 206
Level 0 Verification
Validation Activities                        Responsibility           Frequency      Description

                                                                                     Configured at the local station logger and
Digital monitor status validation         Local station logger     Near Real-time    includes automated flags based on
                                                                                     instrument status.

                                            Central polling                          Includes automated flagging and data
Automated range check                                                  Hourly
                                               system                                correction for out-of-range values

                                                                                     Includes use of website, DrDashboard
Overall system and communications                                                    and "Last Received" status to determine
                                                 ENV                   Hourly
check                                                                                status of communications, instruments,
                                                                                     and the entire system
                                                                                     Includes      reviewing      instrument
Review of diagnostics data and
                                             Site operator          Daily - weekly   diagnostics to verify proper operation,
investigation of suspicious hourly data
                                                                                     and review sub-hourly data (ENV sites)
                                                                                     Includes automated email alerts sent by
Review of alarms and alerts
                                             Site operator          Daily - weekly   the Central Polling system to warn of
(automated email, AQHI+)
                                                                                     instrument issues
Review of verification/calibration
                                             Site operator          Daily - weekly   Check daily zero and span values
results

                                                                                    Includes remotely checking the status of
                                                                   During remote
                                                                                    the instrument and the corresponding
Station/instrument status check              Site operator       checks and station
                                                                                    data, and visiting the station and
                                                                        visits
                                                                                    inspecting the site and instruments.
Level 1 Validation
Validation Activities                        Responsibility           Frequency      Description
                                                 ENV/
Review of Level 0 Verification                                   Monthly-Quarterly Review automated invalidation
                                             Site operator
                                                                                     Manual review of logbook entries and
Review of logbook entries                        ENV             Monthly-Quarterly
                                                                                     adding/removing data flags
Review of operational and instrument             ENV/                                Review any instrument-specific
                                                                 Monthly-Quarterly
parameters                                   Site operator                           operational limitations
                                                                                   Includes baseline adjustments, below
Adjustment of data and adding                                                      zero adjustments,and derived parameter
                                                 ENV             Monthly-Quarterly
comments                                                                           relationship check, and consolidation of
                                                                                   logbook entries into data edit
                                                                   Quarterly/Semi-   Verify previous data            based      on
Review of calibration/audit results              ENV
                                                                       annual        calibration/audit results
Level 2 Validation
Validation Activities                        Responsibility           Frequency      Description

Review of Level 1 Validation                     ENV                Semi-annual      Review of Level 1 Validation
Review of data                                ENV/site                               Creation of statistical summaries. Requires
summary/statistics/compare historical       operators/AQ         Semi-annual/annual input from stakeholders, site operators for
data                                        meteorologists                           data outliers and data-affecting events

Examination of meteorological data        AQ meteorologist             Annual

                                    British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                    Page 129 of 206
 Examination of relationships between
                                           AQ meteorologist              Annual
 pollutants
 Comparison of buddy sites                 AQ meteorologist              Annual
                                              EMRE/AQ
 Rejection of outlier data                                               Annual
                                             meteorologist
 Level 3 Validation
 Validation Activities                       Responsibility          Frequency          Description

                                                                                        Includes the State of the Air Report
                                                                                        created annually by the ENV Clean Air
                                          Third party/science                           group. This report involves detailed
 Independent third-party review                                          Annual
                                               specialists                              statistical analysis on the historical
                                                                                        context, and in the context related to
                                                                                        public health (ENV sites)

                                          Third party/science
 Dataset comparison                                                  As needed
                                               specialists
 Analysis using models and statistical    Third party/science
                                                                     As needed
 tests                                         specialists
                                          Third party/science
 Examination of meteorological data                                  As needed
                                               specialists
 Communication of potential issues
                                            All stakeholders         As needed
 with primary validators

4. Data Validation Tools and Resources
The tools and resources available for data validation are listed in Table 2. These include web-based applications and
data that are accessible to the general public, and specialized software that are available inside the ENV network.
Other applications can be deployed on-site with physical access to the station’s datalogger, or remotely via remote
terminal connections.

Personnel performing data validation are not limited to the resources listed in Table 2. Open source resources such
as R Programming Language, specialized software packages (e.g., SAS, SPSS), and standard spreadsheet applications
are available and capable of facilitating these tasks.

Table 2. Tools and Resources ENV Staff Used for Data Validation
 Resource                Description                                      User/Access         Validation Level
 Envidas Ultimate        Displays current data from within the
                                                                          Site operator       Level 0
 Viewer                  station’s logger
 Envidas Ultimate        Displays data archived in the station’s
                                                                          Site operator       Level 0
 Reporter                logger
                         Contains most recent 2 weeks of sub-
 Minute Data Feed1                                                        ENV Staff           Level 0
                         hourly data
 Minute Data             HTML summary of sub-hourly data, daily
                                                                          AQ Tech             Level 0
 Summary2                zero/span checks
                         Tool for data retrieval and basic to
 Envista ARM                                                              ENV Staff           Levels 0,1,2,3
                         advanced analysis
 Envistaweb  3
                         Public version of Envista ARM                    Public              Levels 0,1,2,3
 Open Data Portal        .csv data of unverified hourly data (year-to-
                                                                          Public              Level 0,1,2
 (unverified data)4      date)
 Open Data Portal        .csv data of validated hourly data (after
                                                                          Public              Level 2, 3
 (verified data)5        Level 2)

                                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                       Page 130 of 206
                                                                                  ENV System
 DrDashboard6                  Snapshot of current system status                               Level 0
                                                                                  Group
 SAS Summaries7                Statistical summary of annual data                 ENV Staff    Level 2,3
1 ftp://ftp.env.gov.bc.ca/pub/outgoing/AIR/MinuteData/
2 ftp://ftp.env.gov.bc.ca/pub/outgoing/AIR/MinuteDataValidation/
3 https://envistaweb.env.gov.bc.ca/
4 ftp://ftp.env.gov.bc.ca/pub/outgoing/AIR/Hourly_Raw_Air_Data/
5 ftp://ftp.env.gov.bc.ca/pub/outgoing/AIR/AnnualSummary/
6 file share \\sfp.idir.bcgov\s140\S40036\Air\Operations ORCS\Data\DR DashBoard
7 ftp://ftp.env.gov.bc.ca/pub/outgoing/AIR/SAS_SUMMARIES/


5. Level 0 Verification
Section 3 of this SOP provides an overview of the Level 0 verification process which includes all of the activities listed
in Table 1. This section provides additional information about the automated verification activities performed during
the Level 0 verification process including procedures for manually flagging data.

Automated validation processes are configured within a stations data logger. These processes utilize a ‘digital
monitor status’ that is triggered by the self-diagnostics features found in gas and particle analyzers (Table 3).
Automated validation processes ensure that measurements are performed under acceptable operating conditions.
Whenever instruments operate outside of acceptable conditions, a status flag is generated. All of ENV’s core stations
are equipped with Envidas Ultimate dataloggers which are capable of capturing and applying these flags. Other
loggers, such as the ESC-8816, 8832 and Campbell Scientific, do not have this capability but can be configured to
report high or low range values for readings that are invalid. The ENV’s data collection system is not able to collect
zero, span or logbook entries from all logger makes and models and as such consultation with ENV is strongly
recommended prior to acquiring a data logging system.

Digital monitor status items are specific to an analyzer’s make and model, and are only enabled for those parameters
that may indicate invalid data. Table 3 lists activated flags by instrument type. The activated flags are specific to
sample flow and pressure, detector temperature, and detector conditions.

Table 3. Standard Digital Monitor Status Validation in Envidas Ultimate for BC ENV stations.




                                        British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                             Page 131 of 206
The Central Polling system also performs automated invalidation based on range checks and forced zero that are
applied to the database as a phase of each hourly polling cycle. Automated validation criteria are standardized based
on instruments and parameters. For particulate matter (PM), PM2.5 and PM10 are automatically invalid when values
are below -3.49 µg/m3 and -9.98 µg/m3 respectively and above 985 µg/m3. Forced zeroing of PM is configured to
remove the negative values from 0 to -3.49 µg/m3 for PM2.5 and 0 to -9.98 µg/m3 for PM10. Gas analyzers are not
configured for auto-invalidation but have an above/below alert system triggered by hourly averages below -5 ppb
and values above the 99th percentile for a particular station. When activated, the site’s operator receives an email
notification of the unusual high or low value.

Level 0 verification includes station and instrument checks. Whenever data-impacting issues are detected, site
operators should mark down the instrument channels to prevent reporting erroneous data to the general public. In
addition a centrally generated alert system is configured to notify site operators of unusually high or low values. The
ENV Data Group also regularly checks station and instrument status, and will communicate suspected issues.
In order to avoid publishing erroneous data, site operators are required to regularly check stations, alerts, and ENV
Data group emails.

            o   Envidas Ultimate loggers: Use Envidas Viewer to mark down the channel at the station; if required,
                access the terminal remotely.
            o   ESC loggers: Data can be marked down from the configuration settings of the logger panel.


                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                              Page 132 of 206
            o   Loggers without data flagging capability: contact the ENV Data Group to request channels be
                marked down centrally. Once analyzer function is restored, contact the ENV Data Group to remove
                the flag.

6. Level 1 Validation Overview
The original theoretical foundation of the Level 1 validation process performed by ENV was based on the “Ambient
Air Monitoring Protocol for PM2.5 and Ozone” (CCME, 2011) and included operational and instrument specifications
considerations.

Level 1 data validation is performed by the Air Data Quality Assurance Specialist (ADQAS) who works closely with
operators to help ensure that their instruments are working properly, and that data are annotated and, when
necessary, adjusted appropriately. Validation logs are maintained in an Excel spreadsheet that lists all stations and
their active analyzers.
6.1 Level 1 General Validation Procedure

The following Level 1 validation activities are performed by the Air Data Quality Assurance Specialist (ADQAS):

1. Review field records - online logbook within Envista ARM for all ENV stations and a few permittee sites and
       electronic operator reports sent by email by most of the permittee sites. Contact operators to obtain reports
       that have been delayed for over three months.

        NOTES: Envista ARM logs are of a uniform format whereas reports sent by email are customized by the site
        operators and as such are stylistically inconsistent. When Level 1 validation is complete all electronic
        permittee reports are saved in an archive file share listed chronologically by station.

2. Review AQSLog - determine which analyzers are active for the station under review. Open the corresponding
       edit table in Envista ARM. Separate data streams by parameter and parameter type (e.g., gas). Each type of
       data is handled in a separate edit table, as the three types of parameters follow different validation and
       adjustment protocols.

3. Review screening flags - assigned during Level 0 verification. Reconcile flags with field records. Contact air
       technicians/operators if issues are found. Review operational acceptance limits for each
       parameter/analyzer, and determine if any data should be invalidated due to instrument-specific operational
       limitations.

4. Review all gaseous parameters - daily zero/span and multi-point calibration reports provided by site operators,
       and audit reports provided by the ENV Air Audit Team (where applicable). Review all information sources to
       ensure measurement uncertainty remained within the acceptance criteria prescribed in the NAPS
       guidelines.

5. Ensure data - are annotated appropriately if special actions were taken according to field reports, e.g. monthly
       calibration, regular maintenance, ENV audit, etc. Outliers or extreme values are investigated as follows:

        a) check 1-minute data to verify if the pattern is consistent;

        b) consult with regional technician/AQ meteorologist to check if an exceptional event occurred;

        c) if uncertain, keep values valid and flag for review under Level 2 validation.



                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                            Page 133 of 206
6.   Adjust data - apply appropriate methods to adjust data if necessary. Adjustments can include outlier
        disqualification, baseline adjustments, below zero adjustments, and parameter relationship preservation.
        Baseline/drift adjustments are usually performed for an entire month or from calibration to calibration
        depending on presence/absence of zero drift. Baseline adjustments are performed prior to adjustments of
        negative values to zero.

 The general procedure for baseline adjustments of gas analyzer data is as follows:

        a) Plot a timeseries of hourly data for the pollutant and time period (typically one month) under review.
        Adjust the range of the y-axis to -1 to 10 ppb (-1 to 2 ppb for CO). Review the timeseries for zero drift (i.e. a
        trend in daily minimum concentration over days/weeks).

        b) Plot the daily zero/span checks for the time period under review to confirm if zero drift has occurred.

        c) Review zero values measured during multi-point verifications (conducted by the site operator) to verify if
        zero drift is caused by malfunction of the instrument or depletion of scrubber used for zero checks.

        d) For cases where baseline drift has occurred, a constant offset is applied over the affected period (i.e.
        stepwise adjustment). The magnitude of the offset is typically the average daily minimum concentration (for
        the parameter and period of interest). However, the minimum daily zero check value and the zero value
        from the most recent multi-point verification (conducted by the site operator) must be reviewed for
        verification.

        e) All negative values remaining after the baseline adjustment should be adjusted to zero.

These procedures are applied only when instrument issues are absent. If there is no indication of instrument issue
in the logbook and zero checks are drifting or noisy, confirm with the site operator that the instrument was working
properly. If no operational issues are reported, professional judgement needs to be applied to determine if the
noise/drift is excessive. If so, data may be invalidated. In these cases, the site operators should be informed so that
the issue can be investigated and repaired.

Refer to section 5.2 for additional pollutant-specific information to be used in conjunction with this procedure. PM
validation procedures differ from gasous analyzers and are covered in section 5.2.

7. Run a monthly matrix report - detailing each hour’s reading against the day of the month (hour for the columns
and date for the rows in a month, the descriptive statistics on daily basis or on monthly basis for the same hour are
summarized in the report):

        a) check the lowest values for the month for those ambient analyzers that should not exhibit negative values;
        and

        b) confirm consistency of diurnal patterns within the month.

8. Mark data - with Final Validation Edits in Envista ARM validation settings.

6.2 Level 1 Validation Procedure for Criteria Ambient Air Pollutants

NO/NO2/NOx




                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                               Page 134 of 206
     1. If NO/NOx zero checks are ≤ ±0.3 ppb, no adjustments are required with the exception of when negative
        hourly values (NO/NO2/NOx) are observed;

     2. If NO and/or NOx zero checks are > ±0.3 ppb, apply zero baseline adjustments for the affected channel(s) as
        described in Step 6 of Section 5.1. NO and NOx are adjusted first. NO2 is adjusted if necessary, to maintain
        the relationship between parameters (NO2 = NOx – NO). If a zero baseline adjustment is performed to one
        channel, then the adjustment must be performed on one or both of the other channels to ensure the
        relationship is preserved;

        Note: The NOx validation process was implemented in 2017. Baseline adjustments prior to implementation
        were only performed for NO and NO2 with a neglection of the relationship preservance.

     3. If a few small negative values (e.g. -0.1 ppb) are found, adjust them to 0 using a filter function. If negative
        values are many and relatively large, baseline adjustments would be performed on affected channels based
        on an evaluation of zero checks and the most recent multi-point calibration results.

Ozone

Evaluate the diurnal pattern to ensure that the highest concentrations occur between mid-afternoon and early
evening, and the lowest concentrations occur in the early morning. Perform the baseline adjustment procedure as
described in Step 6 of Section 5.1.

     1. If daily zero performance checks are ≤ ±0.5 ppb, no adjustments are necessary unless negative hourly values
        are present (note: negative O3 raw data readings are rare);

     2. If daily zero performance checks are > ±0.5 ppb, zero adjustments are applied according to Step 6 of Section
        5.1.

SO2/TRS

SO2/TRS concentrations are expected to be close to 0 ppb most of the time.

     1. If daily zero performance check values are ≤ ±0.3 ppb, baseline adjustments are not required. Adjust
        negative values to 0;

     2. If daily zero performance check values are > ±0.3 ppb, baseline adjustments are required. Follow the
        procedure outlined in Step 6 of Section 5.1.

CO

CO analyzers deployed in ENV stations perform an auto zero correction every 12 hours. The automated adjustments
are reviewed to ensure the reliability of zero data collected during daily performance checks. Follow the baseline
adjustment procedure outlined in Step 6 of Section 5.1.

Note: CO values below 0.1 ppm are unusual; accordingly CO baseline adjustments are based on 0.1 ppm instead of
0.

     1. If zero-check values are ≤ ±0.1 ppm adjustments are not required;




                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                              Page 135 of 206
    2. If zero-check values are > ±0.1 ppm adjust the baseline. The minimum monthly value minus 0.1 ppm is
       usually applied as the baseline offset.

    3. Negative values are invalidated; readings exceeding 2 ppm are suspect and should be scrutinized closely.
       For example check station temperature for potential correlations with readings exceeding 2 ppm to confirm
       or refute potential impacts of enclosure/equipment temperatures.

PM10 and PM2.5

If PM10 and PM2.5 are measured at the same site, evaluate them collectively. The magnitude of PM10 concentrations
should be greater than PM2.5 while both pollutants should follow similar trends over time. It is important to note
that cases can occur where PM2.5 > PM10. This can occur in cases where a TEOM (older technology) is used to measure
PM10 and newer FEM analyzers (e.g. BAM, SHARP) are used to measure PM2.5. The anomaly occurs because newer
FEM technologies are able to better capture the semi-volatile component of the PM whereas the TEOM heats the
sample causing the semi-volatile component to be driven off and not measured.

Small negative values ranging between -9.98 µg/m3 and 0 µg/m3 for PM10, and -3.49 µg/m3 and 0 µg/m3 for PM2.5
are automatically corrected to 0; negative values equal to or exceeding -9.98 µg/m3 for PM10, or -3.49 µg/m3 for
PM2.5 are invalidated automatically when ingested into the database.

PM data does not require a baseline check like gas analyzers. The verification process for PM generally follows five
rules:

    1. Review automated corrections carefully for correctness. Correction criteria/alerts should be
       checked/corrected in Envista Setup if issues are found in the automated corrections.

    2. Investigate outliers/spikes. Review 1-minute values and/or consult with the site operator to check if
       anomalies were caused by a special event such as grass mowing or a wildfire. Add an explicit note to any
       extreme values that are determined to be valid.

    3. Where power failure/tape changes/filter changes occur, review data with added attention to investigate
       their validity. Events related to sample tape with a BAM or SHARP instrument or extended filter usage with
       a TEOM instrument may cause invalid readings. Identify the filter usage by filter pressure which is usually
       maintained under 70% for a TEOM. Invalidate the PM data where the filter pressure exceeds 90%.

    4. Look for flat lines or noisy traces in the data. For all cases identified, review field reports and/or consult the
       site operator. These types of signatures in the data can sometimes indicate equipment failure or other issues
       (i.e. invalid data).

    5. Typical parameter groupings to review for PM validation are:
        a) PM_TEOM and filter pressure;
        b) PM_BAM and BAM volume;
        c) PM_SHARP, OPTIC_SHARP and BETA_SHARP where the OPTIC and BETA are used as diagnostics;

        Note: OPTIC was validated prior to September, 2017. It has subsequently only been used for diagnostics.

6.3 Level 1 Validation for Meteorological Data

Temperature/Relative Humidity


                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                               Page 136 of 206
1) Hourly temperature and relative humidity are reviewed collectively since the two parameters have a strong
(negative) correlation. Review all auto corrections made to the data. Check the range of data and time of day when
maximum and minimum temperature values occur, a reversed pattern should be evident for relative humidity.

2) Closely scrutinize data when temperatures are less than -35 °C or greater than 40 °C. Temperatures outside this
range are uncommon in British Columbia and may indicate invalid data. Relative humidity between 100 and 105%
are corrected to 100%, those over 105% are invalidated.

3) Closely inspect data that flanks periods when a power failure occurred or periods with extended flat lines. These
types of data signatures may indicate operational issues with the sensors (i.e. invalid data).

Wind Speed/Wind Direction

1) Hourly wind speed, wind direction (scaler and vector values), and sigma values of wind direction (SigmaALL) are
reviewed simultaneously in a month. Check the maximum and minimum value to confirm wind speed/wind direction
are in a reasonable range.

2) Review the data for flat lines (constant value over a few hours). Contact the site operator to check if maintenance
of sensors or bearings is needed.

3) SigmaALL is the standard deviation of 1-minute wind vector within an hour. If SigmaALL equals 0, invalidate all
wind data including wind speed and wind direction.

Precipitation
OTT Pluvio
Check the Pluvio status flag. If not zero, invalidate the data. A flag other than zero indicates the gauge was under
maintenance or a fault was detected on measurement. Check for spiking and compare the precipitation with the
total volume of the rain gauge. Peak precipitation usually results in an increase of water volume in the gauge and an
increase of relative humidity.

Snow Depth
Campbell Scientific SR-50A

Snow Signal Quality (SSQ) is used as an diagnostic parameter to identify the validity of snow depth data. If SSQ equals
zero, the corresponding snow depth readings should be invalidated. Snow Depth sensors should be marked down
in the non-snow season.
7. Level 2 Validation

Level 2 validation is initiated with the generation and distribution of annual statistical summaries following the
completion of Level 1 validation of the previous year’s data. This typically occurs late in the first quarter following
the data validation year. ENV uses summaries generated by executing R Statistics scripts and produces the following
reports:

               Flatline reports  a summary of data flatlines from valid data entries
               Negative reports  negative values within validated data entries
               Annual Summary  historical data and present year data summaries

            Table 4. Level 2 validation activities and frequency of execution



                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                              Page 137 of 206
                   Validation Activities            Responsibility              Frequency
                   Review of Level 1 Validation     ENV                         Semi-Annual
                   Generation and distribution of
                                                    ENV                         Annual
                   SAS summaries
                   Review          of        data
                                                    ENV/site operators/         Quarterly/Semi-
                   summary/statistics/compare
                                                    AQ meteorologists           Annual/Annual
                   historical data
                   Examination of
                                                    AQ meteorologist            Annual
                   meteorological data
                   Examination of relationships
                                                    AQ meteorologist            Annual
                   between pollutants
                   Comparison of buddy sites        AQ meteorologist            Annual

                   Rejection of outlier data        ENV/AQ meteorologist        Annual

                                                                                Quarterly/Semi-
                   Examine audit results            ENV
                                                                                annual

Annual summaries contain historic and current year annual means, percentiles, CAAQS exceedance counts (hours,
days), and data captures. Summaries are distributed to all ENV groups involved with ambient air data monitoring
and validation outlined in Section 2 of this document.

The annual summaries serve as a tool for closer data examination by advanced data users. Suggested actions once
summaries are received include:

               Review of data trends (e.g., check increasing or decreasing annual trends, etc.)
               Examination of mean, and percentiles for outliers and other anomalies
               Comparison with neighbouring sites
               Comparison with related parameters (e.g., ozone and NO/NO2 relations)
               Examination of diurnal and seasonal patterns

Open communications between operational monitoring and reporting groups occur during Level 2 data validation
period. This facilitates sharing of software tools, expertise, and details regarding the history and patterns of each
station.

Issues with any of the reported data are examined, assessed and flagged, unflagged or adjusted as necessary by the
ADQS if necessary. Clean Air also receives the SAS Summaries which they use to conduct an independent evaluation
of data.

When all of the concerns regarding data validity have been addressed and data validated by MetroVancouver is
incorporated, the following activities take place:

               ENV Air and the Climate Networks Unit informs clients and stakeholders about completion of the
                data validation process.
               ENV’s implementation of the Envistaweb “Welcome” page is updated to denote the latest valid data.
               The annual data csv generator is executed to post verified hourly data in ENV’s FTP feed. This makes
                the data available through the BC government’s open data portals.
               Annual data reporting to the ECCC NAPS data group is coordinated starting with an email notice of
                the completion of level 2 data validation, and configuring the FTP NAPS export feed.


                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                             Page 138 of 206
8. Level 3 Validation

Level 3 validations is an independent process. For ENV, this occurs on an annual basis prior to the publication of the
BC Lung Association’s State of the Air Report, CAAQS reporting, and data sharing with ECCC. This process typically
occurs mid-year with the publication of the results from the previous year.

Data validated through Level 2 are exported to ECCC for annual NAPS reporting. Stations and parameters that are
included in the Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) between ENV and ECCC are configured in the FTP export
listing. Any change in the listing from the previous year are reported to ECCC to configure into their system. An FTP
export is then initiated and ENV receives a verification notice once the export is successfully completed. The ECCC’s
data group closely reviews the data. Anomalies are reported back to ENV for closer examination.
9. References
Canadian Council of Ministers of the Environment (CCME) 2011. Ambient Air Monitoring Protocol For PM2.5 and
Ozone: Canada-wide Standards for Particulate Matter and Ozone. www.ccme.ca. December 2017.

Revision History: 0.0

Approval




                               British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                              Page 139 of 206
                    Part B2
Stationary Air Emissions Testing




                    Her Majesty the Queen in
             Right of the Province of British Columbia
                                2020
                        All Rights Reserved




       British Columbia Field Sampling Manual            Page 140 of 206
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing


Part B2 Table of Contents


1 Introduction                                                                                           144
1.1       Acknowledgements                                                                                  144
1.2       Purpose and Scope                                                                                 144
1.3       Continuous Emission Monitoring                                                                    145
1.4       Validation of New Methods                                                                         145
1.5       Trade Names or Commercial Products                                                                145

2 2. Pre-Test Conditions                                                                                  146
3 3. Additional Sampling Requirements                                                                    147
4 4. Calibration Requirements                                                                            149
5 5. General Reporting Requirements                                                                      150
6 Method Specific Reporting Requirements                                                                 151
6.1       Method 1 - Determination of Sampling Site and Traverse Points                                     151
6.2       Method 2 - Determination of Stack Gas Velocity and Volumetric Flow Rate                           151
6.3       Method 3 - Determination of Gas Composition and Molecular Weight                                  151
          6.3.1   Grab Sampling (Orsat or “Fyrite”)                                                         151
          6.3.2   Integrated Sampling                                                                       152
          6.3.3   Continuous Sampling (Non-Permanent In-Stack)                                              152
6.4       Method 4 - Determination of Moisture Content of Stack Gas                                         152
6.5       Method 5 - Determination of Particulate Emissions                                                 152
6.6       Continuous Emission Monitoring Survey (Non-Permanent In-Stack)                                    153
6.7       High Volume Particulate Sampling Methods                                                          153
6.8       Determination of Gaseous Emissions from Stationary Sources                                        154

7 7. Sources of Further Information                                                                      155
8 8. Revision History                                                                                    156
Appendix 1         Platform, Access and Safety Requirements                                              157
Appendix 1.1      Additional Platform, Access and Safety Requirements for Monitoring Stack Emissions        158
Appendix 1.2a     Sampling Facilities on Circular Stacks                                                    160
Appendix 1.2b     Sampling Facilities on Circular Stacks                                                    161
Appendix 1.3      Sampling Facilities on Rectangular Stacks                                                 162
Appendix 1.4      Dimensions of a Stack Sampling Platform                                                   163

Appendix 2         Cyclonic Flow Check & Pitot Leak Check Procedure                                      164


                                   British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                        Page 141 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing


Appendix 3       High Volume Particulate Sampling                                                     166
Appendix 3.1    Sample Collection Procedure                                                              167
Appendix 3.2    Sample Recovery                                                                          168
Appendix 3.3    Analytical Procedure                                                                     168

9 Appendix 4 Sample Train Leak Check Procedures                                                       169
Appendix 5       Sampling under Adverse Conditions                                                    170
Appendix 6       Calibration Forms                                                                    171
Appendix 6.1    General Calibration Form                                                                 172
Appendix 6.2    Orifice Meter Calibration Form                                                           173
Appendix 6.3    Nozzle Diameter Calibration Form                                                         174
Appendix 6.4    Temperature Calibration Form                                                             175
Appendix 6.5    S-Type Pitot Calibration Form                                                            176
Appendix 6.6    Magnehelic Calibration Form                                                              177
Appendix 6.7    Dry Gas Meter Calibration Form                                                           178

Appendix 7       Regulatory Agency Approved Test Methods                                              179
Appendix 7.1    Parameters and Approved Methods                                                          180
Appendix 7.2    Method Sources                                                                           183

Appendix 8       CEM (Non-Permanent In-Stack) Reporting Forms                                         185
Appendix 8.1    Analysis of Calibration Gases                                                            186
Appendix 8.2    Analyzer Calibration Data                                                                187

Appendix 9       Compliance Testing Report Requirements                                               188
Appendix 9.1    Source Emission Survey Report Format                                                     189
Appendix 9.2    Compliance Testing Report Summary Table                                                  192
Appendix 9.3    System Calibration Bias and Drift Check                                                  193

Appendix 10 Psychrometric Charts and Vapour Pressure Tables                                           194
Appendix 10.1   Vapour Pressures of Water in Millimeters of Mercury                                      195
Appendix 10.2   High Temperature Psychrometric Chart for Air-Water Vapour Mixtures at 101.3 kPa          196
Appendix 10.3   Sample Container, Preservation, and Hold Times for Air (Vapours)                         197

Appendix 11 Determination of TRS Compounds Using Grab Sampling 198
Appendix 12 Method for Measuring Particulate Emissions from Stationary
  Sources with Cyclonic Flow Pattern                                199
Appendix 12.1   Principle                                                                                200
Appendix 12.2   Applicability                                                                            200
Appendix 12.3   Apparatus and Reagents                                                                   201



                                 British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                       Page 142 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing

Appendix 12.4   Procedures                                                          201
Appendix 12.5   Calculations and Reporting                                          203




                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual   Page 143 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing


1 Introduction
The requirements contained in this document are intended to supplement and update various stack
sampling reference methods, and will clarify specific points as well as stating any requirements which may
be unique to the Ministry of Environment, Lands and Parks (MELP).


1.1      Acknowledgements
The staff of the Greater Vancouver Regional District (GVRD) prepared the original version of this document
which has subsequently been adopted and modified by the Ministry of Environment, Lands and Parks.
Publication of the GVRD material is with the permission of the GVRD.


1.2      Purpose and Scope
This document standardizes sampling protocols and methods which may be required by permit, approval,
regulation, or bylaw. It also serves as a guideline for stationary emission testing survey reporting for
regulatory staff, permittees, and consultants.

Reference to the “Regulatory Body or Agency” means the governing body, Ministry of Environment, Lands
and Parks and/or the delegated Greater Vancouver Regional District which regulates the discharge of
contaminants into the air, as stated in the Waste Management Act (WMA). “Regulatory Administrator” has
the same meaning as Director, District Director and manager, as defined in the WMA and Air Quality
Director under Greater Vancouver Regional District Bylaw 725. “Regulatory Officers” has the same
meaning as an officer defined in the WMA.

The Regulatory Administrator must be contacted if any deviations from the methods or equipment included
in this code are contemplated (Appendix 7.1). Request for testing deviations require prior written approval
by the Regulatory Administrator. Any questions with respect to details contained in this document should
be directed to the attention of:

        Director, Air Resources Branch                         Director, Air Quality Department
        Environment and Resource Management                    Greater Vancouver Regional District
        Department                                             4330 Kingsway
        Ministry of Environment, Lands and Parks               Burnaby, B.C. V5H 4G8
        Location: 3-2975 Jutland Rd
        Victoria, B.C. V8T 5J9
        Mail: P.O. Box 9341 Stn Prov Govt
        Victoria, B.C. V8W 9M1
        Phone: (250) 387-9933 or 387-9932                      Phone: (604) 436-6700
        Fax: (250) 356-7197                                    Fax:   (604) 436-6707




                                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                     Page 144 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing



1.3             Continuous Emission Monitoring
For in-stack continuous emission monitors (CEMs), the Regulatory Agency requires the use of Environment
Canada or United States Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA) protocols and performance
specifications (as listed in Appendix 7.1), unless otherwise superseded by other Provincial or GVRD
requirements.


1.4             Validation of New Methods
The Regulatory Agency may adopt new stationary source test methods that are not used in other
jurisdictions provided the requirements of U.S. EPA Method 301 have been met (see Appendix 7.1 listing).
The onus is on the source owner or operator proposing the new method to ensure that all the requirements
of Method 301 have been met. Before a new method can be accepted, the Regulatory Administrator may
require substantial documentation to indicate all the information required under Method 301 is supplied as
appropriate.


1.5             Trade Names or Commercial Products
Mention of trade names or commercial products does not constitute endorsement by the Ministry of
Environment, Lands and Parks or the Greater Vancouver Regional District.




                                 British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                     Page 145 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing



2 2.               Pre-Test Conditions
The following conditions must be met prior to sampling:

    • All manual source testing results submitted to the Regulatory Agency must have been conducted or
      continuously supervised on-site by at least one individual who has passed relevant stack sampling
      courses as required by the Regulatory Administrator. Relevant courses include the following:

               •   British Columbia Institute of Technology (BCIT), Stack Testing and Sampling;
               •   Mount Royal College (Calgary), Stack Sampling Course;
               •   University of Windsor, The Windsor Stack Sampling Course;
               •   Fanshawe College (London, Ontario), Air Sampling and Evaluation LabII; and
               •   United States Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA), Source Sampling for
                   Pollutants.

           Note:   It may be possible to challenge the above courses. Further information may be obtained
                   by contacting the educational institution.

•     It is the responsibility of the owner/operator of a facility to provide safe access to the chosen sampling
      location and a firm platform for obtaining samples shall be provided following Appendix 1 of this
      chapter and pertinent Workers' Compensation Board Regulations.

•     The chosen sampling site must meet the minimum requirement of two stack diameters downstream
      and a half a diameter upstream from the last flow disturbance. Note that this requires more sampling
      points compared to a sampling site that is located eight stack diameters downstream and two
      diameters upstream from the last flow disturbance.

•     The cross-sectional sampling point layout within a rectangular duct must be chosen such that the ratio
      of the length to the width is between 1.0 and 2.0.

•     For particulate sampling, the mean rotational angle for all sampling points must not exceed +/-20o
      from the 0o reference position (calculated as outlined in Appendix 2 of this chapter).

•     For sources that operate under Provincial permit, approval, regulation or bylaw, the proponent is to
      provide the Regulatory Administrator with a minimum of five working days advance notice before
      emission compliance testing is carried out. Alternately, the proponent can provide the Regulatory
      Administrator with another mutually acceptable minimum advance notice duration, in writing, before
      emission testing is carried out.

•     For sources that operate under GVRD permit, approval or bylaw, the proponent shall provide the
      Regulatory Administrator with a minimum of three working days advance notice before any emission
      compliance testing is carried out.

•     The results of all air emission testing performed for regulatory compliance requirements under permit,
      approval, regulation or bylaw shall be retained by the facility, for a period of five years, and be made
      available to the Regulatory Administrator upon request.

•     A detailed test plan must be submitted in writing for approval for any non-routine (e.g., Destruction
      Removal Efficiency or Special Waste Facility) testing programs 30 days prior to the scheduled
      sampling.




                                      British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                       Page 146 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




3 3.            Additional Sampling Requirements
In addition to the requirements of the Reference Method for Source Testing: Measurement of Releases of
Particulate from Stationary Sources (EPS 1/RM/8), or U.S. EPA Methods 1 to 5, the following requirements
must be fulfilled for all compliance testing:

   •   A minimum of three test runs constitute a valid stack survey, unless the method being used
       specifically states otherwise. Where less than three runs are being used, the Stack Emission
       Survey Report must quote the language and section of the method that allows exception from the
       three test run requirement.

   •   For a valid stack survey, the individual test runs should be taken on the same day. The duration,
       over which the three test runs are extracted, for a valid stack survey, should not exceed two days.
       Any individual run shall be taken on one given day. Alternately, the proponent can provide the
       Regulatory Administrator with another mutually acceptable duration for stack sampling, in writing
       before emission testing is carried out.

   •   The results of individual test runs and the average of all test runs constituting a valid stack survey
       shall be reported. The arithmetic average of all test runs taken during a valid stack survey shall
       be used to assess compliance with the limits stated in permits, approvals, regulations or bylaws.

   •   The minimum duration of one complete test run must be 60 minutes, except testing for dioxins,
       furans, PCBs and PAHs which shall be a minimum of 240 minutes per individual test run, unless
       the method being used states otherwise. Where exception is being made, the language and
       section of the method that allows for this must be quoted in the Stack Emission Survey Report
       (see Appendix 9.1).

   •   The sampling nozzle shall be sized to obtain a sample volume of 1 m3 (as sampled) or greater for
       particulate testing.

   •   Sample points shall be calculated using the applicable tables found in EPS 1/RM/8 or the US
       EPA CFR 40 Part 60. The general guidelines are:

            •   stacks with diameters greater than 61 cm - 12 point minimum, 24 point maximum (25 for
                rectangular stacks)
            •   stacks with diameters between 30 and 61 cm - 8 point minimum, 24 point maximum (25
                for rectangular stacks)

        •   Consult the applicable tables for calculating points at locations requiring more than the
            minimum number of points and less than the maximum.

        •   In the recovery procedure for a standard particulate test, acetone and deionised water must
            be used for washing the interior surfaces of the nozzle, probe, cyclone (if used), and filter
            holder (the front half of the sampling train). Make blank determinations on the acetone and
            water and subtract the weight from the washing particulate catch. The blank volumes
            approximate the average amount of water and acetone used for each front half wash.

       •    In performing grab sampling (e.g., bag, bomb, or container for independent analysis), unless
            the method being used states otherwise:

            •   two grab samples withdrawn one after the other constitute a single test run,
            •   a minimum of three test runs are required for each valid stack survey, and

                                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                       Page 147 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing



          •   an interval of at least one hour is required between the individual test runs.

      •   For cases where deviations from the above three conditions are applied, the Stack Emission
          Survey Report must quote the language and section of the method that allows the
          exception(s).

      •   High volume particulate sampling is considered to be non-standard and requires prior written
          approval from the Regulatory Administrator. If sampling by these methods has been
          approved, the method outlined in Appendix 3 of this chapter must be followed.

      •   Leak checks are mandatory and should be carried out as outlined in Appendix 4 of this
          chapter.

      •   Sampling under adverse conditions may require specialized equipment or procedures. Some
          of these are listed in Appendix 5 of this chapter.




                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                         Page 148 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




4 4.             Calibration Requirements
The following table outlines the general requirements for the calibration of source testing equipment:

 Equipment              Interval                                 Recommended Procedure
 Dry Gas Meter          Annually when equipment remains at a Against a:
                        permitted facility.                      • spirometer,
                        Every 6 months when equipment is used at • wet test meter,
                        various facilities.                      • calibration checked dry gas
                                                                    meter, and/or
                                                                 • critical orifice
                                                                        as indicated in U.S. EPA Method 5.
 Magnehelic             Annually when equipment remains at a            Against an inclined manometer, as
 Gauges                 permitted facility.                             indicated in U.S. EPA Method 2.
                        Every 6 months when equipment is used at
                        various facilities.
 Nozzles                Calibrate before initial field use. When        Calibrate by measuring with a
                        nozzles become nicked, dented or corroded       micrometer.       Examine thoroughly
                        they are to be reshaped and calibrated prior    prior to each field use. See U.S. EPA
                        to use.                                         Method 5.
 Pitot Tubes            After each field use re-examine. For a new      Calibrate in a wind tunnel using the
                        pitot tube or in the event of any damage        procedures outlined in U.S. EPA
                        such that the pitot tube does not meet          Method 2.
                        specification, repair and calibration is
                        required.
 Thermocouples          Every 6 months.                                 Against a National Institute of
                                                                        Standards & Technology (N.I.S.T)
                                                                        thermometer, with ice, water, and hot
                                                                        oil as indicated in U.S. EPA Method 2.
 Rotameters                                                             Need not be calibrated, but should be
                                                                        cleaned and maintained according to
                                                                        the manufacturer’s instruction, as
                                                                        indicated in U.S. EPA Method 3.
In addition to the requirements above, if critical orifices are used as a means of checking calibration, they are
to be checked once every two years against a spirometer, wet test meter, or calibrated dry gas meter. The
calibration certificate must include all pertinent data, the date of calibration, and the name of the technician
who performed the calibrations. Valid calibration certificates for all pertinent equipment used in the emission
survey must be included in the report. The calibration sheets to be used are those referenced in Appendix 6
of this chapter, or those which include all the pertinent data outlined in these reference calibration sheets.

All calibrated instruments shall be permanently and uniquely identified for easy reference.

A copy of the most current calibrations shall be carried with the source testing team on all field tests and must
be provided to Regulatory Agency audit staff or officer upon request.

Note that the stated interval of either six months or annually should be considered a maximum time frame,
as calibrations must be conducted as required.




                                     British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                        Page 149 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




5 5.            General Reporting Requirements
The stack emission survey reports must be tabulated, summarized, and forwarded to the Regulatory
Administrator in the appropriate Region or District either as an attachment to the Permittees’ quarterly reports
or as a separate report.

All stack emission survey reports shall be clearly legible and contain the necessary detail as specified in the
report requirements in Appendix 9 of this chapter. All reports shall include, but not be limited to, the
information listed in Appendix 9, unless prior written authorization has been obtained from the Regulatory
Administrator.

The electronic reporting of data may be required in the future.




                                     British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                       Page 150 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




6 Method Specific Reporting Requirements
In addition to the requirements specified in EPS 1/RM/8, or U.S. EPA Methods 1 to 5, the following outlines
the minimum reporting requirements for Methods 1 through 5, high volume particulate sampling, and gaseous
constant rate sampling.


        6.1 Method 1 - Determination of Sampling Site and
            Traverse Points
                (a) Report all stack dimensions. A diagram of the sampling site must include the following:

                    •   Measured distance and number of duct diameters upstream and downstream from
                        the last flow disturbance
                    •   Stack shape and cross sectional distances
                    •   Stack cross sectional area
                    •   Number of sample ports
                    •   Nipple length and diameter

                (b) Include the measured location of all traverse points, along with a notation of any points
                    which have been combined during the testing period [i.e., multiple points within 1.3 to
                    2.5 cm (0.5 to 1 inch) of the stack wall].


        6.2 Method 2 - Determination of Stack Gas Velocity
            and Volumetric Flow Rate
                (a) A cyclonic flow check is required at each measurement location. In the report, include
                    the rotational angle for each individual point as well as the calculated mean rotational
                    angle for all sampling points. The cyclonic flow check need not be repeated for each
                    survey provided a previous cyclonic flow check has been performed and no
                    modifications affecting the flow patterns have taken place since that time.

                (b) Report the devices used for velocity measurement along with the range of the
                    instrument used to measure the differential pressure. Calibration data is required for
                    the S-type pitot tubes, standard pitot tubes, and/or magnehelic gauges used during the
                    measurement period.


        6.3 Method 3 - Determination of Gas Composition and
            Molecular Weight
               6.3.1 Grab Sampling (Orsat or “Fyrite”)
                        Take a minimum of three individual samples during each test run - one at the start,
                        midpoint, and conclusion of each test. Report the time the individual tests were
                        carried out and the results of these measurements.




                                   British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                       Page 151 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




             6.3.2 Integrated Sampling
                      Note the type of collection bag (Tedlar, Mylar, Aluminized Mylar) as well as the
                      sampling time and rate. Report the time lapse between collection and analysis along
                      with results of the leak check procedure performed on the system.

             6.3.3 Continuous Sampling (Non-Permanent In-Stack)
                      (a) Report the type of analyzer, method of detection, calibration procedure with
                          results, and leak check results.

                      (b) Report sample times and any interruptions or problems with the measurement
                          system.


      6.4 Method 4 - Determination of Moisture Content of
          Stack Gas
             (a) The moisture calculations for saturated conditions shall include two values:

                 1. a moisture value from the condenser method
                 2. a moisture value from a psychometric chart and/or saturation vapour pressure
                    tables, as found in Appendix 10 of this chapter.

             (b) The lower of the two reported values is to be considered the correct moisture value and
                 is to be used in all subsequent calculations.

             (c) Record the temperature of the last impinger for each sampling interval on the field
                 sheet.

             (d) Record reported weights or volumes of impingers individually including the weight
                 difference of the silica gel.


      6.5 Method 5 - Determination of Particulate Emissions
             (a) Calibration sheets are required for the following equipment:
                 1.   Dry Gas Meters
                 2.   Pitot Tubes
                 3.   Magnehelic Gauges
                 4.   Orifice Meters
                 5.   Thermocouples
                 6.   Nozzles

             (b) A flow chart or schematic of the collection system components is required. This
                 schematic shall indicate but not be limited to: the type of sampling probe liner, type and
                 number of impingers, and contents and volume of impingers.

             (c) Leak tests are to be conducted as outlined in Appendix 4 of this chapter. The field
                 sheets must document the time, vacuum reading, and the leakage rate.

             (d) The sampling field sheet must be complete and legible. Readings are taken and


                                 British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                      Page 152 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing



                 recorded for each sampling interval which must be a minimum of 2.5 minutes and a
                 maximum of 5 minutes. This is to include:

                 1.   Stack temperature
                 2.   Velocity pressure (Δ P)
                 3.   Orifice pressure (Δ H)
                 4.   Dry gas meter, probe, hot box, and last impinger temperature
                 5.   Pump vacuum (millimeters of Hg)
                 6.   Dry gas meter volume

             (e) In addition, document all pre-test estimates of moisture, stack temperature, maximum
                 velocity pressure and the nozzle estimate on field sheets.

             (f) Document the sample recovery procedure, including all clean up procedures for the
                 sampling probe, cyclone, filter holder and impingers.


      6.6 Continuous Emission Monitoring Survey (Non-
          Permanent In-Stack)
             With the exception of sources covered under the MELP Asphalt Plant Regulation, three one-
             hour tests with calibrations run between each test are required for a valid continuous
             emission monitoring survey. Emission calculations for tests of one hour will be based on
             readings at one minute intervals (a minimum of 60 measurements).
             For sources covered under the MELP Asphalt Plant Regulation, a single one hour test is
             required for a valid emission monitoring survey for organics and carbon monoxide.
             Calibration runs are to be performed both before and after the test. Emission calculations
             will be based on readings at one minute intervals (a minimum of 60 measurements).
             Reports for continuous emission monitoring surveys shall include:
             (a) A detailed sampling system description and schematic diagram
             (b) Copies of digital or chart recorder printouts labeled with individual test start and finish
                 times, chart speed, pre-and post calibrations, span, drift determination, parameters
                 sampled, number of sample points, and NOx converter efficiency.
             (c) Tables for:
                 1. Analysis of calibration gases
                 2. Analyzer calibration data
                 3. System calibration bias and drift test
                 4. Sample tables are found in Appendix 8 of this chapter.


      6.7 High Volume Particulate Sampling Methods
             Please note that Method 5 is mandatory and only for unusual circumstances will the use of
             the high volume procedure for compliance testing be considered. Prior written approval from
             the Regulatory Administrator is required, as it is a non-standard testing method. Information
             submitted to the Regulatory Agency shall include but not be limited to:
             (a) A detailed diagram of the sampling site including the duct locations where sampling
                 was conducted.
             (b) A detailed schematic of the sampling apparatus.
             (c) Calibration sheets for the following equipment:

                 1. Pitot tubes
                 2. Magnehelic Gauges

                                 British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                         Page 153 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing



                   3. Thermometers
                   4. Calibration curve for the flow orifice.

             (d) The size of the nozzle used.

             (e) The sampling field sheets and all information necessary to conduct the calculations. A
                 sample calculation shall be conducted for one run. The percent isokinetics for each
                 sampling point must be submitted.

             (f) Documentation of the sample recovery procedure which was used.


      6.8 Determination of Gaseous Emissions from
          Stationary Sources
             (a) Sampling and analytical procedures must follow approved methods and be
                 documented. Gas sampling trains shall be operated within the recommended
                 maximum flow rates outlined in the method. Any deviation from recognized procedures
                 will require prior written approval from the Regulatory Administrator.

             (b) A flow chart or schematic of the collection system components is required. This
                 diagram must include the impinger contents and volumes as well as the type of
                 impinger and sequence. Document the type of impinger connections.

             (c) Calibration sheets are required for:
                 1. Dry Gas Meters
                 2. Pitot tubes
                 3. Magnehelics
                 4. Thermometers
                 5. Orifice meter

             (d) On the gas sampling field sheet, detail sampling conditions as described in Appendix 9
                 of this Chapter at an interval not greater than 10 minutes between readings.

             (e) In addition, Determination of Nitrogen Oxides (Flask Method) requires:

                   1. The volume of the collection flask - flask valve combination must be measured
                      prior to sampling. Record the measured volume on the flask.

                   2. On the field sheet, include the flask volume and initial and final flask pressure and
                      temperature. An initial and final barometric pressure are also to be included.

                   3. Enclose the sampling field sheet and all information necessary to conduct the
                      calculations. Include an example calculation for one run.

             (f)   The sample recovery procedure must be documented.




                                   British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                      Page 154 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




7 7.           Sources of Further Information
Alberta Stack Sampling Code. Publication Number: REF. 89 ISBN 0-7732-1406-2, 1995 version effective
January 1, 1996.

Air Resources Branch; Source Testing Code (Version #2). Nov. 1980. Province of Ontario, Ministry of
Environment, Report # ARB-TDA-66-80.

Asphalt Plant Regulation. BC Regulation 217/97, Deposited June 27, 1997, Province of British Columbia,
Ministry of Environment, Lands and Parks.*

Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems, Volume III. 1988. United States
Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring Laboratory; Stationary Sources Specific
Methods.

Standards of Performance for New Stationary Sources, Vol. 40. United States Environmental Protection
Agency, Office of the Federal Register; Parts 53-60.

Source Sampling Manual Volume I. August 1981. State of Oregon, Department of Environmental Quality, Air
Quality Control Division.

Occupational Health & Safety Regulation, BC Regulation 296/97, effective April 15, 1998, Workers
Compensation Board of British Columbia.

Reference Method for Source Testing: Measurement of Releases of Particulate from Stationary Sources.
December 1993. Environment Canada, EPS 1/RM/8.

Protocols and Performance Specifications for Continuous Monitoring of Gaseous Emissions from Thermal
Power Generation. September 1993. Environment Canada, EPS 1/PG/7.
* Available at http://www.qp.gov.bc.ca/stat_reg/regs/elp/R217_97.htm




                                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                  Page 155 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




8 8.         Revision History
      May 05, 2020              Formatting of this ‘Part’ Part B2 was completed for consistency.
                                Technical information, schematics and otherwise all content were not
                                changed.

      October 10, 2013:         This section republished without change. Appendix 10.3 - Sample
                                Container, Preservation, and Hold Times for Air (Vapours) included.
      February 28, 2001:        The Stationary Air Emissions Testing Section was revised in detail,
                                with the revised draft reviewed by private sector representatives.
      November 1999:            Initial publication.




                             British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                   Page 156 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 1 Platform, Access and Safety
Requirements
      Appendix 1.1    Additional Platform Access and Safety Requirements for Monitoring Stack
                      Emissions
      Appendix 1.2a   Sampling Facilities on Circular Stacks
      Appendix 1.2b   Sampling Facilities on Circular Stacks
      Appendix 1.3    Sampling Facilities on Rectangular Stacks
      Appendix 1.4    Dimensions of a Stack Sampling Platform




                            British Columbia Field Sampling Manual               Page 157 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 1.1 Additional Platform, Access and Safety
Requirements for Monitoring Stack Emissions
The Workers’ Compensation Board (WCB) of British Columbia helps create a working environment that
protects the health, safety and well being of workers. To achieve this, the WCB administers the
Occupational Health and Safety Regulation adopted under the authority of the Workers Compensation Act
and the Workplace Act.

For platform access and safety requirements related to the monitoring of stack emissions, all applicable
WCB requirements should be adhered to. The following section is intended only to serve as guidance for
setting up stack sampling platforms, access ladders and other associated works. The latest WCB
requirements are to be used in all cases where the following guidelines are in conflict.

   (a)      Safe access to the sampling locations and a firm platform for obtaining stack samples shall
            be provided.

   •        Access ladders shall be constructed in accordance with the latest Workers' Compensation
            Board (W.C.B.) requirements. In addition, it is recommended that a "safety climb" with two
            sets of harnesses be provided.

            •   The basic platform shall be 1.07 metres (3.5 feet) wide with a 1.07 metre (3.5 foot) high
                railing. If 2 ports are required at 90°, the stack platform shall serve the quarter of the
                stack circumference between the ports and shall extend at least 0.91 metres (3 feet)
                beyond each port. The 1.22 metre (4 foot) section of the top railing in front of the ports
                (Fig. 1.1 and 2) shall be hinged in such a manner that the top rail can swing upward and
                over 180 degrees. This facilitates the movement of the sampling box and probe
                perpendicular to the stack during a traverse without interference from the top railing of the
                platform.

            •   The sampling port shall consist of a standard 10 cm (4 inch) male-threaded pipe nipple
                welded to the stack at the sampling location with a screw cap to cover the opening. The
                ports shall be installed flush with the interior stack wall and shall extend outward from the
                exterior stack wall at least 7.6 centimetres (3 inches). Properly grounded electric outlets
                of 110/120 volts (15-20 amps), near each sampling port, or, spaced in such a manner as
                to be accessible for sampling at all ports, shall be installed to provide power for the
                sampling train components and accessories. The sampling port shall be approximately
                1.52 metres (5 feet) above the base of the platform. An eyebolt shall be installed 0.91
                metres (3 feet) directly above each port. The eyebolt should be hooked with a 3.2
                millimetre (1/8 inch) steel cable of the length indicated in Fig. 3. This cable should be
                supplied by the platform owner and should remain on the stack for future testing.

   •        Circular stacks with an inside diameter greater than 1.22 metres (4 feet) or rectangular stacks
            (Fig. 2) with the largest dimension greater than 1.22 metres (4 feet), shall be equipped with
            platform extensions as indicated in Fig. 3. The required extensions are in addition to the
            basic platform width of 1.07 metres (3.5 feet) and must be firmly secured. The 1.22 metre (4
            foot) width of the extension shall be centered around the traverse axis. Schematic diagrams
            showing facilities for circular and rectangular stacks are shown in Figs. 1, 1.1 & 2
            respectively.

            •   Constant rate or gaseous sampling does not require the installation of multiple ports and
                eyebolts.



                                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                       Page 158 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing



         (b)       Access to working platform (W.C.B. regulation 30.14 and American National
                   Standards Institute (A.N.S.I.) A143-3 1974);

               •   Adequacy of the working platform (A.N.S.I. A14-3 1974);

               •   Guardrail system around working platform (W.C.B. regulation 8.70 and 8.78);

               •   Transfer of equipment up to the working platform (W.C.B. regulation 30.16).

         (c)       The W.C.B. permits the Regulatory Agency to specify platform widths greater than 76
                   cm (30 inches), if desirable or necessary;

               •   The stairs, ladder and platform must be certified by a Professional Engineer;

               •   It is the responsibility of the stack owner to comply with Industrial Health and Safety
                   requirements concerning the access to the stack and the platform.




                                 British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                       Page 159 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 1.2a                      Sampling Facilities on Circular Stacks


              Eyebolts                    1 Diameter




 10 .2 cm Diameter Male
 T hreaded Nipple
                                                                             2 dia.

          0.91 m


                                                              1.07 m
                          0.46 m

         1.52 m                                   **
                                                                                 Mid Rail

                                                                                 T oe Plate



     Platform                                                               8 dia.
     Extension*




                                                                                      Inlet to
                                                                                      Stack


                                         Figure 1
Note:
*     Stacks with Inside Diameter (I.D.) less than 1.22 m do not require platform extension.
      See figure 1.1 for length of platform extension when I.D. is greater than 1.22 m.

**       T he 1.22 m top rail-guard in front of ports (with or without platform extension) shall
         be hinged to swing upwards and over 180 degrees when necessary.

All dimensions are in metres unless otherwise noted.




                                    British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                         Page 160 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 1.2b             Sampling Facilities on Circular Stacks




                           British Columbia Field Sampling Manual   Page 161 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 1.3 Sampling Facilities on Rectangular Stacks


                          B



                                                                                    D




     0.91 m                                                                             2D




                                                                     Platform
                                                                     Extension* *
     1.52 m


                                                                                        Top rail to swing
                                                                                        upwards and over
                                                                                        180o


 Eyebolts (one
 eyebolt on top                                                                         Toe Plate
 of each port)



Port 10cm                                                                               8D
diameter male
threaded nipple*



 Electrical Outlet
 110/120 volts
 (15 - 20 amps)
                                           Figure 2
Note:
*     The number of ports required is described in the text.

**     Stacks with I.D. less than 1.22 metres do not require platform extension. However, top rail
       in front of the ports, shall be hinged to swing upwards and over when necessary.

All dimensions are in metres, unless otherwise noted.



                                     British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                            Page 162 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 1.4 Dimensions of a Stack Sampling Platform

                  C
                                       EYEBOLT

                          Stainless
                          Steel
                          Cable




                      B   A              D




                                      Figure 3

           D                        A                  B                 C
 DIAM ETER OR LARGEST         BASE PLATFORM        PLATFORM        LENGTH OF
 DIM ENSION OF A STACK        WIDTH                EXTENSION       STEEL CABLE
          (m)                      (m)                (m)              (m)


         < 1.22                       1.07             0               2.44


       1.22 < D < 1.83                1.07            0.46             3.96



       1.83 < D < 2.44                1.07            0.76             3.96



         > 2.44                       1.07            1.07             3.96




                              British Columbia Field Sampling Manual          Page 163 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 2 Cyclonic Flow Check & Pitot
Leak Check Procedure
Cyclonic Flow
Location of a suitable sampling site for velocity measurement or for particulate and mist determinations
requires that the gas flow be essentially parallel to the stack walls.
If there is a possibility of cyclonic flow [as determined in Section 6.2 (a)], checks with a pitot tube and draft
gauge should be made as follows:
    Pitot Leak-Check
    (a)      Connect calibrated S-type pitot tube to a manometer.

    (b)      Leak check the system by drawing a vacuum of two to four inches of water on the manometer. The
             manometer reading should not change over a 15 second period.

    (c)      Repeat this procedure applying a positive pressure to the system.

    (d)      If the system leaks, correct the problem and repeat the leak check procedure.

    Cyclonic Flow Check

    (a)      Carefully zero the manometer and insert the pitot tube so that the planes of the face openings are
             perpendicular to the stack area cross sectional plane - that is, parallel to the expected gas flow. The
             pitot tube is thus rotated 90° from its usual position.

    (b)      Traverse the stack area by measuring the velocity head at each sampling point with the pitot tube in this
             position. Keep the sampling port opening sealed while traversing. Temperature need not be measured
             at this time.

    (c)      When the gas flow is exactly parallel to the stack walls and, therefore, parallel to the pitot tube face
             openings, no reading will be obtained on the manometer. If a reading is obtained, rotate the pitot tube
             around its longitudinal axis until a zero reading is indicated on the manometer.

    (d)      Record the angle of rotation for each point (starting with 0° in the pitot tubes initial position) required to
             obtain a zero manometer reading.

    (e)      Obtain an arithmetic average of the angles of rotation at each traverse point, including angles of 0°. If
             the average angle of rotation is < 20°, the gas flow conditions are acceptable. If the average angle is >
             20°, the conditions are not acceptable; testing must be halted and the Regulatory Administrator is to be
             consulted.


To facilitate measurement of pitot tube rotation, a number of devices can be made, depending on the user.
Fabrication of a protractor that will fit over the sampling port along with a movable indicating arm clamped
to the pitot tube will provide a measurement of the angle of rotation. A level indicator (available at most
hardware stores) calibrated in 5° increments can also be mounted on the pitot tube and used to measure
rotation.
The preferred device is a degree level (available at most hardware stores) with 1° increments which can be
mounted on the end of a pitot tube. Its alignment with the head of the pitot tube can be checked by one of
two methods:


                                      British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                                 Page 164 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing



   1.    the use of two indicating levels, one at the front and one at the end or,

   2.    by placing the pitot on a stable surface then place the indicating level at the front and then at
         the end and compare readings. The readings do not have to be the same. The differential,
         using the front as the reference, or true value can be subtracted or added to the
         corresponding angular determinations of stack flow.




                               British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                        Page 165 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 3 High Volume Particulate
Sampling
      Appendix 3.1     Sample Collection Procedures

      Appendix 3.2     Sample Recovery

      Appendix 3.3     Analytical Procedure




                            British Columbia Field Sampling Manual   Page 166 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 3.1 Sample Collection Procedure
   (a)   Use a pitot tube to map the velocity distribution across the face of the exhaust. Areas of zero
         or negative flow should also be included if present. At each point at which the velocity is
         measured, measure the flow in the direction giving maximum deflection of the pitot pressure
         gauge.

   (b)   Select six or more points of outgoing (positive) flow from the points measured above to
         sample. The points shall be representative of the flow pattern and should include the point of
         maximum velocity. If six points of positive flow cannot be obtained, use the maximum
         number possible. Do not choose any points closer than 5 cm (2 inches) from the wall.

   (c)   Measure the average exhaust temperature.

   (d)   Determine the nozzle size required for isokinetic sampling. An estimate of the orifice
         temperature is required. For low temperature exhausts the orifice temperature is usually very
         close to the exhaust temperature. For higher temperature exhausts, a trial run may be
         necessary to determine the expected orifice temperature.

   (e)   Calculate the required orifice pressure drop for each chosen sampling point to obtain an
         isokinetic sample. Mount the nozzle so that the nozzle opening is parallel to the cyclone or
         stack exhaust. This will keep the differential pressure gauge properly positioned to read as it
         was designed to. With the probe out of the stream, turn on the blower and adjust the flow
         rate to that calculated for the first sampling point. Locate the probe nozzle at the first
         sampling point and immediately start the timer. Move the probe around until the velocity
         pressure matches that calculated for the flow rate which was pre-set. The sample rate may
         need to be adjusted after entering the gas stream. The probe nozzle must be pointing
         directly into the flow.

   (f)    Continually monitor the velocity during the sampling period (with the pitot tube mounted to the
          probe) and move the probe around as required to keep it in an area where the velocity
          matches the original velocity used to calculate the pre-set sampling rate. Record the
          sampling time, the orifice temperature and pressure drop on the data sheet.

   (g)    A survey shall consist of three tests. The minimum sample time per test shall be 15 minutes
          with a minimum sampling time per point of 3 minutes.

   (h)    Repeat the above steps for each sampling point. The blower need not be turned off between
          points if readjustment to the new sampling rate can be made rapidly.

   (i)    Care should be taken so that the nozzle does not touch the walls of the exhaust stack as
          deposited particulate may be dislodged and enter the train. If there is reason to believe this
          happened, discontinue the sample, clean the train and restart the test.

   (j)    If excessive loading of the filter should occur or the pressure drop should increase such that
          isokinetic conditions cannot be maintained, replace the filter and continue the test.

   (k)    At the conclusion of the sampling period, remove the probe from the exhaust and turn off the
          blower (do not reverse this order as the filter may be broken and the sample lost). Plug the
          nozzle to prevent sample loss and transport the sample to the recovery area.

   (l)   Measure the moisture content of the stack gas and the barometric pressure (absolute). The
         moisture may usually be measured by the wet-dry bulb technique.

                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                      Page 167 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 3.2 Sample Recovery
   (a)    The probe and nozzle should be brushed with the blower turned on to suck the particulate
          onto the filter.

   (b)    After filter removal and storage, the nozzle, probe and front half of the filter holder must be
          rinsed with acetone or methanol and brushed until all visible particulate is removed.


Appendix 3.3 Analytical Procedure
   The filter must be weighed immediately upon removal from the dessicator because of the relatively
   large filter and the possibility of a hygroscopic filter catch.




                                British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                        Page 168 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




9 Appendix 4 Sample Train Leak Check
  Procedures
Leak checks are necessary to assure that the sample has not been biased (low) by dilution air. The method
specifies that leak checks be performed at certain intervals as discussed below:
Pre-test - A pre-test leak check should be conducted by plugging the nozzle inlet and pulling a vacuum at
380 mm Hg (15 inches Hg) for at least one minute. The leakage rate must be less than 0.57 L/min. (0.02
 3
ft /min.) or 4% of the estimate average sampling rate, whichever is less. Sampling cannot proceed until
the leakage rate is acceptable.
During Sampling - If a component (e.g., filter assembly or impinger) change is made (including problems
due to breakages or cracks) during the sample run, a leak check shall be conducted before the component
change. The leak check shall be performed at a vacuum equal to the maximum vacuum reached up until
that point in the test. If this test has a leakage rate above the accepted maximum of 0.57 L/min. (0.02
 3
ft /min.) the sampling shall be considered invalid, and redone. After the component change the pre-test
shall be repeated.
Post-test - A leak check is mandatory at the conclusion of each sample run. The leak check should be
conducted at 380 mm (15 in.) Hg. If the leak check fails at 380 mm (15 in.), then the test may be repeated
at the maximum vacuum reached during any point in the test run. The maximum allowable leakage rate is
                  3
0.57 L/min. (0.02 ft /min.) or 4% of the average sample rate, whichever is less. A correction factor may be
applied if the leakage is in excess of the acceptable limits. However, approval for acceptance must be
granted by the Regulatory Administrator and each case will be assessed individually.




                                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                     Page 169 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 5 Sampling under Adverse
Conditions
It is essential that a sample be representative of the source from which it was taken. Various conditions
may affect this criterion. The following are some ways which these adverse conditions may be overcome:
Corrosive or highly reactive components - The use of special materials such as Inconel, glass, quartz
or Teflon.
High vacuum sources - (found before exhaust fans and high natural draft stacks) - Operation of the
sampling train pump before and after probe insertion to avoid the escape of impinger solution into the filter
holder; gas drawn before and after should not be included in the sample volume.
High pressure sources - Port sealed tightly yet allow for freedom of movement of the probe; for example,
a gas valve and packing gland could be incorporated in the port.
High temperature source (> 600°C or 1100°F) - Quartz or Inconel probe liner or water cooled probe with
temperature control to avoid cooling below dew point; shielded thermocouple.
High moisture content source - Probe temperature maintained above the dew point; probe sheathed with
insulation layer within an outer layer to prevent droplets from impinging on the actual probe, creating a
cooling effect via evaporation; for Method 5 locate a filter between the third and fourth impinger (as specified
in the method).
High velocity source - Relocate sampling site or expand duct or stack to reduce the velocity; pumps of
sufficient capacity to maintain the required sampling rates can be used.
Low velocity source - Sources with a velocity in the range of 1.5-3.0 m/s (5-10 ft/s) should be measured
using an inclined manometer with a scale of 0 to 0.6 kPa (0-2.4 in. H2O). Sources with velocities below 1.5
m/s (5 ft/s) should have the sampling site relocated or the duct constricted to increase the velocity.




                                   British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                        Page 170 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing


Appendix 6 Calibration Forms
      Appendix 6.1     General Calibration Form
      Appendix 6.2     Orifice Meter Calibration Form
      Appendix 6.3     Nozzle Diameter Calibration Form
      Appendix 6.4     Temperature Calibration Form
      Appendix 6.5     S-Type Pitot Calibration Form
      Appendix 6.6     Magnehelic Calibration Form
      Appendix 6.7     Dry Gas Meter Calibration Form




                     British Columbia Field Sampling Manual   Page 171 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 6.1 General Calibration Form

       Equipment                      Date Of Calibration    Place Of Calibration            Method

       S - Type Pitot


       Orifice Meter


       Temperature Device


       Rotameter


       Nozzle Diameter


       Dry Gas Meter


       Magnehelic Gauge




                                                            British Columbia Field Sampling Manual    Page 172 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing



Appendix 6.2 Orifice Meter Calibration Form
                                                                               Technician :

                                                                                     Date :

                                                                                Signature :

                                                                              Console I.D. :



Parameter Summary                      Run No. 1   Run No. 2      Run No. 3    Run No. 4       Run No. 5

Md = mol. wet dry air

Pb = atmospheric press.

Y = dry gas meter calibration

ΔH = press. diff.@ orifice

Ri = initial dry gas vol.

Rf = final dry gas vol.

Δ t = measured interval (min.)

Qm = Y (Rf - Ri)/ Δt

To = dry gas outlet temp.

Tm = To + 273 or 460

Pm = Pb + ΔH/13.6

Ko = Qm/(Tm/Pm• ΔH/Md)1/2

                                                                        Average Ko




                                                               British Columbia Field Sampling Manual      Page 173 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing



Appendix 6.3 Nozzle Diameter Calibration Form
                                                                      Technician :
                                                                            Date :
                                                                       Signature:


         Nozzle I.D.               Nozzle Diameter (a)             ∆Diameter          Average
                             D1           D2             D3           (b)            Diameter (c)




Where:
         (a)    D1, D2, D3 = three different nozzle diameters; each diameter must be measured with a
                micrometer to within 0.25 mm (0.001 in.)
         (b)    ∆Diameter = maximum difference between any two diameters, must be less than or equal
                to 1.0 mm (0.004 in.)
(c)      Average Diameter = average of D1, D2 and D3




                                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                Page 174 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing


Appendix 6.4 Temperature Calibration Form
                                                                         Technician :
                                                                                 Date :
                                                                          Signature :
                                                              Barometric Pressure :
                                                                    Land Elevation:

                                                            Type of Device and I.D.:



     Calibration                Mercury In Glass Thermometer Temp.                    Temperature Device
       Medium                  Actual Reading                Corrected                     Reading


      ICE BATH




   BOILING WATER




      HOT OIL




                   Note: Temperature Device must read within 1.5% of certified
                         mercury in glass thermometer to be acceptable.




                                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                          Page 175 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing


Appendix 6.5 S-Type Pitot Calibration Form
                                                                         Technician:

                                                                              Date :

                                                                         Signature :

                                                                          Pitot I.D. :


                                                                         Nozzle I.D.:


    Approx. Wind Vel.                    Ref. Pitot Vel. Press            S-Type Pitot Vel. Press         Pitot Coefficient
                                                                   1/2                             1/2
Ft/sec.                            ∆Pref.          Cref.(∆Pref.)           ∆Ps                (∆Ps)      Cp




Calibration Equation :    Cp = Cref.(∆Pref./∆Ps)
                                                    1/2                                  Cref. =



Where:
∆Pref. = velocity pressure measured by reference pitot
Cref. = coefficient of reference pitot
∆Ps = velocity pressure measured by S-type pitot
Cp = coefficient of S-type pitot




                                          British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                          Page 176 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing


Appendix 6.6 Magnehelic Calibration Form

                                                              Technician :

                                                                    Date :

                                                               Signature :
                                                              Gauge I.D. :

                                                                   Scale :



        Manometer ∆P1                Magnehelic ∆P2             % Pressure Difference




Average Percent Pressure Difference =(∆P1 -∆P2)/ ∆P1 •100
The magnehelic gauge must read within 5% of the gauge oil
manometer (over its usable range) or the calibration and/or
magnehelic gauge is not acceptable.




                            British Columbia Field Sampling Manual            Page 177 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing


Appendix 6.7 Dry Gas Meter Calibration Form

                                                                           Technician :

                                                                                  Date :

                                                                             Signature :


                                                                           Console I.D.:



      Parameter Summary                                Run No. 1           Run No. 2       Run No. 3

     Ta = ambient (wet test meter) temp.
     ∆P = press. diff. @ wet test meter
     Pb = atmospheric pressure
     Pv = vapour pressure
     ∆H = press. diff.@ orifice
     Ti = dry test inlet temp.
     To = dry test outlet temp.
     Ri = initial dry test vol.
     Rf = final dry test vol.
     Vi = initial wet test vol.
     Vf = final wet test vol.
     Pw = Pb + ∆P
     Pd = Pb + ∆H
     Tw = Ta + 273 or 460
     Td = [(Ti + To)/2] + 273 or 460
     Bw = Pv/Pb
     Calibration Equation Result (Y)
                                                     Average (Y)

Calibration Equation : Y = [(Vf - Vi)/(Rf - Ri)] [(Pw/Pd)(Td/Tw)](1- Bw)

The calibration factor must be within 2% (0.98-1.02) of the wet test meter or
spirometer reading for the meter to be acceptable.




                                       British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                          Page 178 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing


Appendix 7 Regulatory Agency Approved
Test Methods
      Appendix 7.1     Parameters and Approved Methods
      Appendix 7.2     Method Sources




                           British Columbia Field Sampling Manual   Page 179 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 7.1 Parameters and Approved Methods
 Parameter                                              Method                                     Notes
 Ammonia                                                EPA CTM 27
 Arsenic                                                EPA 108
 Benzene, Toluene, Ethyl benzene, Xylenes (BTEX)        EPA 18
 Beryllium                                              EPA 104
 Carbon Dioxide (CO2)                                   see Gas composition and molecular weight
                                                        listing
 Carbon Monoxide (CO)                                   EC c, EPA 10, EPA 10a, EPA 10b
 Chloride (Total)                                       EPA 26
 Chlorine and Chlorine Dioxide (Cl/ClO2)                EPA 40CFR63.457
 Combined Trains (Multi-metals including mercury)       EPA 29
 Combined Trains (particulate/metals/gaseous            EC f
 hydrogen chloride (HCL)
 Continuous            Emission            Monitoring   EC d, EPA PS-1 to PS-7
 (certification/QA/QC)

 Fluoride                                               Alcan 3010, EPA 13a, EPA 13b               Alcan 3010 only applies to aluminium production facilities
 Formaldehyde (HCOH)                                    NCASI a, SW 0011                           NCASI only applies to wood products facilities, use SW 0011
                                                                                                   for all other facilities
 Gas composition and molecular weight                   EPA 3
 (Orsat or fyrite)
 Gas composition and molecular weight                   EPA 3a
 (CO2, O2 instrumental)

 Gas composition and molecular weight                   EPA 3b
 (CO2, O2 Orsat)
 Hexavalent Chromium                                    EPA ALT 014, IC 306

 Hydrogen Chloride (HCl) Halides and Halogens           EPA 26, EPA 26a                            EPA 26a is to be used when acid particulate matter is
                                                                                                   present in the emission
 Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S)                                EPA 11, EPA 15                             EPA 15 also includes Carbonyl Sulphide (COS) and Carbon
                                                                                                   Disulphide (CS2)
 Lead (Pb)                                              EPA 12


                                                                                 British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                     Page 180 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing



 Parameter                                               Method                                        Notes
 Mercury                                                 EPA 101a
 Metals (Ag, As, Cd, Cu, Mn, Ni, Pb, Sn, Tl, Zn)         EPA 29
 Moisture Content                                        EPA 4
 Nitrogen Oxides (NOx)                                   EPA 7, EPA 7a, EPA 7c, EPA 7d, EPA 7e,
                                                         EPA 20
 Opacity                                                 EPA 9, EPA 9 alternative 1, MELP a, EPA 203   EPA 9 is the observation method; EPA 9 alternative 1 is the
                                                                                                       lidar method. EPA 203 is a proposed continuous method.
 Organics                                                EPA 25
 (Total gaseous non-methane as carbon, grab)
 Organics                                                EPA 25a                                       To be used for testing asphalt plants
 (Total gaseous hydrocarbons as methane,
 continuous)
 Organics                                                EPA 18
 (Speciation of hydrocarbons, grab)
 Organics                                                EC a
 (polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) and other semi
 volatile organic compounds)
 Organics                                                EC a, EPA 23
 (boiling point ≥ 100oC, semi-volatile organics (Semi-
 Vost),      polychlorinated     dibenzo-para-dioxins
 (PCDDs), and polychlorinated dibenzofurans
 (PCDFs))


 Organics                                                SW 0030
 (boiling point ≤ 100oC, volatile organics (VOST))
 Oxidants (ozone)                                        IC 411                                        With adjustments to impinger volumes*
 Oxygen (O2)                                             See Gas composition and molecular weight
                                                         listing
 Particulates                                            EC e, EPA 5, EPA 5d, EPA 5f
 Particulates (Cyclonic flow)                            Appendix 12                                   Appendix 12 is contained within this chapter of the B.C. Field
                                                                                                       Sampling Manual
 Particulates (High volume)                              EPA CTM 003, Oregon 8                         **
 Particulates (In-stack)                                 EPA 17
 Particulates (Sizing)                                   EPA 201a
 Particulates (PM10)                                     EPA 201, EPA 201a
 Particulates (and condensable organics)                 EPA 202, Oregon 7
 Sampling site and traverse points                       EC e, EPA 1
 Sampling site and traverse points                       EPA 1a


                                                                                 British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                           Page 181 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing



 Parameter                                               Method                                           Notes
 (Stacks/ducts 4-12” diameter)
 Sulphur                                                 EPA 16
 Sulphuric acid mist and sulphur dioxide (SO2)           EPA 8
 Sulphur dioxide (SO2)                                   EPA 6, EPA 6a, EPA 6c

 Parameter                                               Method                                           Notes
 Total Reduced Sulphur (TRS) compounds                   Appendix 11, EPA 15a, EPA16, EPA 16a,            Appendix 11 is under review, a revised method is anticipated
                                                         EPA 16b                                          for the next revision of this manual. .
 Validation Protocol                                     EPA 301                                          For new methods or the expansion of applicability for existing
                                                                                                          methods **
 Velocity and volumetric flow rate                       EC e, EPA 2
 (Stacks/ducts > 12” diameter)
 Velocity and volumetric flow rate                       EPA 2a, EPA 2d
 (Direct measurement)
 Velocity and volumetric flow rate                       EPA CTM 019
 (3-D probe)
 Vinyl chloride                                          EPA 106
 Volatile organic compounds (VOCs)                       see Organics listing


 For the test methods followed by an asterisk (*) impingers must be analyzed and reported individually to prove that sample breakthrough has not occurred.

 Test methods followed by a double asterisk (**) require prior written approval.


Testing of any parameters not listed or the altering of any methods listed above requires the approval of the Regulatory Administrator. A minimum of 30 days
advance notice by a written request along with the supporting documentation for the Regulatory Administrator’s evaluation is required to determine the acceptability
or rejection of such proposals. The Regulatory Administrator’s written approval is required before non-listed or altered method testing is to proceed.




                                                                                   British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                            Page 182 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 7.2 Method Sources
   Alcan     ALCAN METHODS
                a. Method 3010-98 Sampling of the Cell Room Roof Vents at the A.S. & C. Aluminum Smelters
                   in Quebec. Measurement of Total Particulates and Total Fluorides (Particulates and
                   Gaseous) Revision: June 1998.

             Listed in Appendix 7.1 as “Alcan” followed by the letter “a”.
             Alcan test methods can be obtained from Alcan International Limitée, Centre de recherche et de
             développement, Arvida - Madame Pâquerette Leclerc, 1955, boul. Mellon, C.P. 1250, Janquière
             Québec, G7S 4K8.

   EC        ENVIRONMENT CANADA-ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION SERVICE TEST METHODS
             a. Reference Method for Source Testing: "Measurement of Releases of Selected Semi-Volatile
                Organic Compounds from Stationary Sources" EPS 1/RM/2, June 1989.

             b.   Reference Method for Source Testing: "Measurement of Releases of Gaseous Hydrogen
                  Chloride from Stationary Sources" EPS 1/RM/1, June 1989.

             c.   Reference Method for Source Testing: "Measurement of Releases of Carbon Monoxide from
                  Stationary Sources" EPS 1/RM/4, July 1990.

             d.   Report: "Protocols and Performance Specifications for Continuous Monitoring of Gaseous
                  Emissions from Thermal Power Generation" EPS 1/PG/7, September 1993.

             e.   Reference Method for Source Testing: "Measurement of Releases of Particulate from
                  Stationary Sources" EPS 1/RM/8, December 1993.

             f.   Report: "The National Incinerator Testing and Evaluation Program: Air Pollution Control
                  Technology" EPS 3/UP/2, September 1986.

             Listed in Appendix 7.1 as “EC” followed by a letter from a to f to match the above listing.




                                 British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                             Page 183 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing



               EC test methods can be ordered through Environment Canada at: Environmental Protection
               Publications, Technology Development Branch, Conservation and Protection, Environment Canada,
               Ottawa, Ontario, K1A 0H3.

   EPA         UNITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY - CODE OF FEDERAL
               REGULATIONS 40 Parts 60 and 61 -TEST METHODS
               Listed in Appendix 7.1 as “EPA” followed by the appropriate method number, or for conditional test
               methods “EPA CTM” followed by the method number.
               Most EPA test methods can be found at the United States Environmental Protection Agency
               Technology Transfer Network (TTN) Website at http://www.epa.gov/ttn/emc/
               Methods listed as “EPA 40CFR” are contained in the United States National Archives and Records
               Administration,    Code      of     Federal    Regulations.         For    downloading        see
               http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/about-cfr.html#page1

   IC          INTERSOCIETY COMMITTEE - APCA, ACS, AICHE, APWA, ASCE, ASME, AOAC, HPS,
               IPA - TEST METHODS
               Listed in Appendix 7.1 as “IC” followed by the appropriate method number IC test methods are listed
               in a publication entitled “Methods of Air Sampling and Analysis,” Third Edition, James P. Lodge, Jr.,
               Editor, Intersociety Committee APCA, ACS, AIChE, APWA, ASME, AOAC, HPS, ISA, Lewis
               Publishers, Inc, 1989.

   MELP        BRITISH COLUMBIA MINISTRY OF ENVIRONMENT LANDS AND PARKS
               Source Testing Code For the Visual Measurement of The Opacity of Emissions From Stationary
               Sources.
               Listed in Appendix 7.1 as “MELP” followed by the letter “a”
               Can be found at http://www.env.gov.bc.ca/epd/cpr/codes/stcvmoe.html

  NCASI        National Council for Air and Stream Improvement
               Chilled Impinger Method for use at Wood Products Mills to Measure Formaldehyde Methanol, and
               Phenol.
               Listed in Appendix 7.1 as “IC” followed by the letter “a”.
               NCASI test methods can be obtained from the National Council of the Paper Industry for Air and
               Stream Improvement (NCASI), Inc., P.O. Box 13318, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709-3318, (919)
               558-1999. For general NCASI information see http://www.ncasi.org/

   Oregon      STATE OF OREGON - DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY AIR QUALITY DIVISION
               – SOURCE SAMPLING MANUAL VOLUME 1
               Listed in Appendix 7.1 as “Oregon” followed by the appropriate method number.
               Oregon test methods can be obtained from the Source Testing Co-ordinator, Department of
               Environmental Quality, 2020 Southwest 4th Ave, Suite 400, Portland, OR 97201, Tel: (503) 229-5554,
               Fax (503) 229-5265. Further information is available on the web at: http://www.deq.state.or.us/

   SW U.S. EPA TEST METHODS FOR EVALUATING SOLID WASTE
              Volume IC: Laboratory Manual Physical/Chemical Methods, Publication SW-846.
              Listed in Appendix 7.1 as “SW” followed by the appropriate method number.
              SW test methods can be obtained from the National Technical Information Service (NTIS),
              Technology Administration, U.S. Department of Commerce, Springfield, VA 22161, Tel: (703) 605-
              6000 or 1-800-553-6847, Fax: (703) 605-6900.               Further information is available at
              http://www.ntis.gov/




                                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                            Page 184 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 8 CEM (Non-Permanent In-
Stack) Reporting Forms
Appendix 8.1           Analysis of Calibration Gases
Appendix 8.2           Analyzer Calibration Data




                            British Columbia Field Sampling Manual   Page 185 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 8.1 Analysis of Calibration Gases


                                             Analytical method used:_________________________




Date:_______________________


                                                            Gas Concentration (indicate units)
               Sample Run                           Zero*              Mid-range**          High-range***


                     1



                     2



                     3



                 Average




        Maximum Percent Deviation
* Average must be less than 0.25 % of span
** Average must be 50 to 60 % of span
*** Average must be 80 to 90 % of span




                                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                         Page 186 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 8.2 Analyzer Calibration Data

Source Identification:____________________   Analyzer Calibration Data for Sampling:________________________
Test Personnel:_________________________      Runs:______________________________________________
                                              Span:______________________________________________
Date:_____________________________




                  Cylinder Value             Analyzer Calibration             Absolute Difference              Difference
                  (Indicate Units)           Response (Indicate Units)        (Indicate Units)                 (Percent of Span)


Zero gas


Mid-range


High-range




                                                                         British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                Page 187 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 9 Compliance Testing Report
Requirements
Appendix 9.1           Source Emission Survey Report Format
Appendix 9.2           Compliance Testing Report Summary Table
Appendix 9.3           System Calibration Bias and Drift Check




                           British Columbia Field Sampling Manual   Page 188 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 9.1 Source Emission Survey Report Format
Stack emission survey reports should contain the information listed below unless mutually acceptable
arrangements regarding the report content have been made between the facility and the Regulatory
Administrator.
1.      Title Page
        The title page shall contain:
(a)     plant name,
(b)     plant location,
(c)     permit, approval or registration number,
(d)     date of survey,
(e)     name of the sampling firm, and
(f)     report author(s).
2.      Summary
        The summary of the source emission survey shall include but not be limited to:
A compliance testing report summary, which lists the parameters, described in Appendix 9.2.
An indication of how the source emission survey compares with applicable emission limits and previous
emission testing shall be provided.
3.      Table of Contents
        A table of contents listing the report sections and the appendices shall be provided.
4.      Introduction
        The introduction shall include, but not be limited to, information on:
the reason for the survey,
the name(s) and contact telephone number(s) of the team member(s) which have taken relevant stack
sampling courses,
a list of stack sampling, and plant personnel present during testing with contact telephone numbers,
the name of the company which prepared the analytical results, and
a list of analytical personnel and contact telephone numbers.
        General comments on:
how the plant was operating,
process data (relevant to the operation of the source of emissions and to the performance of pollution
abatement equipment), and
presence of dust/fly ash on and around the plant, or other pertinent observations (such as opacity).




                                   British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                       Page 189 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing



5.      Test Methods
This section shall contain:
a brief outline of the methods and equipment used to collect and analyze the samples.
a detailed explanation of any deviation from the approved stack sampling methods or from any other
accepted sampling methods (prior written approval required).
6.      Results
The section shall contain but not be limited to tables which contain the following:
emission source description with permit appendix number or other identifying information,
name of pollutant(s),
pollutant concentration for each run and the average for the survey (mg/m3), corrected to reference
conditions as stated in the permit, approval, regulation or bylaw (i.e. specific %O2 or %CO2),
stack emission flow rate (m3/min.) at standard reference conditions of 20oC, 101.325 kPa, dry gas,
pollutant mass emission rate(s) (kg/hr.),
process production rate at the time of the survey (tonnes of product/hr. or other units as appropriate),
average or normal process production rate (same units as (f)) and
maximum process production rate (same units as (f)).
7.      Discussion
A discussion of the survey shall include but not be limited to explanations for any deviations from normal
due to problems associated with:
plant operation,
pollution control equipment operation,
inadequate sampling facilities,
sampling equipment, and
sample analysis.
For cases where there is a large variation (greater than 20%) between the emission survey conducted and
previous surveys, an explanation of probable causes is also required.
8.      Data Sheets
Stack sampling field sheets, or digital or chart recorder outputs. Originals or legible photocopies for each
sample run performed as part of the survey are required. Information on the sheets shall include but not
be limited to:
plant name, location, emission source description, date of survey, and run number (an individual sheet is
required for each run),


(ii)    relevant constant parameters for equipment as noted in the sampling method being performed and
as stated in this code,




                                   British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                      Page 190 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing



(iii)  tabulated results that pertain to individual traverse points, grab samples or the specific survey which
was performed, or digital or chart recorder outputs (with appropriate labeling),
(iv)    sample recovery procedures used, if applicable,
(v)     example calculations as appropriate.
Laboratory certificates of analysis, if applicable.
System calibration bias and drift check, described in Appendix 9.3 if applicable.
9.      Appendices
Stack sampling site diagram (with stack dimensions and measured locations of traverse points).
Cyclonic flow check.
Completed instrument calibration forms for equipment used during the survey.
Detailed sampling system description and schematic diagram.
Certificate of completion for relevant stack sampling course.




                                    British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                      Page 191 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 9.2 Compliance Testing Report Summary Table
Permit #(if applicable)                                        Compliance:                Yes ___     No ___ (attach explanations)
Facility Name:                                                 Report Complete:           Yes ___     No ___ (attach explanations)
Location (Legal Address)
Reason for test:                                               Test Date:                 _________19____ to _________ 19____
Test methods used:                                             Parameters                 Part ___ CO ___ SO2 ____ NOX ___ NO2 ___
Process operation:                                              measured:                 Other: ____ ____ ____        ____    ____
Production rate during test:                                   Normal Production rate:
Fuel consumption rate:                                         Type of fuel:
Pollution control equipment operating conditions:
Test Results:
   Emission Source and #            Parameter       Run #1     Run #2            Run #3              Average               Permit Limit




For Regulatory office use only                               I hereby state that the test results are accurate and the test(s) were conducted in
                                                             accordance with the procedures stated in the methods used.
- Reviewed By :
                                                             _______________________________                     ________________
- Date :                                                                 signature                                     date




                                                                 British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                       Page 192 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 9.3 System Calibration Bias and Drift Check



Source Identification:___________________________________            Run Number:_____________________
Test Personnel:___________________________________                   Span:________________________
Date:___________________________________




                                                          Initial Values                       Final Values
                               Analyzer           System             System Cal.      System             System Cal.      Drift
                              Calibration        Calibration             Bias        Calibration            Bias       (% of Span)
                              Response           Response            (% of Span)     Response            (% of Span)

        Zero gas

    Upscale gas (a)


   (a) As stated in the method being followed.




                                                                         British Columbia Field Sampling Manual          Page 193 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 10 Psychrometric Charts and
Vapour Pressure Tables
Appendix 10.1   Vapour Pressures of Water in Millimeters of Mercury
Appendix 10.2   High Temperature Psychrometric Chart for Air-Water Vapour Mixtures at 101.3 kPa




                                 British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                    Page 194 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 10.1                 Vapour Pressures of Water in Millimeters of Mercury
 Temp.
             0          1           2          3          4             5           6            7          8                  9
  (°C)
   0        4.58      4.93         5.29       5.69       6.10          6.54        7.01         7.51       8.05               8.61
   10       9.21      9.84         10.52     11.23      11.99         12.79       13.63        14.53      15.48              16.48
   20      17.54      18.65        19.83     21.07      22.38         23.76       25.21        26.74      28.35              30.04
   30      31.82      33.70        35.66     37.73      39.90         42.18       44.56        47.07      49.69              52.44
   40      55.32      58.34        61.50     64.80      68.26         71.88       75.65        79.60      83.71              88.02
   50      92.51      97.20       102.09     107.20     112.51        118.04      123.80       129.82     136.08             142.60
   60      149.50    156.43       163.77     171.38     179.31        187.54      196.09       204.96     214.17             223.73
   70      233.70    243.90       254.60     265.70     277.20        289.10      301.40       314.10     327.30             341.00
   80      355.10    369.70       384.90     400.60     416.80        433.60      450.90       468.70     487.70             506.10
   90      525.76    546.05       566.99     588.60     610.90        633.90      657.62       682.07     707.27             733.24
  100      760.00    787.57       815.86     845.12     875.06        906.07      937.92       970.60    1004.42            1038.92
  110     1074.56    1111.20      1148.74   1187.42    1227.25       1267.98     1309.94      1352.95    1397.18            1442.63
  120     1489.14    1536.80      1586.04   1636.36    1687.81       1740.93     1795.12      1850.83    1907.83            1966.35
  130     2026.16    2087.42      2150.42   2214.64    2280.76       2347.26     2416.34      2488.16    2560.67            2634.84
  140     2710.92    2788.44      2867.48   2948.80    3031.64       3116.76     3203.40      3292.32    3382.76            3476.24
  150     3570.48    3667.00      3766.56   3866.88    3970.24       4073.88     4183.80      4293.24    4404.96            4519.72
  160     4636.00    4755.32      4876.92   5000.04    5126.96       5256.16     5388.88      5521.40    5658.20            5798.04
  170     5940.92    6085.32      6233.52   6383.24    6538.28       6694.08     6852.92      7015.56    7180.48            7349.20
  180     7520.20    7694.24      7872.08   8052.96    8236.88       8423.84     8616.12      8809.92    9007.52            9208.16
  190     9413.36    9620.08      9831.36   10047.20   10265.32      10488.76    10715.24     10944.76   11179.60           11417.48
  200     11659.16




                                                              British Columbia Field Sampling Manual      Page 195 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 10.2     High Temperature Psychrometric Chart
for Air-Water Vapour Mixtures at 101.3 kPa
                                                         WATER VAPOUR % BY VOLUME
                                             0    10    20   30    40   50    60   70     80   90     100



                                        20


                                        30



                                        40




             DRY BULB TEMPERATURE, 0C
                                        50



                                        60



                                        70



                                        80




                                        90


                                         60
                                         55
                                         50
                                         45
                                         40
                                         35              70
                                                         65       75   80    85    90     95
                                         30
                                                       WET BULB TEMPERATURE, 0C




                                                 British Columbia Field Sampling Manual        Page 196 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing



Appendix 10.3     Sample Container, Preservation, and
Hold Times for Air (Vapours)

       Type of               Storage             Container                                      Maximum Hold
                                                                        Preservation
       Analysis               Temp1                Type                                             Time2
                                               Air – Vapours – Organic

      VOCs by
      Canister               ambient              SS canister                 none                    30 days
      Sampling

       VOCs by
                                                  Thermal
       Thermal                 ≤6ºC                                           none                    30 days
                                               desorption tube
      Desorption
   VOCs and
  other Volatile
                            ≤6ºC (or as
 Substances by
                            applicable          see BC Lab
  Charcoal and                                                                none                    30 days
                             reference         Manual Method
 Miscellaneous
                              method)
   Collection
     Media
  1
   Storage temperature applies to storage at the laboratory. For all tests where refrigeration at ≤6°C is required at
    the laboratory, samples should be packed with ice or cold packs to maintain a temperature of ≤10°C during
     transport to the laboratory. The storage of ≤8°C for microbiological samples applies during storage at the
  laboratory and during transport to the laboratory. To prevent breakage, water samples stored in glass should not
     be frozen. Except where indicated by "do not freeze", test results need not be qualified for frozen samples.
  2
      Hold Times: Single values refer to hold time from sampling to analysis. Where 2 values are given, the first is
            hold time from sampling to extraction, and the second is hold time from extraction to analysis.




                                       British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                           Page 197 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing



Appendix 11 Determination of TRS
Compounds Using Grab Sampling
   The Ministry test method for total reduced sulphur (TRS) is under review. A revised method is
   anticipated for the next revision of the B.C. Field Sampling Manual.
   For the latest status on the review, contact either:
   • Director of the Air Resources Branch, Ministry of Environment,
       Lands and Parks, or
   • Director, Air Quality Department, Greater Vancouver Regional District.




                              British Columbia Field Sampling Manual               Page 198 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 12 Method for Measuring
Particulate Emissions from Stationary
Sources with Cyclonic Flow Pattern
Alignment Method
The Technical Committee on Cyclonic Flow Sampling (Ministry of Environment, British Columbia,
November 31, 1990) originally compiled this method. For the text which follows minor modifications have
been made to ensure that this method is consistent with current Ministry stack sampling procedures.
Instead of referring to outdated Ministry methods reference is made to adopted U.S. EPA methods as
appropriate. The technical content of the method itself has not been altered.
Forward
The method described in this Appendix is used to measure the releases of particulate matter from stationary
sources with cyclonic flow pattern. This method is to be used in conjunction with U.S. EPA Methods 1 to
5. The complexity of the sampling and analytical procedures warrants that personnel performing them be
trained and experienced.
Application of this method for compliance testing requires strict adherence to the method in all aspects.
Deviations from the method may invalidate the test results. Any changes in equipment, reagents, materials,
procedures, or calculations from those specified in the method must be approved by the Regulatory
Administrator prior to testing.
This method is subject to amendment from time to time. Users should contact the Ministry for the most up-
to-date version that is applicable to the source to be tested.
This method was recommended by the Technical Committee on Cyclonic Flow Sampling. The members
of this committee were as follows:
Mr. B.B. Manna, P.Eng., Chair, Ministry of Environment (MoE), British Columbia
Mr. T.B. Leung, P.Eng., MoE, British Columbia
Mr. P.K. Leung, P.Eng., Environment Canada
Mr. L. Begoray, P.Eng., Alberta Environment
Mr. P. Tam, P.Eng., B.H. Levelton & Associates




                                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                     Page 199 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 12.1                      Principle
Particulate matter is withdrawn isokinetically from a number of sampling or traverse points in an enclosed
gas stream. At each traverse point, the nozzle is canted directly into the flow at the pre-determined
rotational angle where the maximum gas velocity occurs. The isokinetic sampling rate is based on the
actual stack gas velocity. The particulate sample is collected in the nozzle, probe, cyclone (if used) and
filter, all maintained within a temperature range required by U.S. EPA Method 5. The particulate weight is
determined gravimetrically after removal of uncombined water. Simultaneous determinations of the gas
stream moisture content, velocity, temperature, and molecular weight allow calculations of the particulate
concentration and the particulate mass emission rate to be made.


Appendix 12.2                      Applicability
This method is used to determine the concentration of particulates in enclosed gas streams of stationary
sources with cyclonic flow pattern. Gas flow inside a stack or flue is considered cyclonic if the average
absolute value of the rotational angles, as determined by Section 4.1 of this method, is greater than 10
degrees.
Prior to considering using this method, the tester must evaluate, to the satisfaction of the Regulatory
Administrator, the feasibility of eliminating cyclonic flow patters at the sampling location by one or a
combination of the following options:
Option One:     Relocation of the sampling ports
Option Two:     Installation of flow straighteners to minimize the cyclonic flow pattern
Option Three:   Stack extension to minimize cyclonic effects
If none of the above options are feasible, the Regulatory Administrator may determine the applicability of
the method for a specific source, taking into consideration pre-test information (to be submitted by the
proponent) such as:
(i)     Particulate and stack/flue characteristics (e.g. particle size and particulate concentration profile
across stack or flue).
(ii)    Sampling ports location.
(iii)   Rotational (or yaw) and tilt (or pitch) angles.
(iv)    Supersaturation state of the gas stream.
(v)     Stability of the cyclonic flow pattern with respect to time and space.
Proponents must also consult with the Regulatory Administrator prior to using this method to perform a
survey.




                                   British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                     Page 200 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 12.3                     Apparatus and Reagents
Same as for U.S. EPA Method 5 - 2 and 3.


Appendix 12.4                     Procedures
Pre-sampling Preparations
In addition to following the procedures specified in U.S. EPA Method 5 - 4, a preliminary traverse shall be
conducted to determine the velocity and rotational angle at each traverse point.
Insert into the stack an S-type pitot tube that is connected to a differential pressure gauge. Position the
pitot tube at the first traverse point. Rotate the pitot tube clockwise or anti-clockwise about its longitudinal
axis until the pressure taps are equal (i.e. ∆p equals zero or null). Determine and record the rotational
angle, α, to the nearest degree by rotating the pitot tube ninety degrees about its longitudinal axis and in
the opposite direction. Note that the value of α can be zero, positive or negative depending on the direction
of the gas velocity in relation to the stack or flue axis (Figure A1). Record the velocity pressure reading,
∆p, for this traverse point. Repeat the procedure for all the traverse points. Conduct a second series for
measurements by repeating the procedure for the traverse points. The second test should be conducted
under the same process conditions as the first test and the two tests should be conducted at least 60
minutes apart. After the rotational angle of each traverse point inside the stack/flue has been determined,
recorded and verified, calculate the average of the absolute value of α. If the average α for each series of
measurement is less than or equal to 10 degrees, the source is not considered to have a cyclonic flow
pattern. Otherwise, submit the pre-sampling test results to the Regulatory Administrator and obtain prior
approval to use this method for measuring particulate emissions under cyclonic flow conditions.
Preparation of Collection Train
Follow the procedures described in U.S. EPA Method 5 - 4.1.3.
Sampling Train Operation
If either or both the rotational angles and velocities measured for the same traverse point during the two
discrete test runs as described, under Section 4.1, differ by five degrees and five percent or less
respectively, the cyclonic flow pattern is deem to be stable; thus sampling procedures as outlined in Section
4.3.1 should be followed. However, if either or both the rotational angles and velocities differ by more than
five degrees or five percent respectively, the cyclonic flow pattern is deemed to be unstable.
Therefore steps must be taken to minimize the time elapsed between the determination of the rotational
angle and particulate sampling; sampling procedures are outlined in Section 4.3.2 should be followed.
The basic difference in the sampling procedures for stable and unstable cyclonic flow patterns is that for
stable cyclonic flows, isokinetic sampling can be carried out at the pre-determined rotational angle of each
traverse point whereas for unstable cyclonic flows, the rotational angle for each traverse point is determined
and is used immediately for isokinetic sampling.
Sampling Procedures for Stable Cyclonic Flow Patterns
Prior to sampling, determine the rotational angle of each traverse point by following the procedures
described in Section 4.1. Insert the sampling probe into the stack/flue with the nozzle canted directly into
the flow at the pre-determined rotational angle of the first traverse point. Immediately start the vacuum
pump and adjust the sampling rate to isokinetic conditions. Repeat this procedure for all the other traverse


                                   British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                        Page 201 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing



points. The isokinetic sampling rate is based on the actual stack gas velocity. Conduct isokinetic sampling
for all the traverse points by following the procedures contained in U.S. EPA Method 5.
Sampling Procedures for Unstable Cyclonic Flow Patterns
Determine the rotational angle of the first traverse point. Adjust the sampling probe with the nozzle canted
into the flow at this rotational angle. Immediately start the vacuum pump and adjust the sampling rate to
isokinetic conditions. Turn the vacuum pump off at the conclusion of the sampling at the first traverse point.
Repeat these procedures for all other traverse points. The isokinetic sampling rate is based on the actual
stack gas velocity. Isokinetic sampling for all the traverse points must be conducted by following the
procedures described in U.S. EPA Method 5.
Sample Recovery and Sample Analysis
Follow the procedures in U.S. EPA Method 5 - 4.2 and 4.3.




                                   British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                       Page 202 of 203
Part B2 Stationary Air Emissions Testing




Appendix 12.5                    Calculations and Reporting
The following modifications to U.S. EPA Method 5 are required:
To determine the stack/flue gas flow rate, Qsp, use the average of the vertical components of the stack/flue
gas velocity, vs cosine α, at each traverse point. Where possible, the calculated Qsp should be verified
independently by other means, such as taking flow measurement at another location.
The particulate emission rate, is the production of the concentration, cs, and the stack/flue gas flow rate,
Qsp, from Section 5.1.
To compensate for the potential bias associated with cyclonic sampling, correction factors may be used in
calculating and reporting the final particulate emission rate, cs, and Qsp . Consult with the Regulatory
Administrator regarding the values of the correction factors for a specific stationary emission source.




                                            vs


                                                  α




                                               STACK / FLUE

                                            α = Rotational Angle
                                          vs = Stack Gas Velocity




                                  British Columbia Field Sampling Manual                      Page 203 of 203
